en_tn/tn_ROM.tsv

1	Reference	ID	Tags	SupportReference	Quote	Occurrence	Note
2	front:intro	gtn1				0	Introduction to Romans Part 1: General Introduction Outline of the book of Romans Introduction (1:1–15) Main Theme: Righteousness is received by trusting in Jesus Christ (1:16–17) All mankind is condemned because of sin (1:18–3:20) Righteousness is received through Jesus Christ by trusting in him (3:21–5:21) Becoming like Christ in this life (6:1–8:39) God’s plan for Israel (9:1–11:36) Instructions for living as Christians (12:1–15:13) Conclusion (15:14–16:27) Who wrote the book of Romans? The Apostle Paul wrote the book of Romans and many other books in the New Testament. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was part of a strict Jewish religious group called the Pharisees. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire, telling people about Jesus. Paul probably wrote this letter while he was staying in the city of Corinth during his third trip through the Roman Empire. What is the book of Romans about? Paul wrote this letter to the Christians in Rome. Paul wanted to get them ready to receive him when he visited them. He said his purpose was to “bring about the obedience of faith” (16:26). In this letter Paul most fully described the gospel of Jesus Christ. He explained that both Jews and non-Jews have sinned, and God will forgive them and declare them righteous only if they believe in Jesus (chapters 1–11). Then he gave them practical advice for how believers should live (chapters 12–16), How should the title of this book be translated? Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Romans.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Rome,” or “A Letter to the Christians in Rome.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts What are the titles used to refer to Jesus? In Romans, Paul described Jesus Christ by many titles and descriptions: Jesus Christ (1:1), the Seed of David (1:3), the Son of God (1:4), the Lord Jesus Christ (1:7), Christ Jesus (3:24), Propitiation (3:25), Jesus (3:26), Jesus our Lord (4:24), Lord of Hosts (9:29), a Stone of Stumbling and Rock of Offense (9:33), the End of the Law (10:4), the Deliverer (11:26), Lord of the Dead and the Living (14:9), and the Root of Jesse (15:12). How should theological terms in Romans be translated? Paul uses many theological terms that are not used in the four Gospels. As early Christians learned more about the meaning of Jesus Christ and his message, they needed words and expressions for new ideas. Some examples of these words are “justification” (5:1), “works of the law” (3:20), “reconcile” (5:10), “propitiation” (3:25), “sanctification” (6:19), and “the old man” (6:6). If your language doesn’t have similar words, you can develop short phrases to communicate these ideas. For example, the term “gospel” can be translated as “the good news about Jesus Christ.” Translators should also remember that some of these terms have more than one meaning. The meaning will depend on how the author is using the word in that particular passage. For example, “righteousness” sometimes means that a person obeys God’s law. At other times, “righteousness” means that Jesus Christ has perfectly obeyed God’s law for us. What did Paul mean by “a remnant” of Israel (11:5)? The idea of a “remnant” is important both in the Old Testament and for Paul. Most of the Israelites were either killed or scattered among other people when the Assyrians and then the Babylonians conquered their land. Only a relatively few Jews survived. They were known as “the remnant.” In 11:1–9, Paul speaks of another remnant. This remnant is the Jews whom God saved because they believed in Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/remnant]]) Part 3: Important Translation Issues What did Paul mean by being “in Christ”? The phrase “in Christ” and similar phrases occur in 3:24; 6:11, 23; 8:1, 2, 39; 9:1; 12:5, 17; 15:17; and 16:3, 7, 9, 10. Paul used these kinds of phrases as a metaphor to express that Christian believers belong to Jesus Christ. Belonging to Christ means the believer is saved and is made a friend with God. The believer is also promised to live with God forever. However, this idea can be difficult to represent in many languages. These phrases also have specific meanings that depend on how Paul used them in a particular passage. For example, in 3:24 (“the redemption that is in Christ Jesus”), Paul referred to our being redeemed “because” of Jesus Christ. In 8:9 (“you are not in the flesh, but in the Spirit”), Paul spoke of believers submitting “to” the Holy Spirit. In 9:1 (“I tell the truth in Christ”), Paul meant that he is telling the truth that “is in agreement with” Jesus Christ. Nevertheless, the basic idea of our being united with Jesus Christ (and with the Holy Spirit) is seen in these passages as well. Therefore, the translator has a choice in many passages that use “in.” He will often decide to represent the more immediate sense of “in,” such as, “by means of,” “in the manner of,” or “in regard to.” But, if possible, the translator should choose a word or phrase that represents the immediate sense and the sense of “in union with.” (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/inchrist]]) How are the ideas of “holy,” “saints” or “holy ones,” and “sanctify” represented in Romans in the ULT? The Scriptures use such words to indicate any one of some various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles: Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God considers Christians to be sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact is that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless and faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones” or “holy people.” (See: 1:7) Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In cases where some other English versions have “saints” or “holy ones,” the ULT uses “believers.” (See: 8:27; 12:13; 15:25, 26, 31; 16:2, 15) Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” “consecrated,” or “reserved for.” (See: 15:16) The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions. What are the major issues in the text of the book of Romans? For the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT includes the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. “he \[God\] works all things together for good” (8:28). Some older versions read, “All things work together for good.” “But if it is by grace, it is no longer by works. Otherwise grace would no longer be grace” (11:6). Some older versions read: “But if it is by works, then is it no more grace: otherwise work is no more work.” The following verse is not in the best ancient copies of the Bible. Translators are advised not to include this verse. However, if in the translators’ region there are older Bible versions that have this verse, the translators can include it. If it is translated, it should be put inside square brackets (\[\]) to indicate that it is probably not original to the book of Romans. “May the grace of our Lord Jesus Christ be with you all. Amen” (16:24). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
3	1:intro	hn5n				0	Romans 1 General Notes Structure and Formatting Introduction (1:1–15) Greeting (1:1–7) Paul plans to visit Rome (1:8–15) Main Theme: Righteousness is received by having faith in Jesus Christ (1:16–17) All mankind is condemned because of sin (1:18–3:20) All non-Jews have sinned (1:18–32) Special Concepts in this Chapter The gospel This chapter refers to the contents of the book of Romans as “the gospel” (1:2). Romans is not a Gospel as are Matthew, Mark, Luke, or John, which are historical accounts of the life of Jesus. Instead, chapters 1–8 present the biblical gospel, which is the good news of salvation. The gospel contains the following true ideas: everyone has sinned, Jesus died for our sins, and Jesus came back to life again so that we might live for his glory and receive eternal life when we die. Universal Condemnation and the Wrath of God In this chapter Paul explains that no one has an excuse for sinning. We all know about the true God, Yahweh, from his creation all around us. Because of our sin and our sinful nature, every person justly deserves the eternal punishment of God. The requirement for this punishment was satisfied by Jesus dying on a cross for those who believe in him. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]]) Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter “God gave them over” Many scholars view the phrases “God gave them over” and “God gave them up” as theologically significant. For this reason, it is important to translate these phrases with God playing a passive role in the action. God allows men to pursue their own sinful desires; he does not force them to act sinfully. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4	1:1	x3em		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	Παῦλος	1	In the culture of this time, letter writers would give their own names first. Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “From Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
5	1:1	e417		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	δοῦλος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ, κλητὸς ἀπόστολος	1	These two phrases give further information about Paul. He describes himself as being someone whom God has given the position and authority of being Christ’s servant and apostle. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a person whom God has made a servant of Christ Jesus, and whom he has called to represent him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
6	1:1	v5b9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κλητὸς ἀπόστολος, ἀφωρισμένος	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom Jesus called to be an apostle and set apart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
7	1:1	ukts		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς εὐαγγέλιον Θεοῦ	1	Here, for introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which Jesusset him apart. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order to preach the gospel of God” or “so that I could announce the good news from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
8	1:1	ji90		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	εὐαγγέλιον Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the gospel that comes from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the gospel from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
9	1:2	cu3r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	ὃ	1	Here, which indicates that what follows is further information about “the gospel of God” mentioned in the previous verse. Paul is emphasizing that “the gospel of God” originated from the holy Scriptures, which also come from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “that is, the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
10	1:3	lab1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	περὶ τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	This phrase gives us further information about “the gospel of God.” Paul means that the message of God’s promised good news is about God’s Son, “Christ Jesus”, as mentioned in 1:1. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “that is, the gospel about his Son” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
11	1:3	lk5q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	Son is an important title that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
12	1:3	y2uy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τοῦ γενομένου ἐκ σπέρματος Δαυεὶδ	1	Here, from a seed of David is an idiom that refers to a descendant of David. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “who was born a descendant of David” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
13	1:3	rj9f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατὰ σάρκα	1	Here, according to the flesh is an idiom meaning “with reference to physical descent.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “according to natural descent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
14	1:4	nhz7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	τοῦ ὁρισθέντος Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν δυνάμει κατὰ Πνεῦμα ἁγιωσύνης ἐξ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν	1	In this verse, Paul places these phrases in the order he wants to emphasize. If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
15	1:4	at5s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῦ ὁρισθέντος Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that God did it. Alternate translation: “whom God designated as the Son of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
16	1:4	cp80		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Son of God is an important title that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
17	1:4	h32u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁρισθέντος Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν δυνάμει	1	Here, in power could refer to: (1) the means by which God designated Jesus as the Son of God. Alternate translation: “who was designated the Son of God by means of power” (2) a new level of power God gave to the Son of God. Alternate translation: “who was designated as the powerful Son of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
18	1:4	m89w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	Πνεῦμα ἁγιωσύνης	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe God’s Spirit that is characterized by holiness. This refers to the Holy Spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
19	1:4	js9m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐξ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of resurrection, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “by being resurrected from the dead ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
20	1:4	h97z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	νεκρῶν	1	Here, the phrase translated of dead ones refers to dead people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from among dead people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
21	1:4	zvql		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	νεκρῶν	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the place from where Jesus was resurrected. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “from death” or “from among the dead ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
22	1:4	brej		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	Here, our refers to all Christians, so it is inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
23	1:5	ww9a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δι’ οὗ	1	Here, whom refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “through Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
24	1:5	jr9e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δι’ οὗ ἐλάβομεν χάριν καὶ ἀποστολὴν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of grace and apostleship, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “he who acted kindly toward us and made us his apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
25	1:5	mosg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἐλάβομεν	1	Here, we is exclusive, and your language may require you to mark this form. It could refer to: (1) Paul and other apostles, as in the UST. (2) Paul speaking about himself in a plural form. Alternate translation: “I received” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
26	1:5	mv5n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς	1	Here, for introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which Jesus made Paul and other people his apostles. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
27	1:5	krzj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of obedience and faith, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “for people to faithfully obey Jesus among all the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
28	1:5	cf3g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως	1	Here, obedience of faith could refer to: (1) obedience that is characterized by trust in God. Alternate translation: “for obedience by trusting in God” or “obedience that comes from trusting in God” (2) obedience that results from trusting in God. Alternate translation: “faith that results in obedience” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
29	1:5	eem9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1	Here, the Gentiles could refer to: (1) the nations. Use this interpretation if you interpreted we to refer to all the apostles and retained it in your translation. Alternate translation: “among all people groups” (2) non-Jewish people groups. Use this interpretation if you interpreted we to refer only to Paul and translated it as “I”. Alternate translation: “among all non-Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
30	1:5	rd3v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ἐλάβομεν χάριν καὶ ἀποστολὴν εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “we received grace and apostleship for the sake of his name, for obedience of the faith among all the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
31	1:5	sxc7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ	1	Here, name could refer to: (1) Jesus himself. Alternate translation: “for the sake of Jesus” (2) Jesus’ reputation. Alternate translation: “for the sake of Jesus’ fame” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
32	1:6	xurz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν οἷς	1	Here, whom refers to “the Gentiles” who were mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. See how you translated “the Gentiles” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “among the nations” or “among the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
33	1:6	sks2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ὑμεῖς	1	In this letter, with four exceptions, the words you and “your” are plural and refer to the recipients of this letter, who are the believers in Rome (See 1:7). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you believers in Christ at Rome” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
34	1:6	qq9z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	κλητοὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe called ones who were called by Jesus Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “ones called by Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
35	1:7	z85a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	πᾶσιν τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ῥώμῃ	1	In this culture, after giving their own names, letter writers would then say to whom they were writing, and they would name those people in the third person. If that would be confusing in your language, you could use the second person. Alternate translation: “To all of you who are in Rome” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
36	1:7	zfwq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἀγαπητοῖς Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the adjective beloved as a noun in order to describe the church at Rome. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are loved of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
37	1:7	rkdh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἀγαπητοῖς Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the beloved who are loved by God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “loved by God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
38	1:7	v8bl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing	χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	In this culture, letter writers would offer a good wish for the recipient before introducing the main business of the letter. Use a form in your language that makes it clear that this is a greeting and blessing. Alternate translation: “May God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ give you grace and peace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
39	1:7	ys4e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of grace and peace, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “May God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ show his gracious acts to you and make you feel peaceful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
40	1:7	d8pa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	The word Father here is an important title that describes the relationship between God and Jesus and the relationship between God and believers. Alternate translation: “our Father God and the Lord Jesus, the Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
41	1:7	j61d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	Πατρὸς ἡμῶν	1	When Paul writes our here, he is speaking of himself and his readers, so our would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. Alternate translation: “who is the Father of us Christians” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
42	1:8	yrau		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	πρῶτον μὲν εὐχαριστῶ τῷ Θεῷ μου διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ περὶ πάντων ὑμῶν, ὅτι ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν καταγγέλλεται ἐν ὅλῳ τῷ κόσμῳ.	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “Because your faith is being proclaimed throughout the whole world, I first want to thank my God through Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
43	1:8	totr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	πρῶτον μὲν	1	First here indicates that Paul has finished his introduction to the letter, and what follows is the beginning of the content of the letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The first thing I want to say is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
44	1:8	tdsj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῷ Θεῷ μου	1	Paul is using the possessive form my God to express that he belongs to God. Paul does not mean that he owns God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the God I belong to” or “the God that owns me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
45	1:8	bphf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the way you trust in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
46	1:8	efqs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν καταγγέλλεται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The context indicates that other believers are proclaiming how great the faith of the Roman believers is. Alternate translation: “other people are proclaiming your faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
47	1:8	k7qf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἐν ὅλῳ τῷ κόσμῳ	1	Here, the whole world is an exaggeration that refers to all the parts of the world that were familiar to Paul and his readers, particularly the Roman Empire. Paul is not referring to every place on the planet. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “across the known world” or “wherever the Roman Empire is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
48	1:9	c7pa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1	For indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul could say in the previous verse that he thanks God for the Roman believers. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “You can be sure this is true because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
49	1:9	twht		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	μάρτυς & μού ἐστιν ὁ Θεός, ᾧ λατρεύω ἐν τῷ πνεύματί μου ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ, ὡς ἀδιαλείπτως μνείαν ὑμῶν ποιοῦμαι	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses and make a new sentence, if you need to do so. Alternate translation: “God is my witness how I continually make mention of you. I serve him in my spirit in the gospel of his Son” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
50	1:9	dx6p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	μάρτυς & μού & ᾧ λατρεύω ἐν τῷ πνεύματί μου ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	This phrase gives further information about God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “my witness, and I serve him in my spirit in the gospel of his Son” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
51	1:9	ll1e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μάρτυς & μού	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of witness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the one who testifies about me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
52	1:9	ydnc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ πνεύματί μου	1	Here, spirit refers to the inner person, which is what a person thinks and feels. Paul means that he serves God with complete devotion. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternative translation: “with my whole heart” or “wholeheartedly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
53	1:9	ih0v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ	1	Here, in indicates the means by which Paul served God and gospel refers specifically to proclaiming the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by proclaiming the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
54	1:9	o66d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the gospel that is about God’s Son. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “in the gospel about his Son” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
55	1:9	r2l5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱοῦ	1	Son is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
56	1:9	f9p2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἀδιαλείπτως	1	Here, continually is an exaggeration that emphasizes how frequently Paul prayed for the church at Rome. Paul does not mean that he spends all of his time praying for them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use plain language and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I regularly” or “I habitually” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole)
57	1:9	vtuq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	μνείαν ὑμῶν ποιοῦμαι	1	Here, making mention is an idiom for praying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I am … praying for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
58	1:10	mdc8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	πάντοτε ἐπὶ τῶν προσευχῶν μου, δεόμενος	1	This phrase means the same thing as “I continually make mention of you” in the previous verse. Paul uses them to emphasize how intensely he prays that God will allow him to visit the church at Rome. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase for the similar passage in the previous verse and in this verse provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “in all my prayers, I beg God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
59	1:10	oi0x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντοτε	1	Here, the word always is an exaggeration that figuratively expresses the frequency of Paul’s prayers to God for the church at Rome. Paul does not mean that he spends all of his time praying for them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use plain language and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “frequently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
60	1:10	b5wy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῷ θελήματι τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of will, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because God wills for me” or “because God wants me”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
61	1:11	ki6h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that this is a reason clause. Paul is indicating why he constantly prays to visit the church at Rome in 1:9–10. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “I am always requesting this because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
62	1:11	gjdu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἰδεῖν ὑμᾶς	1	Paul uses see to describe not only seeing the Christians in Rome, but also visiting them and spending time with them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to visit you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
63	1:11	b23b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	Here, so that indicates that this is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for why he wants to visit the believers at Rome. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
64	1:12	pnnm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	τοῦτο δέ ἐστιν	1	Here, and that is gives further information about why Paul wants to share “some spiritual gift” with the believers in Rome. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “namely” or “specifically” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
65	1:12	ux1x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	συνπαρακληθῆναι ἐν ὑμῖν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to mutually encourage each other” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
66	1:12	ddtm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	διὰ τῆς ἐν ἀλλήλοις πίστεως, ὑμῶν τε καὶ ἐμοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to refer to the trust in Jesus that both he and his readers shared. Paul means that they should mutually encourage each other because they have a mutual faith in Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “by both you and I sharing with one another how we trust in God” or “through talking about our common Christian faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
67	1:12	e6py		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πίστεως	1	See how you translated faith in 1:5 (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
68	1:13	yi1f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	οὐ θέλω δὲ ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν	1	Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be helpful in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I definitely want you to be informed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
69	1:13	rwzn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀγνοεῖν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to not know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
70	1:13	u1cq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	Although the term brother is masculine, Paul is using the word here to refer to both male and female believers in Christ. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
71	1:13	zvrj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ ἐκωλύθην ἄχρι τοῦ δεῦρο	1	Paul assumes that his readers will know that until now means “even at the present time.” He does not mean that he was no longer hindered at the moment he wrote these words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “but I have been hindered and still am hindered now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
72	1:13	b92o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐκωλύθην	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God hindered me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
73	1:13	gnu7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἵνα τινὰ καρπὸν σχῶ καὶ ἐν ὑμῖν	1	Here, fruit could refer to: (1) people believing in the gospel as a result of Paul’s preaching, which would connect this verse to the idea in 1:15. Alternative translation: “so that I might lead people to salvation among you also” (2) strengthening the believers in Rome, in which case this would have the same meaning as “some spiritual, gracious gift” in 1:11. Alternative translation: “so that I might strengthen you also” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
74	1:14	s4bm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὀφειλέτης εἰμί	1	Paul speaks of himself as if he were a debtor who owed money to people who were not Jews, such as Greeks and barbarians. Paul means that he was obligated to preach the gospel to non-Jews because God had commanded him to do so. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternative translation, “I am obliged to preach the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
75	1:14	j2sz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	Ἕλλησίν τε καὶ βαρβάροις	1	Here Paul uses Greeks and barbarians to represent all the Gentiles referred to in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to all types of Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
76	1:14	lio6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	σοφοῖς τε καὶ ἀνοήτοις	1	Here Paul uses wise ones and foolish ones to represent all types of people among the Gentiles referred to in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to all types of people among the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
77	1:14	q728		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	Ἕλλησίν τε καὶ βαρβάροις, σοφοῖς τε καὶ ἀνοήτοις	1	These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize that he is obligated to preach the gospel to every kind of Gentile. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “to each and every kind of Gentile” or “to every single non-Jewish person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
78	1:15	h9zv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὕτως	1	So here indicates that this a reason clause. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is the reason why” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
79	1:16	oa6m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For indicates the reason why Paul is eager to proclaim the gospel in Rome. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “I am eager to do this because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
80	1:16	mm2f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	οὐ & ἐπαισχύνομαι	1	Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I am proud” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
81	1:16	nvkv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	οὐ & ἐπαισχύνομαι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον	1	Here, gospel refers specifically to the preaching of the gospel that was mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am not ashamed to preach the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
82	1:16	f5x9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	δύναμις γὰρ Θεοῦ ἐστιν εἰς σωτηρίαν	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the gospel as the powerful way that God saves people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression Alternate translation: “for it is the powerful way that God saves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
83	1:16	sz5b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς σωτηρίαν	1	Here, for indicates that salvation is the result of the gospel. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “that results in the salvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
84	1:16	merb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς σωτηρίαν παντὶ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of salvation, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “for saving everyone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
85	1:16	htqe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	παντὶ τῷ πιστεύοντι	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “to everyone who believes that Jesus is the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
86	1:16	dwtm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	Ἰουδαίῳ τε πρῶτον καὶ Ἕλληνι	1	Paul is speaking of Jewish people and Greek people in general, not of one particular Jew or Greek. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “both to the Jewish people first and to the Greek people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
87	1:16	u8on		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ἰουδαίῳ τε πρῶτον	1	The phrase the Jew first means that the Jewish people were the first people to hear the gospel. Paul does not mean that the Jew is better or has a high status than the Greek. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “both to the Jews, who first heard the gospel,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
88	1:16	al16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ἕλληνι	1	Here, the Greek refers to non-Jewish people in general. It does not refer only to people from the country of Greece. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the non-Jew” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
89	1:17	of98		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows is the reason why the gospel is the power of God that leads to salvation, as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “The gospel can save everyone who believes because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
90	1:17	wfsc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δικαιοσύνη & Θεοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ ἀποκαλύπτεται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “it reveals the righteousness of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
91	1:17	h38h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	δικαιοσύνη & Θεοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ ἀποκαλύπτεται	1	Paul speaks about the righteousness of God as if it were an object that could be revealed. He means that people learn about the righteousness of God when someone proclaims the gospel to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternative translation: “when people preach the gospel, those who hear it learn about the righteousness of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
92	1:17	qr31		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	δικαιοσύνη & Θεοῦ	1	Here Paul is using the possessive form of God that could refer to: (1) righteousness that comes from God. Alternate translation: “the righteousness from God” (2) righteousness that characterizes God. Alternate translation: “God’s righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
93	1:17	gsl5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δικαιοσύνη & Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of righteousness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the way in which God causes people to become righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
94	1:17	ii3m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐν αὐτῷ	1	The pronoun it here refers to “the gospel” that was mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
95	1:17	jl9i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐκ πίστεως εἰς πίστιν	1	Here, from faith to faith describes how the righteousness of God is revealed. It is an idiom that could mean: (1) completely by faith alone. Alternate translation: “by faith from beginning to end” or “through faith from first to last” (2) by the faith that all believers share, in the way that the phrase “from sea to sea” means “from one sea to another sea.” Alternate translation: “from one person’s faith to another person’s faith” (3) by faith that leads to increasing faith. Alternate translation: “through faith for faith” or “from one degree of faith to another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
96	1:17	igg9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	Here Paul uses just as it is written to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book (Habakkuk 2:4). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “just as it is written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
97	1:17	bgvh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation was written by the prophet Habakkuk. Alternate translation: “just as the prophet Habakkuk wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
98	1:17	oih2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ὁ δὲ δίκαιος ἐκ πίστεως ζήσεται	1	In this sentence Paul quotes Habakkuk 2:4. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
99	1:17	a9y7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκ πίστεως ζήσεται	1	Here, live could refer to: (1) eternal life. Alternative translation: “will live eternally by faith” (2) the quality of one’s physical life. Alternative translation: “will truly live by faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
100	1:17	e7eu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πίστεως	2	See how you translated faith in 1:5 (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
101	1:18	c69s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows is the reason why “the righteous one must live by faith,” as mentioned in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “The righteous one must live this way because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
102	1:18	r15v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀποκαλύπτεται & ὀργὴ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God is revealing his wrath” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
103	1:18	wzy3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὀργὴ Θεοῦ	1	Here Paul uses wrath to refer to the outcome of God’s wrath, which is judging and punishing people because they are unrighteous. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “God’s wrathful punishment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
104	1:18	kjen		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐπὶ πᾶσαν ἀσέβειαν καὶ ἀδικίαν ἀνθρώπων	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of ungodliness and unrighteousness, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “against all the ungodly and unrighteous acts of men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
105	1:18	fz23		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ πᾶσαν ἀσέβειαν καὶ ἀδικίαν ἀνθρώπων	1	Here, ungodliness and unrighteousness of men refer to the people who do ungodly and unrighteous things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “against people who do any ungodly or unrighteous deeds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
106	1:18	td8t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῶν τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐν ἀδικίᾳ κατεχόντων	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas of unrighteousness and truth, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “who, because they do not want to act righteously, keep holding back what is true about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
107	1:18	rztp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπων	1	Although the term men is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
108	1:18	g3qm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	τῶν τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐν ἀδικίᾳ κατεχόντων	1	This phrase gives us further information about the nature of people, who are called men in the previous phrase. It is not making a distinction between different kinds of men. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “these same people who in unrighteousness are holding back the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
109	1:18	k4ql		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	τῶν τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐν ἀδικίᾳ κατεχόντων	1	Here Paul speaks of truth as if it were a person who could be restrained or held back. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “who in unrighteousness prevent the truth from being known” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
110	1:19	jd85		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸ γνωστὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “what people can know about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
111	1:19	r6ef		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς & αὐτοῖς	1	The pronoun them refers to the ungodly and unrighteous people mentioned in the previous verse. Unless, otherwise noted, them, “their”, and “they” refer to ungodly and unrighteous people throughout 1:19–32. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “all these ungodly and unrighteous people … all these ungodly and unrighteous people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
112	1:20	fo6q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὰ & ἀόρατα αὐτοῦ & καθορᾶται; ἥ τε ἀΐδιος αὐτοῦ δύναμις καὶ θειότης	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of qualities, power, and nature, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what people cannot see about God, both how eternally powerful he is and who he is are clearly seen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
113	1:20	szu6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καθορᾶται	1	Paul uses seen to refer to perceiving something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “are clearly perceived” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
114	1:20	abdl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθορᾶται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people can clearly see” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
115	1:20	uvc1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	κόσμου	1	Paul uses the world figuratively to refer to the whole universe. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of all that God made” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
116	1:20	dr8v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῖς ποιήμασιν νοούμενα	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which the things God has made understand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
117	1:20	dxr6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς τὸ εἶναι αὐτοὺς ἀναπολογήτους	1	So indicates that this is a result clause. Use the natural way in your language to introduce a result clause. Alternate translation: “As a result, they are without excuse” or “This is why they are without excuse” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
118	1:21	pgta		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	γνόντες τὸν Θεὸν	1	Here Paul uses having known to imply that these people know about God or know that God exists. He does not mean that they know God personally. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “having known about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
119	1:21	iasg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	οὐχ ὡς Θεὸν ἐδόξασαν ἢ ηὐχαρίστησαν	1	Here, not glorify him and nor give him thanks mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize that ungodly people dishonor God. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “they thanklessly despise God” or “they completely disregard God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
120	1:21	c6v7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ηὐχαρίστησαν	1	Here Paul speaks of expressions of thanks as if they were something that could be given to a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “did they thank him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
121	1:21	dant		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἐματαιώθησαν ἐν τοῖς διαλογισμοῖς αὐτῶν, καὶ ἐσκοτίσθη ἡ ἀσύνετος αὐτῶν καρδία	1	These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize how foolish these ungodly people became by refusing to honor God. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “they became completely senseless in the way they think” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
122	1:21	xm6i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐματαιώθησαν ἐν τοῖς διαλογισμοῖς αὐτῶν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they began to think futile things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
123	1:21	d2c0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐσκοτίσθη ἡ ἀσύνετος αὐτῶν καρδία	1	Here Paul speaks of the heart as if it could mentally sense things or could become black in color. He also uses darkened to refer to someone losing the ability to understand something. He means that these people lack spiritual sensitivity and are unable to understand spiritual things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “their heart became incapable of feeling or understanding spiritual things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
124	1:21	t4p7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	καρδία	1	Here Paul uses heart to refer a person’s inner being or mind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “inner being” or “mind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
125	1:21	sw8q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	καρδία	1	The word heart is a singular noun that refers to the inner beings or minds of a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “inner beings” or “hearts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
126	1:22	ddr2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἐμωράνθησαν	1	The phrase they became foolish is in contrast to what these unrighteous people claimed about themselves in the previous clause. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “instead they became foolish” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
127	1:22	ly68			ἐμωράνθησαν	1	Alternate translation: “they became fools” or “they acted like fools” or “they started acting like fools”
128	1:23	k9xu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ	1	Here, and indicates that what follows describes what these ungodly and unrighteous people did after they “became foolish,” as stated in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. You may want to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “; then they” or “Then they” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
129	1:23	x2wl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καὶ ἤλλαξαν τὴν δόξαν τοῦ ἀφθάρτου Θεοῦ ἐν ὁμοιώματι εἰκόνος φθαρτοῦ ἀνθρώπου, καὶ πετεινῶν, καὶ τετραπόδων, καὶ ἑρπετῶν.	1	Paul uses exchanged to describe the actions of these ungodly people as if they were exchanging goods or money. Paul means that they stopped worshiping God and started worshiping idols that resembled these creatures. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. You may want to start a new sentence here. Alternative translation, “; then they stopped glorifying the imperishable God in order to worship images things that God created: perishable humans, birds, four-footed animals, and creeping things” or “Then they stopped glorifying the imperishable God in order to worship images things that God created: perishable humans, birds, four-footed animals, and creeping things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
130	1:23	qb7f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	τὴν δόξαν τοῦ ἀφθάρτου Θεοῦ ἐν ὁμοιώματι εἰκόνος φθαρτοῦ ἀνθρώπου	1	The two phrases the glory of the imperishable God and a likeness of an image of perishable man mean the opposite thing. Paul says the opposite thing with similar phrases to emphasize the contrast between God and man. Use a natural way in your language to express a contrast that uses parallel ideas. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
131	1:23	r14e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν δόξαν τοῦ ἀφθάρτου Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of glory, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what glorifies the imperishable God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
132	1:23	u971		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὴν δόξαν τοῦ ἀφθάρτου Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the relationship between glory and the imperishable God. This phrase could refer to: (1) the glory that characterizes God. Alternate translation: “the glory that characterizes the imperishable God” (2) the glory that belongs to God. Alternate translation: “the glory that belongs only to the imperishable God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
133	1:23	rfez		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ὁμοιώματι εἰκόνος	1	The words translated as likeness and image were used in the Greek translation of the Old Testament to refer to the same thing (Genesis 1:26). Here Paul is using the possessive form to indicate that image is an explanation of likeness. Use a word or phrase that introduces a further explanation or elaboration in your language. Alternate translation: “a likeness, that is, an image” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
134	1:23	osrt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	καὶ πετεινῶν, καὶ τετραπόδων, καὶ ἑρπετῶν	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a phrase would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “and likenesses of birds, and likenesses of four-footed animals, and likenesses of creeping things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
135	1:23	rq7h			τετραπόδων	1	The phrase four-footed beasts refers to animals that walk on four feet. Use the most natural form to describe this kind of animal in your language. Alternate translation: “of quadrupeds” or “of four-legged beasts”
136	1:24	fvv6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ	1	The word Therefore indicates that what follows is a logical conclusion. Therefore here introduces a result clause. Paul is stating the result of people rejecting the glory of God, as described in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a result clause. Alternate translation: “As a result” or “This is why” or “Because of this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
137	1:24	ec9q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	παρέδωκεν αὐτοὺς ὁ Θεὸς ἐν ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις τῶν καρδιῶν αὐτῶν	1	Paul speaks of these people as if God were physically giving them to lusts. He means that God is allowing them to have what they desire. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “God permitted them to become controlled by the lusts of their hearts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
138	1:24	tlv5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις τῶν καρδιῶν αὐτῶν	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe lusts that come from their hearts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the lusts that come from their hearts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
139	1:24	le2o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῶν καρδιῶν αὐτῶν	1	See how you translated “heart” in 1:21. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
140	1:24	rkou		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς ἀκαθαρσίαν	1	This is a result clause. Paul is stating the result of people indulging in the lusts of their hearts. Use the natural way in your language to express result. Alternate translation (with a comma preceding): “, resulting in uncleanness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
141	1:24	ze8i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς ἀκαθαρσίαν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of uncleanness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to become unclean” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
142	1:24	g0r4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰς ἀκαθαρσίαν	1	Here Paul uses uncleanness to refer to sexual immorality as if it were something dirty. He means that these lustful people become spiritually impure as a result of doing sexually immoral acts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation, “to become sexually immoral” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
143	1:24	puad		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	τοῦ ἀτιμάζεσθαι	1	Here, to dishonor could refer to: (1) the result of God giving the people over to their lusts. Alternate translation: “which results in them dishonoring” (2) the purpose for which God gave them over to their lusts. Alternate translation: “in order to dishonor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
144	1:24	a8pm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	τοῦ ἀτιμάζεσθαι τὰ σώματα αὐτῶν	1	In this clause Paul uses dishonor their bodies figuratively to refer to sexually immoral acts. This is a polite way of referring to a shameful act. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different polite way of referring to this or you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to commit sexually immoral acts” or “to indulge in sexually immoral activity” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
145	1:25	dv6h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἵτινες μετήλλαξαν τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν τῷ ψεύδει	1	Paul uses exchanged to describe the actions of these ungodly people as if they were exchanging goods or money. Paul means that they stopped believing what is true about God and started believing in idols, which are false gods. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated exchanged in 1:23. Alternative translation, “these people refused to trust what God says is true and accepted what is false” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
146	1:25	koee		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν τῷ ψεύδει	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of truth and lie, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what is correct about God for what is incorrect” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
147	1:25	e9pj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe truth that is about God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the truth about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
148	1:25	bl7p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἐσεβάσθησαν καὶ ἐλάτρευσαν	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize that these people completely rejected worshiping the true God. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “wholeheartedly worshiped” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
149	1:25	x3t4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ κτίσει	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of creation, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what was created” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
150	1:25	xrsa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	τὸν κτίσαντα, ὅς ἐστιν εὐλογητὸς εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας	1	This phrase gives further information about the Creator. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “the Creator God who is blessed to eternity” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
151	1:25	m8zg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing	ὅς ἐστιν εὐλογητὸς εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας	1	After naming the Creator, Paul adds a blessing. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “may he be blessed to eternity” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
152	1:25	v1ex		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	εὐλογητὸς	1	Paul is using the adjective blessed as a noun in order to describe the Creator. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the Blessed One” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
153	1:26	sk6f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	παρέδωκεν αὐτοὺς ὁ Θεὸς εἰς	1	See how you translated this phrase in 1:24. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
154	1:26	hw81		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	πάθη ἀτιμίας	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe passions that are characterized by dishonor. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “dishonorable passions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
155	1:26	lk73		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πάθη ἀτιμίας	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of passions and dishonor, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “dishonor themselves by doing what they are passionate about” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
156	1:26	j4ni		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	The word translated for introduces an explanation of passions of dishonor. This explanation begins after the word for and continues through the end of the next verse. Use a word or phrase that introduces a further explanation or elaboration in your language. Alternate translation: “that is,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
157	1:26	jqyi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μετήλλαξαν τὴν φυσικὴν χρῆσιν εἰς τὴν παρὰ φύσιν	1	Paul uses exchanged to describe the actions of ungodly women as if they were exchanging goods or money. Paul means that they stopped doing natural sexual acts with men and started doing sexual acts with other women, which is contrary to nature. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated exchanged in 1:23 and 25. Alternative translation, “stopped doing natural sexual acts with men and started doing unnatural sexual acts with women” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
158	1:26	vs4a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	τὴν φυσικὴν χρῆσιν	1	Paul uses the natural use figuratively to refer to sexual activity between women and men. This is a polite way of referring to something that would be offensive in some cultures. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different polite way of referring to this or you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “sexual activity with males” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
159	1:26	qvr5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	τὴν παρὰ φύσιν	1	Paul uses contrary to nature figuratively to refer to sexual activity between women and other women. This is a polite way of referring to something immoral. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “sexual activity with other females” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
160	1:27	ji3l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὁμοίως τε καὶ οἱ ἄρσενες	1	This phrase emphasizes that what follows is similar to 1:26. Alternate translation: “in the same way, even the males” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
161	1:27	gn3f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀφέντες	1	Paul speaks of these men as if they were leaving their location to go to another one. He means that they are abandoning or rejecting the way God intended for people to do sexual acts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “having abandoned” or “having rejected” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
162	1:27	g3ja		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	τὴν φυσικὴν χρῆσιν τῆς θηλείας	1	See how you translated the natural use in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
163	1:27	qvi3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὴν φυσικὴν χρῆσιν τῆς θηλείας	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the natural use that is associated with the female. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the natural use associated with the female” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
164	1:27	pqpo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	τῆς θηλείας	1	Paul is speaking of these females in general, not of one particular female. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “of females” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
165	1:27	yvm1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐξεκαύθησαν ἐν τῇ ὀρέξει αὐτῶν εἰς ἀλλήλους	1	Paul speaks of lust as if it were something that could burn like a fire. He means that their lust is out of control, like a wildly burning fire. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “passionately lusted after one another” or “intensely desired each other” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
166	1:27	ylj6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐξεκαύθησαν ἐν τῇ ὀρέξει αὐτῶν εἰς ἀλλήλους	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of lust, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “burned lustfully for one another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
167	1:27	kxwj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	ἄρσενες ἐν ἄρσεσιν τὴν ἀσχημοσύνην κατεργαζόμενοι	1	This phrase refers to men doing sexual acts with other men. This is a polite way of referring to something immoral. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different polite way of referring to this or you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “males shamelessly engaging in sexual activity with each other” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
168	1:27	u2hh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κατεργαζόμενοι	1	Paul speaks of men doing unnatural things with each other as if their interaction could produce something, a shameless act. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “committing” or “engaging in” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
169	1:27	sjhb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	καὶ τὴν ἀντιμισθίαν ἣν ἔδει τῆς πλάνης αὐτῶν, ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἀπολαμβάνοντες	1	In the original language the phrase the penalty is at the front of the clause for emphasis. If it would be more natural in your language, you could arrange the order of these phrases to show that emphasis. Alternate translation: “and the penalty, which was necessary for their perversion, receiving in themselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
170	1:27	jtru		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	2	Here, and indicates that what follows is the result of the shameless acts. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “and as a result” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
171	1:27	raet		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἀπολαμβάνοντες	1	Paul speaks of the penalty for their sinful activity as if it were something that they could receive inside of themselves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “experiencing in their own bodies” or “receiving among themselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
172	1:27	x6fz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἀντιμισθίαν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of penalty, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the punishing act” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
173	1:27	dbtt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἣν ἔδει τῆς πλάνης αὐτῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of perversion, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “which was necessary for their perverted acts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
174	1:28	bt7u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	οὐκ ἐδοκίμασαν, τὸν Θεὸν ἔχειν ἐν ἐπιγνώσει	1	Here, having God in their full awareness is an idiom that refers to thinking about God or acknowledging God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “they did not approve of thinking about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
175	1:28	f53x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸν Θεὸν ἔχειν ἐν ἐπιγνώσει	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of full awareness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “being fully aware of God” or “fully acknowledging that God exists” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
176	1:28	yy1c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	παρέδωκεν αὐτοὺς ὁ Θεὸς εἰς	1	See how you translated this phrase in 1:24 and 26. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
177	1:28	p8z2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	εἰς ἀδόκιμον νοῦν	1	Paul is speaking of the minds of these ungodly people in general, not of one particular mind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “to disapproved minds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
178	1:28	r1pt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰς ἀδόκιμον νοῦν	1	Here, mind refers to a person’s will and moral reasoning. The mind of one of these ungodly people is disapproved, which means that it has been rejected by God as worthless. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to a mind that has become worthless” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
179	1:28	ie4l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ποιεῖν	1	Here, to do could refer to: (1) the result of a disapproved mind. Alternate translation: “and as a result they do” or “causing them to practice” (2) the purpose of a disapproved mind. Alternate translation: “so that they do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
180	1:28	aye6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὰ μὴ καθήκοντα	1	The phrase those things that are not proper refers to what Paul describes in 1:29–31. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “those improper things that follow” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
181	1:29	v0zj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πεπληρωμένους πάσῃ ἀδικίᾳ, πονηρίᾳ, πλεονεξίᾳ, κακίᾳ	1	Paul uses filled with to refer to these ungodly people as if they were a container filled with the sins that Paul lists in this clause. Like a container that has been filled with something, the people are completely controlled by these sins. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “fully controlled by unrighteousness, wickedness, covetousness, and malice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
182	1:29	t4qm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πεπληρωμένους	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they filled themselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
183	1:29	uqks		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πεπληρωμένους πάσῃ ἀδικίᾳ, πονηρίᾳ, πλεονεξίᾳ, κακίᾳ;	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of unrighteousness, wickedness, covetousness, and malice, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “filled with all unrighteous, wicked, covetous, and malicious thoughts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
184	1:29	a7s3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μεστοὺς φθόνου, φόνου, ἔριδος, δόλου, κακοηθείας	1	Paul uses full of to refer to these ungodly people as if they were a container full of the sins that Paul lists in this clause. Like a container that is full of something, the people are completely controlled by these sins. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “fully controlled by envy, murder, strife, deceit, and evil intent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
185	1:29	dzda		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μεστοὺς φθόνου, φόνου, ἔριδος, δόλου, κακοηθείας	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of envy, murder, strife, deceit, and evil intent, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “they are full of envious, murderous, contentious, and deceitful thoughts, and they intend to do evil things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
186	1:30	f4tt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	θεοστυγεῖς, ὑβριστάς, ὑπερηφάνους, ἀλαζόνας & ἀπειθεῖς	1	Paul is using these adjectives as nouns in order to describe a group of people. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who hate God, people who are insolent, people who are arrogant, people who are boastful … people who are disobedient” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
187	1:30	th8q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	καταλάλους & ἐφευρετὰς κακῶν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of slanderers and inventors, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “people who speak against others … people who invent ways to do evil things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
188	1:30	qq50		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐφευρετὰς κακῶν	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe inventors who invent evil things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “inventing evil things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
189	1:31	i7ix		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἀσυνέτους, ἀσυνθέτους, ἀστόργους, ἀνελεήμονας	1	Paul is using these adjectives as nouns in order to describe a group of people. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are senseless, faithless, heartless, and merciless” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
190	1:32	cxx8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ δικαίωμα	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of decree, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what is rightly decreed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
191	1:32	ytu6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ δικαίωμα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a the righteous decree that comes from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “God’s righteous decree” or “that what God decrees is right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
192	1:32	z12q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὅτι	1	Here, that indicates that what follows is the content of the the righteous decree of God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “namely, that” or “in other words, that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
193	1:32	iqg1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τὰ τοιαῦτα & αὐτὰ & τοῖς πράσσουσιν	1	The pronouns such things and things and them refer to the litany of “the things that are not proper” in 1:28–31. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “such improper things … these improper things … those who keep doing these improper things” or “these kinds of evil things … these evil things … those who keep doing these evil things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
194	1:32	p9e9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἄξιοι θανάτου	1	Paul is using the adjective worthy as a noun in order to describe a group of people. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who deserve death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
195	1:32	t0ls		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἄξιοι θανάτου εἰσίν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of death, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “are worthy to die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
196	1:32	awth		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἄξιοι θανάτου εἰσίν	1	Here, death refers to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “are worthy to die spiritually” or “are worthy of spiritual death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
197	2:intro	dse2				0	Romans 2 General Notes Structure and Formatting All mankind is condemned because of sin (1:18–3:20) All non-Jews have sinned (1:18–32) All Jews have sinned (2:1–3:8) In this chapter Paul shifts his audience from Roman Christians to people who “judge” other people and do not believe in Jesus. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/judge]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]]) Special Concepts in this Chapter “The Law” In this chapter Paul uses the singular noun “the law” to refer to the group of laws that God gave Israel through Moses. Paul says that those who try to obey the law of Moses will not be justified by trying to obey it. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]]) Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter In 2:1–5 Paul uses the singular pronoun “you” and the singular noun “man” to refer to all people in general. If your language does not use singular pronouns or singular nouns to refer to a group of people, you can use a different expression. (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
198	2:1	y6ts		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ	1	Therefore here marks a new section of the letter. It also introduces a result clause that summarizes the consequences of the behavior that Paul described in 1:18–32. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “As a result” or “So then” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
199	2:1	d7pj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd	εἶ & κρίνεις & σεαυτὸν κατακρίνεις & πράσσεις, ὁ κρίνων	1	Paul uses the singular pronoun you here to refer to all people in general. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “every one of you is … every one of you judges … every one of you condemns yourself … every one of you who judges practices” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
200	2:1	atxo			ἀναπολόγητος	1	See how you translated this phrase in 1:20.
201	2:1	md5e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ὦ ἄνθρωπε	1	O man here is an exclamation that is meant to convict every judgmental person in the human race. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this idea. Alternate translation: “every human being” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
202	2:1	x3mi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	ἄνθρωπε	1	Here, man is a singular noun that refers to humanity in general. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “human being” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
203	2:1	n2mu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, for introduces a reason clause. In the rest of the verse Paul gives the reasons why everyone judging is without excuse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “because” or “since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
204	2:1	jt4b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐν ᾧ	1	The word translated that which is a pronoun that refers to any way or any time a person might judge someone else. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “anytime” or “in anything that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
205	2:1	ybp2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	τὸν ἕτερον	1	Here, the other refers to any other person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “any other person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
206	2:1	nz11		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, for introduces a clause that explains why these judgmental people are self-condemned. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “this is because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
207	2:1	wumc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τὰ & αὐτὰ	1	The phrase the same things refers to acts for which people judge one another. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the very same deeds” or “the same things you judge them for doing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
208	2:2	jr4i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	οἴδαμεν	1	Here, we could refer to: (1) Paul and the church at Rome. Alternate translation: “all of us believers in Christ” (2) mankind in general. Alternate translation: “all people” Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
209	2:2	qca8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the judgment that God does. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “God’s judgment” or “how God judges” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
210	2:2	kfy1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐστιν κατὰ ἀλήθειαν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of judgment and truth, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how God judges is according to what is true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
211	2:2	lfqn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατὰ ἀλήθειαν	1	This phrase indicates the manner in which God will judge those who act sinfully. He will judge them according to the sins they truly committed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “based on the facts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
212	2:2	j46f			τοὺς & πράσσοντας	1	See how you translated this phrase in 1:32.
213	2:2	mjao		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὰ τοιαῦτα	1	Here, such things refers to the litany of “the things that are not proper” in 1:28–32. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “such improper things” or “these kinds of evil things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
214	2:3	zwg7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	λογίζῃ δὲ τοῦτο, ὦ ἄνθρωπε, ὁ κρίνων τοὺς τὰ τοιαῦτα πράσσοντας, καὶ ποιῶν αὐτά, ὅτι σὺ ἐκφεύξῃ τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ?	1	Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that these judgmental people should know that God will finally judge them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “But you should not think, O man, who judges those who are practicing such things and you are doing the same things, that you will escape from the judgment of God!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
215	2:3	jct9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τοῦτο	1	The pronoun this refers to the final clause of this verse that you will escape from the judgment of God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this result” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
216	2:3	ysys		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	τοῦτο, ὦ ἄνθρωπε, ὁ κρίνων τοὺς τὰ τοιαῦτα πράσσοντας, καὶ ποιῶν αὐτά, ὅτι σὺ ἐκφεύξῃ τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “that you will escape from the judgment of God, O man, who judges those who are practicing such things and you are doing the same things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
217	2:3	rk75		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ὦ ἄνθρωπε	1	See how you translated this phrase in 2:1. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
218	2:3	mo4p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὰ τοιαῦτα & αὐτά	1	The phrases such things and the same things refer to the litany of “the things that are not proper” in 1:28–32. See how you translated such things in 2:2 and the same things in 2:1. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
219	2:3	bd82		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὅτι σὺ ἐκφεύξῃ τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here Paul speaks of judgment as if it were a person from whom someone could escape. Paul means that no one can avoid God’s judgment. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “that you will not prevent God’s judgment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
220	2:3	hpej		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	See how you translated this phrase in 2:2. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
221	2:4	pex3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἢ τοῦ πλούτου τῆς χρηστότητος αὐτοῦ, καὶ τῆς ἀνοχῆς, καὶ τῆς μακροθυμίας καταφρονεῖς, ἀγνοῶν ὅτι τὸ χρηστὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ, εἰς μετάνοιάν σε ἄγει?	1	Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that these judgmental people should know that the kindness of God leads them to repentance. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You who scorn the wealth of his kindness and forbearance and patience surely know that the kindness of God leads you to repentance!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
222	2:4	v9yf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd	καταφρονεῖς & σε	1	In this verse Paul uses the singular pronoun you here to refer to all of humanity in general. See how you translated you in 2:1 and 2:3. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
223	2:4	w537		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῦ πλούτου τῆς χρηστότητος αὐτοῦ, καὶ τῆς ἀνοχῆς, καὶ τῆς μακροθυμίας	1	Paul speaks of God’s kindness and forbearance and patience as if they were wealth that could be acquired or rejected. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “acquiring his wonderful kindness and forbearance and patience” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
224	2:4	swj9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς χρηστότητος αὐτοῦ, καὶ τῆς ἀνοχῆς, καὶ τῆς μακροθυμίας	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of kindness, forbearance, and patience, you could express these ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “of how kind, forbearing, and patient he is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
225	2:4	pplt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῆς χρηστότητος αὐτοῦ, καὶ τῆς ἀνοχῆς, καὶ τῆς μακροθυμίας & τὸ χρηστὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the kindness, forbearance, and patience that characterize God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “of God’s kindness, forbearance, and patience … God’s kindness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
226	2:4	acip		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	τὸ χρηστὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ, εἰς μετάνοιάν σε ἄγει	1	Paul speaks of the kindness of God as if it were a person who could lead someone to repentance. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God uses his kindness to cause you to repent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
227	2:4	u0io		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς μετάνοιάν σε ἄγει	1	Here, to repentance is a goal clause. Paul is stating the goal of the kindness of God. Use a natural way in your language to indicate a goal clause. Alternate translation: “leads you to repent” or “guides you to completely change the way you perceive things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
228	2:4	jamv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μετάνοιάν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of repentance, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to fully change the way you perceive things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
229	2:5	agl8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κατὰ δὲ τὴν σκληρότητά σου	1	Paul speaks of these people as if they were a hard substance. He means that these people stubbornly refuse to repent from their judgmental way of life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “But according to your stubbornness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
230	2:5	v6z1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀμετανόητον καρδίαν	1	Here, heart refers to a person’s will or inner being. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “unrepentant will” or “unwillingness to repent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
231	2:5	fv4k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	θησαυρίζεις σεαυτῷ ὀργὴν	1	Here Paul speaks of wrath as if it were an object that someone could store up. He means that the longer people refuse to repent, the greater is God’s wrath against them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “you are increasing how much wrath God has against you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
232	2:5	s7cs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὀργὴν & ὀργῆς	1	Here Paul uses wrath to refer to the outcome of God’s wrath, which is judging and punishing people because they are unrighteous. See how you translated the same use of this word in 1:18. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
233	2:5	pck0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ὀργῆς καὶ ἀποκαλύψεως δικαιοκρισίας τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul assumes that his readers will know that both the day of wrath and the revelation of the righteous judgment of God refer to the time in the future when God will punish all wicked people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the time God finally punishes wicked people and reveals his righteous judgment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
234	2:5	uz3k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ὀργῆς καὶ ἀποκαλύψεως δικαιοκρισίας τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a day that is characterized by wrath and by the revelation of the righteous judgment of God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “on the day characterized by God’s wrath and the revelation of his righteous judgment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
235	2:5	ay1h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ὀργῆς καὶ ἀποκαλύψεως δικαιοκρισίας τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of wrath, revelation, and judgment, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “on the day of God’s wrathful acts, when he reveals how righteously he judges” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
236	2:5	fnpj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἀποκαλύψεως δικαιοκρισίας τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the righteous judgment of God as what the revelation reveals. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “when God reveals his righteous judgment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
237	2:5	sume		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	δικαιοκρισίας τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the righteous judgment that is carried out by God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “of God judging righteously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
238	2:6	frov		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἀποδώσει ἑκάστῳ κατὰ τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ	1	This clause is a quotation from the Old Testament (Psalm 62:12). If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “who ‘will pay back to each one according to his deeds’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
239	2:6	jwcx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀποδώσει ἑκάστῳ κατὰ τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ	1	Here Paul uses pay back to refer to appropriately punishing or rewarding someone as if the punishment or reward was reciprocal payment for that person’s deeds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will appropriately punish or reward each one according to his deeds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
240	2:6	gj1q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of deeds, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how he acts” or “what he does” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
241	2:7	ylpm				0	General Information: In 2:7–10 Paul explains what he means when he said in 2:6 that God will “pay back to each according to his deeds.”
242	2:7	rrbf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	τοῖς & καθ’ ὑπομονὴν ἔργου ἀγαθοῦ, δόξαν καὶ τιμὴν καὶ ἀφθαρσίαν ζητοῦσιν, ζωὴν αἰώνιον;	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “eternal life to those who are seeking glory and honor and incorruptibility according to endurance of good work” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
243	2:7	gec6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ζωὴν αἰώνιον	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “eternal life is what God pays back” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
244	2:7	sqdo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῖς & ζητοῦσιν	1	Paul uses seeking to refer to these people as if they were trying to find something. He means that they are trying to live in such a way as to obtain glory and honor and incorruptibility. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “to those who … keep trying to attain” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
245	2:7	zyff			τοῖς & καθ’ ὑπομονὴν ἔργου ἀγαθοῦ, δόξαν καὶ τιμὴν καὶ ἀφθαρσίαν ζητοῦσιν, ζωὴν αἰώνιον	1	Here, according to could indicate: (1) the means by which these people are seeking glory and honor and incorruptibility. Alternate translation: “everlasting life to those who, by means of endurance of good work, are seeking glory and honor and incorruptibility” (2) the reason why God gives these people everlasting life. Alternate translation: “because they endure in good work and are seeking glory and honor and incorruptibility, everlasting life”
246	2:7	d2gw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	καθ’ ὑπομονὴν ἔργου ἀγαθοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of endurance, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “according to the fact that they keep on doing good work” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
247	2:7	ub51		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δόξαν καὶ τιμὴν καὶ ἀφθαρσίαν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of glory, honor, and incorruptibility, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “for God to glorify, honor, and cause them to live forever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
248	2:8	j1e6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐξ ἐριθείας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of ambition, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from being selfishly ambitious” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
249	2:8	fcb4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	καὶ ἀπειθοῦσι τῇ ἀληθείᾳ, πειθομένοις δὲ τῇ ἀδικίᾳ ὀργὴ καὶ θυμός	1	These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize how sinful these people are. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “who are disobedient to all that is true and right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
250	2:8	xhtm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἀπειθοῦσι τῇ ἀληθείᾳ, πειθομένοις δὲ τῇ ἀδικίᾳ	1	Here Paul speaks of the truthas if it were a person whom someone could disobey, and he speaks of unrighteousness as if it were a person whom someone could obey. Paul means that by disobeying him these people reject what God says is true and right. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who reject what God says is true and right by disobeying him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
251	2:8	m7pm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ἀληθείᾳ & τῇ ἀδικίᾳ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of truth and unrighteousness, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “to what is true … to what is unrighteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
252	2:8	ytny		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὀργὴ καὶ θυμός	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the 2:6. Alternate translation: “wrath and anger are what God pays back” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
253	2:8	exor		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὀργὴ	1	Here Paul uses wrath to refer to the outcome of God’s wrath, which is judging and punishing people because they are unrighteous. See how you translated the same use of this word in 1:18. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
254	2:8	wa6f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὀργὴ καὶ θυμός	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of wrath and anger, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “God is wrathful and angry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
255	2:8	blwx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ὀργὴ καὶ θυμός	1	The words wrath and anger mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize God’s intense anger toward people who are disobedient to the truth. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “fierce wrath” or “angry wrath” or “wrathful anger” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
256	2:9	ospb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	θλῖψις καὶ στενοχωρία, ἐπὶ πᾶσαν ψυχὴν ἀνθρώπου τοῦ κατεργαζομένου τὸ κακόν	1	Paul speaks of Tribulation and distress as if these ideas were located on top of a person. He means that every evil person will experience Tribulation and distress. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “Every human soul that produces the evil will experience tribulation and distress” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
257	2:9	qonf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	θλῖψις καὶ στενοχωρία	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of Tribulation and distress, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “Difficult and distressing times” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
258	2:9	u8f7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	θλῖψις καὶ στενοχωρία	1	These two words mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize how intense God’s judgment will be against these people. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “Distressing tribulation” or “Intense distress” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
259	2:9	ck9i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	πᾶσαν ψυχὴν ἀνθρώπου	1	Paul uses soul of man to refer to the whole life of a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “every human being” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
260	2:9	msox		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπου	1	Although the term man is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “of a person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
261	2:9	n7q4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τὸ κακόν	1	Paul is using the adjective evil as a noun in order to describe things people do. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “what is evil” or “things that are evil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
262	2:9	a9s5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ἰουδαίου τε πρῶτον καὶ Ἕλληνος	1	This phrase could mean: (1) the Jews will have greater responsibility because God offered salvation to them first. Alternate translation: “especially for the Jewish person and also for the non-Jewish person” (2) the Jews will be judged before non-Jews, which is the same meaning as in 1:16. Alternate translation: “first for the Jewish person and then for the non-Jewish person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
263	2:9	csnc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ἕλληνος	1	See how you translated this phrase in 1:16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
264	2:10	i9tg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δόξα & καὶ τιμὴ, καὶ εἰρήνη, παντὶ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of glory and honor, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “God will glorify and honor and bring peace to everyone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
265	2:10	t2od		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰρήνη	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of peace, you could express the same idea in another way. Here, peace could refer to: (1) feeling calm and secure. Alternate translation: “a peaceful feeling” (2) being at peace with God. Alternate translation: “a peaceful relationship with God” (3) both a peaceful feeling and a peaceful relationship with God. “a peaceful feeling and a peaceful relationship with God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
266	2:10	ib56		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τὸ ἀγαθόν	1	Paul is using the adjective good as a noun in order to describe things people do. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “good deeds” or “things that are good” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
267	2:10	u06j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ἰουδαίῳ τε πρῶτον καὶ Ἕλληνι	1	See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
268	2:11	eol0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	οὐ & ἐστιν προσωπολημψία παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of favoritism, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “God does not honor one type of person above another” or “God is not more favorable toward one person than another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
269	2:12	wkx8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that what follows in 2:12–16 gives the reason for the phrase “there is no favoritism with God” in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is true because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
270	2:12	ecsk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὅσοι & ἀνόμως ἥμαρτον	1	Paul uses this phrase to refer to non-Jews, whom he calls “the Greek” in 2:9–10. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as many non-Jewish people as have sinned without the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
271	2:12	t3qs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	ἀνόμως & ἀνόμως & νόμῳ & νόμου	1	The word law is a singular noun that refers to a group of laws that God gave Israel by dictating them to Moses. See the discussion of this term in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “without God’s laws … without God’s laws … God’s laws … God’s laws” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
272	2:12	m6cy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀνόμως & ἀνόμως	1	Here, without the law refers to not knowing God’s law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “without knowing God’s law” or “in ignorance of God’s law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
273	2:12	qkh4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	καὶ ἀπολοῦνται	1	Here Paul uses perish to refer to eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will also be punished eternally” or “will also experience eternal punishment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
274	2:12	jwvz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὅσοι ἐν νόμῳ ἥμαρτον	1	Paul uses this phrase to refer to Jews, who are the people to whom God gave his law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as many Jewish people as have sinned with the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
275	2:12	w4cp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διὰ νόμου κριθήσονται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God will judge by his law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
276	2:12	a0k4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ νόμου	1	Here, by indicates that the law is the standard by which God will judge those who know his law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “according to what the law requires” or “by what the law says” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
277	2:13	sw8x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that this verse gives the reason why God judges both groups of people mentioned in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language to indicate a reason. Alternate translation: “God judges both groups of people impartially because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
278	2:13	a8ra		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	νόμου & νόμου	1	See how you translated the law in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
279	2:13	eg4h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὐ & δίκαιοι παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ	1	Paul uses with God here to describe righteous people as if they were located in the presence of God. He means that God makes them right with himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “are not made righteous by God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
280	2:13	c1bu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οἱ ποιηταὶ νόμου δικαιωθήσονται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who will do the action, Paul implies that “God” will do it. Alternate translation: “God will justify the doers of the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
281	2:14	q2id		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that 2:14–16 give another reason why God judges both groups of people mentioned in 2:12. 2:14–16 explain why Gentiles who do not know God’s law are still sinners. Use a natural way in your language to indicate a reason. Alternate translation: “God also judges both groups of people impartially because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
282	2:14	vlum		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὰ μὴ νόμον ἔχοντα & νόμον μὴ ἔχοντες	1	Paul speaks of these people as if they do not own or possess the law. He means that they did not receive the law that God gave to the Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated “without the law” in 2:12. Alternative translation: “who are unaware of God’s law … who are unaware of God’s law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
283	2:14	zhmw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	νόμον & τοῦ νόμου & νόμον	1	See how you translated the law in 2:12. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
284	2:14	h53h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	φύσει & ποιῶσιν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of nature, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “naturally do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
285	2:14	atda		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὰ τοῦ νόμου	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the specific rules that make up the law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the commands within the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
286	2:14	symg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἑαυτοῖς εἰσιν νόμος	1	Here Paul speaks of Gentiles as if they were a law. Paul means that the non-Jewish people have their own rules about what is right and wrong, and their rules are similar to God’s law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning in plainly. Alternate translation: “are actually obeying the God’s law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
287	2:15	xl6v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἵτινες ἐνδείκνυνται τὸ ἔργον τοῦ νόμου, γραπτὸν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν	1	Paul speaks of the non-Jewish people obeying some basic rules from the law of Moses as if they were showing the work of the law to other people. He means that non-Jewish people demonstrate that they naturally understand some rules of the law by obeying those rules. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “who make others aware that they understand the work of the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
288	2:15	wtit		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸ ἔργον τοῦ νόμου, γραπτὸν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν	1	Here Paul speaks of the works of the law as if they can be written on the surfaces of peoples’ hearts. He means that God has enabled non-Jewish people to know generally what is right or wrong even though they do not know the law of Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they know the work of the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
289	2:15	x35c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ ἔργον τοῦ νόμου	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the work that characterizes obeying the law. This phrase has a similar meaning to “the things of the law” in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the work that the law requires a person to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
290	2:15	v60q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γραπτὸν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God wrote on their hearts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
291	2:15	ja5s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν	1	See how you translated “heart” in 1:21. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
292	2:15	jmeo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	συνμαρτυρούσης αὐτῶν τῆς συνειδήσεως	1	Paul uses the singular conscience figuratively to refer to the individual consciences of these people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “their consciences bearing witness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
293	2:15	z28q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	συνμαρτυρούσης αὐτῶν τῆς συνειδήσεως	1	Here Paul speaks of conscience as if it were a person bearing witness in a courtroom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “their conscience confirms that this is true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
294	2:15	ub8t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	συνμαρτυρούσης & καὶ μεταξὺ ἀλλήλων, τῶν λογισμῶν κατηγορούντων ἢ καὶ ἀπολογουμένων	1	This clause explains what bearing witness means. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer or begin a new sentence. Alternate translation: “bearing witness, namely, the thoughts of each person both accusing or even defending them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
295	2:15	qk53		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	καὶ μεταξὺ ἀλλήλων, τῶν λογισμῶν κατηγορούντων ἢ καὶ ἀπολογουμένων	1	Here Paul speaks of thoughts as if they were a person who could accuse or defend someone in court. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation (remove preceding comma): “by accusing or defending them in the way they think” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
296	2:16	o6kx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν ἡμέρᾳ	1	Here, day refers to a point in time when something happens. It does not refer to a 24-hour length of time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a point in time is coming” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
297	2:16	c5fp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ὅτε κρίνει ὁ Θεὸς	1	Paul assumes that his readers will know that the day when God will judge refers to the time in the future when God will judge everyone, as Paul also mentioned in 2:2 and 2:5. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the future time when God finally judges” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
298	2:16	lyvd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὰ κρυπτὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe secrets that men have. These secrets are specifically secret thoughts that people have, as indicated by the word “thoughts” in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “men’s secrets” or “the secrets that men keep” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
299	2:16	gxet		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὰ κρυπτὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of secrets, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what men secretly think” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
300	2:16	r8hz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1	Although the term men is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “of human beings” or “of people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
301	2:16	xb7t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	κατὰ τὸ εὐαγγέλιόν μου, διὰ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “through Christ Jesus, according to my gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
302	2:16	e9bp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κατὰ τὸ εὐαγγέλιόν μου	1	Paul speaks of the gospel as if it belongs to him. He means that this is the gospel God has entrusted him to preach. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “according to God’s gospel that I preach” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
303	2:17	lc6m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Connecting Statement: But here indicates that in 2:17–29 Paul changes topics from talking about non-Jewish people who don’t know the law of Moses to Jews who know the law. He explains why the Jews as well cannot escape God’s judgment. Alternate translation: “You also need to know that” or “However” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
304	2:17	cnq7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	Here, if indicates the beginning of a conditional sentence that extends from this verse to 2:21. Paul speaks as if these descriptions of Jews were hypothetical possibilities, but he means that they are actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since” or “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
305	2:17	kfe8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd	σὺ	1	Even though Paul is speaking to Jewish people, he is hypothetically addressing an individual, so you and your and yourself is singular throughout 2:17–27 unless otherwise noted. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural forms of you and your and yourself in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
306	2:17	pglg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σὺ Ἰουδαῖος ἐπονομάζῃ	1	Paul speaks of the Jews as if they named themselves. He means that they consider themselves to be Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation, “you call yourself Jewish” or “you regard yourself as truly Jewish” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
307	2:17	gz6j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἐπαναπαύῃ νόμῳ,	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context, which is God’s judgment of sinners. Alternate translation: “rely upon the law to escape God’s judgment” or “rely upon the law to save you from God’s judgment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
308	2:17	dapj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καυχᾶσαι ἐν Θεῷ	1	Paul speaks of the Jews as if they were boasting inside of God. He means that the Jews brag that they are the only nation that knows God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation, “brag that you are the only ones who know God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
309	2:18	xn6w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ γινώσκεις τὸ θέλημα, καὶ δοκιμάζεις τὰ διαφέροντα, κατηχούμενος ἐκ τοῦ νόμου,	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “and because you are instructed from the law, you know his will and approve of what is excellent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
310	2:18	qxkt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ θέλημα	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of will, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what God wills” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
311	2:18	aqbh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κατηχούμενος ἐκ τοῦ νόμου	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “others having instructed you from the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
312	2:19	nk76		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	πέποιθάς τε σεαυτὸν ὁδηγὸν εἶναι	1	Paul uses the word yourself to emphasize how convinced the Jews are that they are the only ones who can spiritually guide others. Use a way that is natural in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “and you have convinced yourself that you alone are a guide” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
313	2:19	wi7z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὁδηγὸν εἶναι τυφλῶν	1	Paul uses guide to refer to the Jews as if they were the only people who could clearly see. He also uses blind to refer to non-Jews as if they were unable to see. He means that the Jews think they are the only ones who can teach others God’s truth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “that you are a helper to those separated from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
314	2:19	beop		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὁδηγὸν εἶναι τυφλῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of guide, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that you can serve as a guide to blind men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
315	2:19	ql0b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τυφλῶν	1	Although the term men is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “to blind people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
316	2:19	j76c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ὁδηγὸν & τυφλῶν, φῶς τῶν ἐν σκότει	1	These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize how strongly the Jews believed that non-Jews were ignorant about God’s truth. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the two ideas into one. Alternate translation: “the only ones who can guide those who are unaware of what is true about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
317	2:19	xlge		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	φῶς τῶν ἐν σκότει	1	Here Paul uses light to refer to a Jewish person, and he uses those in darkness figuratively to refer to non-Jews. He means that the Jews think they can teach non-Jews about God the way that a light shines on people who are in a dark place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “someone who can reveal what is true about God to those who do not know about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
318	2:20	ymey		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	παιδευτὴν ἀφρόνων, διδάσκαλον νηπίων, ἔχοντα τὴν μόρφωσιν τῆς γνώσεως καὶ τῆς ἀληθείας ἐν τῷ νόμῳ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases, since the third phrase gives the reason for the result that the first two phrases describe. Alternate translation: “since having in the law the form of the knowledge and of the truth, you believe you should be an instructor of foolish men, a teacher of little children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
319	2:20	pf6v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	παιδευτὴν ἀφρόνων, διδάσκαλον νηπίων, ἔχοντα & ἐν τῷ νόμῳ	1	These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize how strongly the Jews believed that non-Jews were ignorant about God’s truth. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “the only people who can instruct those people who are as foolish as children and are the only people who have in the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
320	2:20	ar5a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	διδάσκαλον νηπίων	1	Paul speaks of the non-Jews as if they were little children. He means that they are ignorant about God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternative translation: “people who are spiritually ignorant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
321	2:20	ose0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἔχοντα τὴν μόρφωσιν τῆς γνώσεως καὶ τῆς ἀληθείας ἐν τῷ νόμῳ	1	Paul speaks of the law as if it were a physical shape that someone could possess. He means that the law contains God’s true knowledge that the Jews think they exclusively own. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “understanding through God’s law how a person can truly know God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
322	2:20	ua61		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὴν μόρφωσιν τῆς γνώσεως καὶ τῆς ἀληθείας	1	Paul is using the possessive forms of the knowledge and of the truth to describe the form of the law. Here, of knowledge and of the truth could indicate: (1) what the law contains. Alternate translation: “the form that contains the knowledge and the truth” (2) what the law represents. Alternate translation: “what represents knowledge and truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
323	2:20	y6i5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς γνώσεως καὶ τῆς ἀληθείας	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of knowledge and ** truth**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “of what we know about God and what is true about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
324	2:21	vy0h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ὁ οὖν διδάσκων ἕτερον, σεαυτὸν οὐ διδάσκεις? ὁ κηρύσσων μὴ κλέπτειν, κλέπτεις?	1	In 2:21–23 Paul transitions from his description of the Jews in 2:17–20 to a series of rhetorical questions. These questions emphasize the hypocrisy of the Jews, who thought they were superior to non-Jews because they knew the law of Moses. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate Paul’s words as statements or exclamations and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “then you, who teach another, do not teach yourself! You, who preach not to steal, actually steal!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
325	2:21	rftq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	οὖν	1	Here, then indicates that what follows is the second half of the factual conditional statement that Paul began with “if you name yourself a Jew” in 2:17. Paul wants to show that what the Jews believe and how they live are in contrast. If you divided 2:17–21 into separate sentences, then you may need to include a short form of the “if” statement here. Alternate translation: “if all this is really true, then” or “since all this is really true, then” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
326	2:21	uq9y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	ἕτερον	1	Here, another is a singular pronoun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular pronouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “other people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
327	2:21	abq0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	σεαυτὸν οὐ διδάσκεις	1	Here Paul implies that the Jews need to teach themselves, because they do not actually obey the laws that they teach. They live their lives as if they do not know the law of Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “since you yourself don’t obey the law, do you not teach yourself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
328	2:22	parm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ὁ λέγων μὴ μοιχεύειν, μοιχεύεις? ὁ βδελυσσόμενος τὰ εἴδωλα, ἱεροσυλεῖς?	1	Like in the previous verse, Paul is not asking for information here, but is using the question form twice to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as statements or exclamations and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You who say not to commit adultery actually commit adultery! You who abhor idols actually rob temples!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
329	2:22	dmpg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἱεροσυλεῖς	1	Here Paul implies that the temples the Jews rob are where idols are kept and worshiped. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “do you rob temples where idols are kept” or “should you actually enter an idol temple and rob it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
330	2:23	z80m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ὃς ἐν νόμῳ καυχᾶσαι διὰ τῆς παραβάσεως τοῦ νόμου, τὸν Θεὸν ἀτιμάζεις	1	As in the previous two verses, Paul is not asking for information here, but is using the question form to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You who boast in the law actually dishonor God through the transgression of the law!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
331	2:23	grr3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὃς ἐν νόμῳ καυχᾶσαι	1	Paul uses in the law as if it were something that people could boast inside of. He means that the Jews brag that they are the only nation who knows God’s law, which has similar meaning to “boast in God” in 2:17. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation, “You, who brag that you are the only ones who know God’s law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
332	2:23	ob98		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	διὰ τῆς παραβάσεως τοῦ νόμου	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of transgression, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “by transgressing the law” or “by breaking the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
333	2:24	yp4l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	τὸ γὰρ ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ δι’ ὑμᾶς βλασφημεῖται ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν, καθὼς γέγραπται	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “For, just as it is written, ‘the name of God is blasphemed among the Gentiles because of you.’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
334	2:24	z54i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that what follows is the reason why the previous statement is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “These things that I have said about you are true because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
335	2:24	lk5n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	τὸ & ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ δι’ ὑμᾶς βλασφημεῖται ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1	In this clause Paul quotes part of Isaiah 52:5. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
336	2:24	c4sk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ & ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to indicate the name that belongs to God. Paul does not mean that God is a name. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “God’s name” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
337	2:24	mvwq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τὸ & ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul uses the name of God figuratively to refer toGod himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
338	2:24	ccm9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸ & ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ δι’ ὑμᾶς βλασφημεῖται ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles blaspheme the name of God because of you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
339	2:24	m2bq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	τὸ & ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ δι’ ὑμᾶς βλασφημεῖται ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because of you the name of God is blasphemed among the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
340	2:24	pg0g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δι’ ὑμᾶς	1	Paul quotes Isaiah implying that the bad behavior of the Jews is what causes the Gentiles to blaspheme the name of God. Since the Jews were supposed to represent God to the world, their bad behavior misrepresented God so that the Gentiles blasphemed him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as a result of how you act” or “because of the way you behave” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
341	2:24	e144		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	δι’ ὑμᾶς	1	Here, you is the plural and refers to the Jewish people. This is the only occurrence of plural you in 2:17–27. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
342	2:24	edrf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Since Paul is referring to something Isaiah wrote, you could indicate Isaiah as the subject. Alternate translation: “just as Isaiah wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
343	2:24	end9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	See how you translated this phrase in 1:17. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
344	2:25	vdu7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that [2:25–29] provide another reason why both Jews and Gentiles will be punished for their sins, as stated in 2:12. Paul is arguing against the idea that circumcision guaranteed a Jew’s salvation, which some Jews believed. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “Jews will be judged along with Gentiles because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
345	2:25	vp6o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	περιτομὴ & ἡ περιτομή σου, ἀκροβυστία γέγονεν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of circumcision and uncircumcision, you could express the same ideas in a different way. Alternate translation: “being circumcised … your being circumcised has become being uncircumcised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
346	2:25	wm24		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὠφελεῖ	1	Paul is leaving out a word here that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the word from the context. Alternate translation: “benefits you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
347	2:25	pqhz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	παραβάτης νόμου	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a person who transgresses the law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “one who transgresses the law” or “one who breaks the law”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
348	2:25	xq62		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἡ περιτομή σου, ἀκροβυστία γέγονεν	1	Here, your circumcision becomes uncircumcision is an exaggeration that Paul uses to show how important it is for God’s people to practice the law. Paul does not mean that the person who transgresses God’s law is no longer physically circumcised. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it is as if you were not circumcised” or “it is the same as if you were never circumcised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
349	2:26	vt7f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ἐὰν οὖν	1	Paul is using a hypothetical situation to help his readers recognize the benefits for the uncircumcised one who keeps the requirements of the law. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Let’s suppose then that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
350	2:26	r9i4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἡ ἀκροβυστία	1	Paul is using the adjective uncircumcision as a noun in order to describe a group of people. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the one who is uncircumcised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
351	2:26	nf3j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	φυλάσσῃ	1	Here, keeps is an idiom that refers to obeying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is obedient to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
352	2:26	mkhr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὰ δικαιώματα τοῦ νόμου	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe requirements found in the law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “what the law requires” or “the law’s requirements” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
353	2:26	be71		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὐχ ἡ ἀκροβυστία αὐτοῦ εἰς περιτομὴν λογισθήσεται	1	Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize how important it is do what the law requires. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “certainly God will consider his uncircumcision to be circumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
354	2:26	rjb5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὐχ ἡ ἀκροβυστία αὐτοῦ εἰς περιτομὴν λογισθήσεται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who will do the action, Paul implies that “God” will do it. Alternate translation: “will God not consider his uncircumcision to be circumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
355	2:26	gjuy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἀκροβυστία αὐτοῦ & περιτομὴν	1	See how you translated uncircumcision and circumcision in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
356	2:27	lqz2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	κρινεῖ ἡ ἐκ φύσεως ἀκροβυστία, τὸν νόμον τελοῦσα	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “since he is fulfilling the law, the uncircumcised by nature will judge” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
357	2:27	tpno		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἡ & ἀκροβυστία	1	See how you translated this in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
358	2:27	h2lj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἐκ φύσεως ἀκροβυστία	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of nature, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the naturally uncircumcised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
359	2:27	zwh8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τελοῦσα	1	Here, fulfilling is an idiom that refers to fully obeying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “is fully obedient to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
360	2:27	sv4b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ γράμματος καὶ περιτομῆς	1	Here, through could mean: (1) the Jews will be judged despite having the letter and circumcision. Alternate translation: “despite having letter and circumcision” (2) the Jews will be judged while having the letter and circumcision. Alternate translation: “while having letter and circumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
361	2:27	nxa1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	γράμματος	1	Paul is describing the law by association with the letters that make up the law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the written law code” or “God’s written law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
362	2:27	lkll		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	περιτομῆς	1	See how you translated circumcision in the previous two verses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
363	2:27	q795		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	παραβάτην νόμου	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for transgressor, you could express the idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “someone who transgresses the law” or “someone who breaks God’s law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
364	2:28	g2vh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that what follows is the reason for what has just been stated. This verse is Paul’s conclusion to the statements he made in 2:25–27. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “In fact” or “Truly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
365	2:28	lfuj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	Ἰουδαῖός	1	Here Paul uses Jew to refer to someone who is one of God’s people because he truly trusts in God for salvation, as Abraham did. Jew here does not refer to someone who only has Jewish ancestors. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a spiritual Jew” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
366	2:28	rohy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ φανερῷ	1	Here, visibly refers to the Jewish religious practices that other people can see, such as circumcision or wearing special clothing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “does externally visible Jewish rituals” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
367	2:28	n34i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἡ & περιτομή	1	Here Paul uses circumcision to refer to the change in thinking and attitude that happens when God saves a person. It can also be considered an inward mark of belonging to God’s people, like how circumcision was an outer mark of being Jewish. This was called “circumcision of the heart” in the Old Testament (Deuteronomy 30:6; Jeremiah 4:4). Here, circumcision does not refer to the Jewish ritual. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this spiritual circumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
368	2:28	s44m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐν σαρκὶ	1	Paul uses the flesh figuratively to mean “the whole body,” which is made of flesh. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “on the body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
369	2:29	b6ag		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ κρυπτῷ Ἰουδαῖος	1	The word translated secretly refers to something that other people cannot see or that is hidden. The meaning here is the opposite of “visibly” in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a Jew in an inward way not seen by others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
370	2:29	u7b6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	Ἰουδαῖος	1	Here Paul uses Jew in the same way he did in the previous verse. See how you translated this word in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
371	2:29	d1go		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	περιτομὴ καρδίας	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a circumcision that is performed in the heart. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “circumcision is performed in the heart” or “circumcision is an inward change” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
372	2:29	hbiv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	περιτομὴ καρδίας	1	The phrase circumcision of the heart is an idiom that refers to the change in thinking and attitude that happens when God saves a person. It can also be considered an inward mark of belonging to God’s people, just as circumcision was an outer mark of being Jewish. This expression first occurred in the Old Testament (Deuteronomy 30:6; Jeremiah 4:4). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. See how you translated “this circumcision” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “truly belongs to God’s people by removal of sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
373	2:29	n4pp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	καρδίας	1	See how you translated this word in 1:21. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
374	2:29	ffa3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν Πνεύματι, οὐ γράμματι	1	Here, both occurrences of in indicate the means by which something happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of the Spirit, not by means of the letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
375	2:29	kjc9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν Πνεύματι	1	Here, the Spirit could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit, who changes a person’s thoughts and attitude when God saves that person, as in the UST. (2) a person’s spirit, which would require interpreting in to refer to a place. Alternate translation: “in one’s spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
376	2:29	gcoq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	γράμματι	1	See how you translated letter in 2:27. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
377	2:29	dlac		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὗ ὁ ἔπαινος	1	The pronoun whose refers to the one who is inwardly a Jew. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “that inward Jew’s praise” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
378	2:29	qa6b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	οὗ ὁ ἔπαινος	1	Paul is using the possessive form whose to indicate who receives the praise. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “his praise” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
379	2:29	r4gm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἐξ ἀνθρώπων	1	Although the term men is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “from people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
380	3:intro	y2kb				0	Romans 3 General Notes Structure and Formatting All mankind is condemned because of sin (1:18–3:20) All non-Jews have sinned (1:18–32) All Jews have sinned (2:1–3:8) Everyone has sinned (3:9–20) Righteousness is received through Jesus Christ by trusting in him (3:21–5:21) God’s righteousness is received through faith (3:21–26) No one can boast in works (3:27–31) Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 10–18 of this chapter, which are quotations from the Old Testament. Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter Rhetorical Questions In 3:1–9 and 27–31 Paul frequently uses rhetorical questions in this chapter in order to answer objections that Jews might make about what he is saying. You may need to indicate that Paul is asking these questions as if he were a non-Christian Jew responding to these arguments. When Paul asks the rhetorical questions, he is speaking as if he were a non-Christian Jew arguing against Paul. When Paul answers those questions, he is speaking as himself. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this change in speakers with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations, as in the UST. (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
381	3:1-9	v788				0	Connecting Statement: In 3:1–9 Paul uses a series of rhetorical questions and answers in order to emphasize that both “Jews and Greeks” are “under sin.”
382	3:1	a1l0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	τί οὖν	1	Here, then indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous chapter, especially what he said in 2:28–29. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “If these things are true, then what is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
383	3:1	dawv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί οὖν τὸ περισσὸν τοῦ Ἰουδαίου, ἢ τίς ἡ ὠφέλια τῆς περιτομῆς?	1	This verse contains two rhetorical questions connected by or. Paul is not asking for information, but here he is using these two questions to express the objections that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous chapter, especially what he said in 2:28–29. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then the Jew certainly has no advantage, and circumcision certainly has no benefit!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
384	3:1	b7ls		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	τί οὖν τὸ περισσὸν τοῦ Ἰουδαίου, ἢ τίς ἡ ὠφέλια τῆς περιτομῆς	1	In this verse Paul is speaking as if he were a non-Christian Jew arguing against Paul. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
385	3:1	bjfo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τί οὖν τὸ περισσὸν τοῦ Ἰουδαίου, ἢ τίς ἡ ὠφέλια τῆς περιτομῆς	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of advantage or benefit, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “How then is being a Jew advantageous, or how is being circumcised beneficial” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
386	3:1	h4h3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τοῦ Ἰουδαίου	1	Paul is using the possessive form of the Jew to describe for whom there is the advantage. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “for the Jew” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
387	3:1	l79f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῆς περιτομῆς	1	Paul is using the possessive form of the circumcision to describe from where the benefit comes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “that comes from circumcision” or “from being circumcised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
388	3:2	eq3o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πολὺ κατὰ πάντα τρόπον	1	In this verse Paul responds to the rhetorical questions in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘Great in every way!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
389	3:2	rri9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	πολὺ κατὰ πάντα τρόπον	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “The advantage of the Jew and the benefit of the circumcision are great in every way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
390	3:2	kzlh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πολὺ κατὰ πάντα τρόπον	1	Great in every way is an exaggeration that Paul uses to emphasize the value of being Jewish and being circumcised. Paul does not mean that everything about being a Jew and being circumcised is beneficial. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows enthusiasm. Alternate translation: “Great in many ways” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
391	3:2	f2fa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πρῶτον μὲν & ὅτι	1	Here, indeed first, that could indicate that: (1) what follows is the first reason in a list of several reasons why being a Jew is beneficial, in which case Paul does not continue the list in this chapter. Alternate translation: “the first of many benefits is indeed that” or “one benefit is indeed that” (2) what follows is the most important reason why being a Jew is beneficial. Alternate translation: “the primary benefit is indeed that” or “the most important thing is indeed that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
392	3:2	mrej		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐπιστεύθησαν τὰ λόγια τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God entrusted them with his sayings” or “God trusted them with the sayings of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
393	3:2	jkgk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὰ λόγια τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here, the sayings of God could refer to: (1) the entire Old Testament. Alternate translation: “with what God said in the Scriptures” (2) direct speech from God recorded in the Old Testament. Alternate translation: “with the messages that God announced to them in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
394	3:2	qide		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὰ λόγια τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here, the possessive form of God could refer to: (1) sayings that came from God. Alternate translation: “with the sayings from God” (2) says that are about God. Alternate translation: “with the sayings about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
395	3:3	d9k3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1	For here indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “If these things are true, then” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
396	3:3	mclv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί & εἰ ἠπίστησάν τινες? μὴ ἡ ἀπιστία αὐτῶν, τὴν πίστιν τοῦ Θεοῦ καταργήσει?	1	In this verse Paul is not asking for information, but is using these two questions here to express the objections that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “But some of them were unfaithful! Their unfaithfulness surely cannot nullify the faithfulness of God!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
397	3:3	fd0w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	τί γάρ εἰ ἠπίστησάν τινες? μὴ ἡ ἀπιστία αὐτῶν, τὴν πίστιν τοῦ Θεοῦ καταργήσει?	1	In this verse Paul is speaking as if he himself were a non-Christian Jew arguing against Paul. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
398	3:3	i36p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τινες	1	The pronoun some refers to some Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “some Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
399	3:3	pkae		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μὴ ἡ ἀπιστία αὐτῶν, τὴν πίστιν τοῦ Θεοῦ καταργήσει	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of unfaithfulness or faithfulness, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “The fact that they are unfaithful will not nullify God’s faithful acts, will it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
400	3:3	moq7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὴν πίστιν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the faithfulness that characterizes God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the faithfulness that characterizes God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
401	3:4	djn7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μὴ γένοιτο	1	In this verse Paul responds to the rhetorical questions he wrote in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘May it never be!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
402	3:4	z465		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	μὴ γένοιτο	1	May it never be is an exclamation that communicates a strong prohibition. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating a strong prohibition. Alternate translation: “Absolutely not” or “Certainly not” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
403	3:4	kz4j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Instead here indicates that what follows is a contrast to the idea in the previous verse that unfaithful Jews could “nullify the faithfulness of God.” Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “But” or “However” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
404	3:4	ld9h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	γινέσθω & ὁ Θεὸς ἀληθής	1	Here, let God be true is an imperative phrase, but this is not a command. Instead, Paul is exclaiming that people must consider that God is always truthful regardless of what people think. Use a form in your language that would be used in this type of situation. Alternate translation: “let people always know that God is true” or “may people always declare that God is true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
405	3:4	nud9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πᾶς & ἄνθρωπος ψεύστης	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of liar, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “every man lies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
406	3:4	fesk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	πᾶς & ἄνθρωπος ψεύστης	1	Paul is leaving out some words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “let every man be a liar” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
407	3:4	hfdf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	πᾶς & ἄνθρωπος	1	Although the term man is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “every person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
408	3:4	te39		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	See how you translated this phrase in 1:17. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
409	3:4	b8gv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation was written by David. Alternate translation: “just as David wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
410	3:4	f0oq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ὅπως ἂν δικαιωθῇς ἐν τοῖς λόγοις σου, καὶ νικήσεις ἐν τῷ κρίνεσθαί σε	1	This sentence is a quotation from Psalm 51:4. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
411	3:4	xli0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅπως	1	So that indicates that what follows is the result of what David had written previously in Psalm 51:4, which is about how David had sinned. Paul assumes that his readers would be familiar with the earlier part of that verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “I have sinned so that” or “Because of my sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
412	3:4	h0ne		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ὅπως ἂν δικαιωθῇς ἐν τοῖς λόγοις σου, καὶ νικήσεις ἐν τῷ κρίνεσθαί σε	1	In this sentence, you and your refer to God and are singular. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
413	3:4	lnnr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δικαιωθῇς & ἐν τῷ κρίνεσθαί σε	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people would acknowledge how righteous you are … when people attempt to judge you” or “you would prove yourself to be righteous … when others try to judge you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
414	3:4	tj8g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τοῖς λόγοις σου	1	Paul records David using words to describe the things that God said by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in what you say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
415	3:5	gw3a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	εἰ δὲ	1	In this verse, Paul is speaking as if he were an unbelieving Jew and is challenging the statement that Paul made in the previous verse. But here indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous verse. If it might be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “If indeed that is true” or “Now if” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
416	3:5	putf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	εἰ δὲ ἡ ἀδικία ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ δικαιοσύνην συνίστησιν, τί ἐροῦμεν? μὴ ἄδικος ὁ Θεὸς, ὁ ἐπιφέρων τὴν ὀργήν?	1	In these sentences Paul is speaking as if he were a non-Christian Jew arguing against Paul. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
417	3:5	hjyp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ & ἡ ἀδικία ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ δικαιοσύνην συνίστησιν, τί ἐροῦμεν?	1	Paul is using a hypothetical situation to develop the argument that an unbelieving Jew would make. Alternate translation: “suppose our unrighteousness commends the righteousness of God. Then what will we say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
418	3:5	y6vv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν & ἐροῦμεν	1	Here, our and we are used exclusively to speak of Paul and other Jews. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “Jewish … will we Jews say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
419	3:5	y0r5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἀδικία ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ δικαιοσύνην	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of unrighteousness or righteousness, you could express these ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how unrighteous we are … how righteous God is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
420	3:5	ho67		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	μὴ ἄδικος ὁ Θεὸς, ὁ ἐπιφέρων τὴν ὀργήν?	1	In this sentence Paul is not asking for information, but is using this question here to express an objection that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse. This sentence is also the answer to the hypothetical question that precedes it. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “God certainly cannot be unrighteousness for imposing his wrath!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
421	3:5	v30z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	εἰ & ἡ ἀδικία ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ δικαιοσύνην συνίστησιν, τί ἐροῦμεν? μὴ ἄδικος ὁ Θεὸς, ὁ ἐπιφέρων τὴν ὀργήν?	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could combine the hypothetical conditional statement of the first sentence with the rhetorical question of the second sentence. Alternate translation: “if our unrighteousness commends the righteousness of God, then we certainly cannot say that God is unrighteousness for imposing his wrath!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
422	3:5	e9ux		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὁ ἐπιφέρων τὴν ὀργήν	1	Here Paul uses imposing his wrath to refer to the outcome of God’s anger, which is carried out by judging and punishing people because they are unrighteous. See how you translated the same use of wrath in 1:18. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
423	3:5	j631		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-aside	(κατὰ ἄνθρωπον λέγω.)	1	Paul could be saying this as an aside in order to show that he is not trying to challenge the righteousness of God. If this would be confusing in your language, you could add parentheses, as seen in the ULT, or use a natural way in your language to indicate an aside. Alternate translation: “I am reasoning like a human being” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-aside]])
424	3:5	sd4g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	(κατὰ ἄνθρωπον λέγω.)	1	Here, the phrase according to men is an idiom meaning “the way people do” or “like a human being.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I speak based on how human beings perceive things” or “I speak according to mere human reasoning”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
425	3:6	gd5f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	μὴ γένοιτο	1	See how you translated this in 3:4. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
426	3:6	zg9s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐπεὶ πῶς κρινεῖ ὁ Θεὸς τὸν κόσμον	1	Here Paul is giving the reason why God is “not unrighteous for imposing his wrath,” as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “Because if God were unrighteous, how would he judge the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
427	3:6	x1y3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	πῶς κρινεῖ ὁ Θεὸς τὸν κόσμον	1	In this clause Paul is not asking for information, but is using his question to emphasize that God could not judge the world if he were unrighteous. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “God certainly could not judge the world!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
428	3:6	lnp3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν κόσμον	1	Here Paul uses world to refer to the people who live in the world. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people in the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
429	3:7-9	htfa				0	General Information: In 3:7–9, Paul is speaking as if he were an unbelieving Jew and is challenging the statement Paul made in 3:6. A note will inform you of the one parenthetic statement within these verses in which Paul interjects his own voice into the argument.
430	3:7	b9k1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	εἰ δὲ	1	But here indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous verse. In this verse, Paul is speaking as if he were an unbelieving Jew and is challenging the statement Paul made in the previous verse. See how you translated this in 3:5. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
431	3:7	c2u5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ & ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν τῷ ἐμῷ ψεύσματι ἐπερίσσευσεν εἰς τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ, τί ἔτι κἀγὼ ὡς ἁμαρτωλὸς κρίνομαι	1	Paul is using a hypothetical situation to develop the argument an unbelieving Jew would make. Alternate translation: “suppose the truth of God through my lie abounds to his glory. Then why am I still being judged as a sinner” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
432	3:7	xysz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	εἰ δὲ ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν τῷ ἐμῷ ψεύσματι ἐπερίσσευσεν εἰς τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “But if the truth of God abounds to his glory through my lie” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
433	3:7	j9ji		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of truth, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “how truthful God is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
434	3:7	lbji		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the truth that characterizes God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “God’s truthfulness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
435	3:7	fa7j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἐν τῷ ἐμῷ ψεύσματι & κἀγὼ ὡς ἁμαρτωλὸς	1	Here Paul uses my and I to refer to a Jewish person who might give this hypothetical response. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternative translation: “when we Jews act falsely … are we … as sinners” or “when we Jews lie … are we … as sinners” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
436	3:7	o3po		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῷ ἐμῷ ψεύσματι	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of lie, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “when I act falsely” or “when I lie” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
437	3:7	je41		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ	1	Here, to indicates that this is a result clause. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “with the result that he is glorified” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
438	3:7	h61j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of glory, you could express the same idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “to demonstrate how glorious he is” or “to glorify him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
439	3:7	yv5j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί ἔτι κἀγὼ ὡς ἁμαρτωλὸς κρίνομαι	1	In this clause Paul is not asking for information, but is using this question to express an objection that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse, which was also repeated in the previous clause. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “surely I should not still be judged as a sinner!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
440	3:7	iiqc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἔτι κἀγὼ & κρίνομαι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “does God still judge me” or “should God keep on judging me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
441	3:7	pgus		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτωλὸς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of sinner, you could express the same idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “someone who sins” or “as if I were sinful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
442	3:8	vw1x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ	1	And here indicates that in this verse Paul continues speaking as if he were an unbelieving Jew and is challenging the statement he made in 3:6. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Furthermore” or “In addition” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
443	3:8	kb9d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	καὶ μὴ καθὼς βλασφημούμεθα, καὶ καθώς φασίν τινες ἡμᾶς λέγειν, ὅτι ποιήσωμεν τὰ κακὰ, ἵνα ἔλθῃ τὰ ἀγαθά?	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “And not, ‘Let us do evil, so that good may come,’ just as we are blasphemed and just as some affirm we say?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
444	3:8	wr3g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	καὶ μὴ	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “And why not say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
445	3:8	pr4u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	μὴ & ὅτι ποιήσωμεν τὰ κακὰ, ἵνα ἔλθῃ τὰ ἀγαθά	1	In this sentence Paul is not asking for information, but is using an elided question here (“And why not say”) to emphasize that God could not judge the world if he were unrighteous. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you should say … ‘Let us do the evil things, so that the good things may come!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
446	3:8	o3pz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-aside	καθὼς βλασφημούμεθα, καὶ καθώς φασίν τινες ἡμᾶς λέγειν	1	Paul is saying this as an aside in order to show that people have been falsely accusing him of teaching that people should sin in order to show how good God is. If this would be confusing in your language, you could add parentheses like the ULT or use a natural way in your language to indicate an aside. Alternate translation: “Some people blaspheme us and affirm that we are saying such things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-aside]])
447	3:8	veic		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	βλασφημούμεθα & ἡμᾶς	1	When Paul says we and us, he could be (1) speaking only of himself in a formal manner. Alternate translation: “I am blasphemed … me” (2) speaking of himself and all other Christians. Alternate translation: “we Christians are blasphemed … us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
448	3:8	klaa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	βλασφημούμεθα	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people blaspheme us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
449	3:8	vbpa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	μὴ καθὼς βλασφημούμεθα, καὶ καθώς φασίν τινες ἡμᾶς λέγειν, ὅτι ποιήσωμεν τὰ κακὰ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “not say (just as we are blasphemed and just as some affirm us to say) that we should do the evil things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
450	3:8	pe2c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-aside	ὧν τὸ κρίμα ἔνδικόν ἐστιν	1	Paul is saying this as an aside to show that the people who have been falsely accusing him of teaching people to “do the evil things, so that the good things may come” are the ones who deserve to be judged by God. If this would be confusing in your language, you could add parentheses as in the ULT or use a natural way in your language to indicate an aside. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-aside]])
451	3:8	re0k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὧν τὸ κρίμα ἔνδικόν ἐστιν	1	The pronoun whose here refers to the people who slander Paul by claiming that he teaches people to “do the evil things, so that the good things may come.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the judgment of those who say this is just” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
452	3:8	g87e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὧν τὸ κρίμα ἔνδικόν ἐστιν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of judgment, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “who are justly judged” or “whom God justly judges” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
453	3:9	z3wu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	τί οὖν? προεχόμεθα?	1	Here Paul concludes his series of rhetorical questions by using the same phrase What then he used to begin this discussion. See how you translated this phrase in 3:1. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
454	3:9	y6uz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	προεχόμεθα?	1	Paul is using the question form to express an objection that a Jew might have to what Paul has said previously. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely we are not better off!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
455	3:9	ajj8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	προεχόμεθα	1	Here, we is used exclusively to speak of Paul and his fellow Jews. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “Are we Jews better off” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
456	3:9	g85q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	οὐ πάντως	1	Not at all is an exclamation that communicates a strong negative response to the previous statement. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this idea. Alternate translation: “Absolutely not!” or “In no way!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
457	3:9	cbgq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	οὐ πάντως	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “We are not better off at all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
458	3:9	a01e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	προῃτιασάμεθα γὰρ	1	For here indicates that what follows is the reason why the previous statement is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “We are not better off because we have already accused” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
459	3:9	qvjy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	προῃτιασάμεθα	1	Here, we could mean: (1) Paul is speaking only of himself in a formal manner. Alternate translation: “I have already accused” (2) Paul is speaking of himself and other Christians. Alternate translation: “we Christians have already accused” See how you translated we in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
460	3:9	hgs3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ἕλληνας	1	Here, Greeks refers to non-Jewish people in general. It does not refer only to people from the country of Greece. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “non-Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
461	3:9	x4eb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὑφ’ ἁμαρτίαν	1	The phrase under sin is an idiom that means “under the power of sin” or “controlled by one’s desire to sin.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “controlled by sin” or “unable to stop sinning” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
462	3:10	u88n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	See how you translated this phrase in 1:17. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
463	3:10	zkzr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Just as the prophets wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
464	3:10	ju1k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	οὐκ ἔστιν δίκαιος οὐδὲ εἷς	1	This sentence is Paul’s paraphrase of Psalm 14:3. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
465	3:10	yt5d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	οὐκ ἔστιν δίκαιος οὐδὲ εἷς	1	These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that not even one person is righteous. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “There is not even one person who is righteous” or “Absolutely no one who is righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
466	3:10	bscu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	οὐκ ἔστιν δίκαιος οὐδὲ εἷς	1	Paul is using the singular adjectives none righteous and one as nouns in order to describe all people. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “There are no righteous people, not any people” or “There is no righteous person, not even one person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
467	3:11	b0m7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	οὐκ ἔστιν ὁ συνίων; οὐκ ἔστιν ὁ ἐκζητῶν τὸν Θεόν	1	This sentence is Paul’s paraphrase of Psalm 14:2 and Psalm 53:3. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
468	3:11	kqs5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	οὐκ ἔστιν & οὐκ ἔστιν	1	Paul is using the adjectives none as nouns in order to describe all people. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “There are no man … There are no man” or “There is no person … There is no person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
469	3:11	h9e9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐκ ἔστιν ὁ συνίων	1	Here, who understands refers to someone who is able to think wisely or correctly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “There is none who is wise” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
470	3:11	mn84		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὁ ἐκζητῶν τὸν Θεόν	1	Here, Paul quotes David using seeks to describe people attempting to know God as if God were lost and people needed to find him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who attempts to know God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
471	3:12	lg0i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	πάντες ἐξέκλιναν, ἅμα ἠχρεώθησαν; οὐκ ἔστιν ποιῶν χρηστότητα, οὐκ ἔστιν ἕως ἑνός	1	This sentence is quotation of Psalm 14:3 and Psalm 53:4. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
472	3:12	cen3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐξέκλιναν	1	Paul quotes David using turned away to describe these people as if they had left a path that leads to where God is. David means that they refuse to live according to God’s rules. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “refused to live the way God requires” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
473	3:12	a72h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἅμα ἠχρεώθησαν	1	Here, useless implies that these sinful people are so sinful that they benefit neither God nor humankind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “They together became worthless for benefitting anyone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
474	3:12	na87		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	οὐκ ἔστιν ποιῶν χρηστότητα, οὐκ ἔστιν ἕως ἑνός	1	These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that not even one type of person can continually do kindness. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “There is not even one person who does kindness” or “Absolutely no one is doing kindness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
475	3:12	v9ed		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	οὐκ & ἑνός	1	See how you translated none and one in 3:10. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
476	3:12	b3g1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	χρηστότητα	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of kindness, you could express the same idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “what is kind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
477	3:13	xr4g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	τάφος ἀνεῳγμένος ὁ λάρυγξ αὐτῶν; ταῖς γλώσσαις αὐτῶν ἐδολιοῦσαν	1	These two sentences are a quotation from Psalm 5:10. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
478	3:13	c7rh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	τάφος ἀνεῳγμένος ὁ λάρυγξ αὐτῶν; ταῖς γλώσσαις αὐτῶν ἐδολιοῦσαν; ἰὸς ἀσπίδων ὑπὸ τὰ χείλη αὐτῶν	1	These three sentences mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing three times, in slightly different ways, to show how harmful the words are that these people say. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “The things they say are deadly, deceptive, and damaging” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
479	3:13	nmrs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	ὁ λάρυγξ αὐτῶν	1	Paul quotes David speaking of these people’s throats in general, not of one particular throat. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “Each of their throats” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
480	3:13	sx6y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὁ λάρυγξ αὐτῶν	1	Here Paul quotes David using throat to describe something people would say by using their throats to say it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “What they say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
481	3:13	bbq5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τάφος ἀνεῳγμένος ὁ λάρυγξ αὐτῶν	1	Paul quotes David using opened grave to describe these people’s throat as if it were a deep hole containing rotting corpses. He means that the things these people say are morally corrupt and offend God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “Their words express moral corruption” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
482	3:13	pemg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ταῖς γλώσσαις αὐτῶν	1	Here Paul quotes David using tongues to describe something people would say to deceive someone, using their tongues to say it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with what they say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
483	3:13	d82g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ἰὸς ἀσπίδων ὑπὸ τὰ χείλη αὐτῶν	1	This sentence is a quotation from Psalm 140:3. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
484	3:13	b4bp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἰὸς ἀσπίδων	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe poison that comes from asps, which are venomous snakes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Asp’s poison” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
485	3:13	qk16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἰὸς ἀσπίδων	1	Paul quotes David using poison of asps to refer to what people say as if what they say contained poison. He means that the things they say harm people as does deadly venom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternative translation: “What hurts people like a poisonous snake bite” or “Speech that hurts people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
486	3:13	u40o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὑπὸ τὰ χείλη αὐτῶν	1	Here Paul quotes David using lips to describe something people would say to harm someone by using their lips to say it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is in what they say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
487	3:14	ucnr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ὧν τὸ στόμα ἀρᾶς καὶ πικρίας γέμει	1	This sentence is a quotation from Psalm 10:7. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
488	3:14	ujjd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	τὸ στόμα	1	Paul quotes David speaking of these people’s mouths in general, not of one particular mouth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “speech” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
489	3:14	sqr5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὧν τὸ στόμα	1
490	3:14	j0sg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀρᾶς καὶ πικρίας γέμει	1	Paul quotes David using cursing and bitterness as if these concepts were things with which people could fill or load their mouth. He means that these people habitually curse and say bitter things against others. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “habitually curses and says bitter things against others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
491	3:15-17	e67d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks		0	General Information: Verses 15–17 are Paul’s paraphrase of Isaiah 59:7–8. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
492	3:15	vds1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οἱ πόδες αὐτῶν	1	Paul quotes Isaiah using feet, a part of the human body, to refer to the whole person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “These people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
493	3:15	quph		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐκχέαι αἷμα	1	Paul quotes Isaiah using pour out blood to refer to violently murdering people, which usually causes blood to come out of the people who are murdered. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “to murder others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
494	3:16	bc96		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	σύντριμμα καὶ ταλαιπωρία	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of Destruction and suffering, you could express the same ideas with other expressions. Alternate translation: “Demolishing lives and making people suffer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
495	3:16	rrgr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐν ταῖς ὁδοῖς αὐτῶν	1	Here, ways is an idiom meaning “wherever they go” or “how they behave.” It refers to a person’s daily life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “characterize how they behave” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
496	3:17	zbrd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὁδὸν	1	See how you translated “ways” in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
497	3:17	jb6b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ὁδὸν εἰρήνης	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a way that is characterized by peace. He means that these people do not understand how to live peacefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a peaceful way” or “a peaceful way to behave” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
498	3:18	wr0x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	οὐκ ἔστιν φόβος Θεοῦ ἀπέναντι τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτῶν	1	This sentence is a quotation from Psalm 36:1. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
499	3:18	bx27		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	οὐκ ἔστιν φόβος Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of fear, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “There are no fearful feelings about God before their eyes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
500	3:18	frt1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	φόβος Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe fear that people should feel toward for God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “fear for God” or “fear about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
501	3:18	m89o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀπέναντι τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτῶν	1	Here,before their eyes is an idiom that refers to thinking about something. Paul means that these people do not think at all about how terrifying God is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “in their minds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
502	3:19	lrdp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Now here indicates that what follows summarizes Paul’s teachings about the law and “the righteousness of God” in 3:1–9. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Indeed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
503	3:19	gc8t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	οἴδαμεν	1	Here, we is used exclusively to speak of Paul and other Jews. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “we Jews know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
504	3:19	e8h2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὅσα ὁ νόμος λέγει & λαλεῖ	1	Here Paul speaks of the law as if it were a person who could speak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “as many things as God says in the law, he speaks” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
505	3:19	n399		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὁ νόμος & τῷ νόμῳ	1	Here Paul uses the law to refer to the entire Old Testament, which includes the law. Here he is not referring to only the law of Moses, as he did earlier in the chapter. We know this because in 3:10–18 Paul quoted verses from parts of the Old Testament that are not in the law of Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures … the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
506	3:19	b0g5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῖς ἐν τῷ νόμῳ	1	Paul uses those with the law to refer to the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. See how you translated a similar phrase in 2:12. Alternative translation: “to Jews” or “to those who know the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
507	3:19	end8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	Here, so that introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for what the law says. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
508	3:19	cy5r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	πᾶν στόμα φραγῇ	1	Here, every mouth may be shut is an idiom that means “no one can say anything to excuse themselves.” Paul means that no one can defend themselves before God, because everyone has sinned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “no human being can excuse himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
509	3:19	js71		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	φραγῇ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may stop talking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
510	3:19	w12y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	πᾶς ὁ κόσμος	1	Paul usesall the world figuratively to refer to all the people living in the world. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all the people in the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
511	3:19	wwq3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὑπόδικος γένηται & τῷ Θεῷ	1	The phrase may become accountable to God means that God will judge everyone at the final judgment according to how they lived their lives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “may fall under God's judgment of guilt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
512	3:20	ezbo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διότι	1	Here. because introduces a reason clause. Paul is stating the reason why all humanity is “accountable to God,” as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language to indicate a reason clause. You may need to begin a new sentence, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “The reason for this is that” or “As a result,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
513	3:20	vzot		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὐ δικαιωθήσεται πᾶσα σὰρξ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who will do the action, Paul implies that “God” will do it. Alternate translation: “God will not justify any flesh” or “God will not make any flesh righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
514	3:20	xs9x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	σὰρξ	1	Paul uses flesh figuratively to refer to a human being, who is made of flesh. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “human being” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
515	3:20	d6vi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐξ ἔργων νόμου & διὰ & νόμου ἐπίγνωσις ἁμαρτίας	1	In this verse Paul speaks of the law as if it were a person who could justify someone or give them full awareness. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by doing what God requires in his law … God gives full awareness of sin through his law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
516	3:20	w5qb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐξ ἔργων νόμου	1	See how you translated a similar phrase in 2:15. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
517	3:20	i7zi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	νόμου & νόμου	1	In this verse law is a singular noun that refers to a group of laws that God gave Israel by dictating them to Moses. It does not refer to the entire Old Testament, as in the previous verse. See how you translated this use of law in 2:12. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
518	3:20	llh9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐνώπιον αὐτοῦ	1	Here, before him is an idiom meaning “in his presence.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “in his presence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
519	3:20	xgpp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐπίγνωσις ἁμαρτίας	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of full awareness and sin, you could express the same ideas in a different way. Alternate translation: “fully aware of being sinful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
520	3:20	aety		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐπίγνωσις ἁμαρτίας	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe full awareness about the sin a person has committed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “full knowledge about sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
521	3:20	jdw9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ & νόμου	1	Here, through law indicates the means by which a person becomes fully aware of sin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
522	3:21	fqz4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	νυνὶ δὲ	1	But now here indicates that what follows is in contrast to Paul’s discussion about the law in 2:1–3:20. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Yet now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
523	3:21	y3te		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	νυνὶ δὲ χωρὶς νόμου, δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ πεφανέρωται	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “But now, the righteousness of God has been made known apart from the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
524	3:21	e5ky		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	νόμου & τοῦ νόμου	1	While the first occurrence of the law in this verse refers to the laws that God gave the Jews through Moses, the second occurrence refers to the first five books in the Old Testament that were written by Moses. The ULT shows this difference by using the law and the Law respectively. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the laws that God gave Israel … the part of Scripture that Moses wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
525	3:21	nlj0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	χωρὶς νόμου	1	Here, apart from the law could mean: (1) apart from doing what the law requires. Alternate translation: “without having to do what the law requires” (2) outside of what the law says. Alternate translation: “not related to what the law says” or “differently than what the law says” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
526	3:21	e4qe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ πεφανέρωται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God has made his righteousness visible” or “God has revealed his righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
527	3:21	qkis		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ	1	See how you translated this phrase in 1:17. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
528	3:21	gvca		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μαρτυρουμένη ὑπὸ τοῦ νόμου καὶ τῶν προφητῶν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Law and the Prophets bearing witness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
529	3:21	tnf8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	μαρτυρουμένη ὑπὸ τοῦ νόμου καὶ τῶν προφητῶν	1	Here Paul uses the Law and the Prophets as if they were people who could witness or testify in a courtroom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what God says in the Law and the Prophets is a written testimony to this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
530	3:21	bgyx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ὑπὸ τοῦ νόμου καὶ τῶν προφητῶν	1	Paul is using the name of two parts of the Hebrew Scriptures, the Law and the Prophets, to represent the entire Hebrew Scriptures in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in your Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
531	3:22	pec5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, but indicates that what follows explains how a person receives “the righteousness of God”. It does not indicate a contrast. Alternate translation: “namely,” or “even” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
532	3:22	cvhy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	δικαιοσύνη & Θεοῦ	1	See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
533	3:22	q4m1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	διὰ πίστεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here, faith in Jesus Christ is a possessive form that indicates faith that is associated with Jesus Christ. This could refer to: (1) trust in Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “by trusting in Jesus Christ” or “by believing in Jesus Christ” (2) the faithfulness of Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “through the faithfulness that Jesus Christ possesses” or “through how faithful Jesus Christ is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
534	3:22	c4mg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	τοὺς πιστεύοντας	1	Paul is leaving out some words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “those who believe in him” or “those who believe in Jesus for salvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
535	3:22	o6qe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1	Here, for introduces a reason clause. Paul is giving the reason why the righteousness of God is for all those who believe. Use a natural way in your language to indicate a reason. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
536	3:22	daa3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	οὐ & ἐστιν διαστολή	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of distinction, you could express the same idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “God does not discriminate” or “God is not partial” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
537	3:23	x1hu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For here introduces a reason clause. Paul is giving the reason why “there is no distinction,” as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language to indicate a reason. Alternate translation: “The reason for this is that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
538	3:23	akn9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πάντες	1	Here Paul uses the adjective all as a noun that refers to all the people who have ever existed or ever will exist. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
539	3:23	jbe9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὑστεροῦνται τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul speaks of all people as if they were something that fails to reach its destination. He means that they lack or do not attain the glory of God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “lack the glory of God” or “fail to attain the glory of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
540	3:23	vwsf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here the possessive form the glory of God could refer to: (1) the glory that God shared with humans when he created them, but which they lost when the first humans sinned. Alternate translation: “the glory God once gave them” or “the glory from God” (2) glorifying God, as in the similar phrase “the glory of the imperishable God” in 1:23. Alternate translation: “of glorifying God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
541	3:24	ibi2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	δικαιούμενοι δωρεὰν τῇ αὐτοῦ χάριτι	1	Here Paul speaks of grace as if it were a person who could justify someone. Paul means that God graciously makes people righteous as a gift. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and are gifted with becoming righteous because God is gracious” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
542	3:24	evs8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δικαιούμενοι δωρεὰν	1	Paul assumes that his readers know that those who are being justified freely are “all” those who “have sinned” in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “all people are being freely justified” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
543	3:24	jgcu			δωρεὰν	1	Alternate translation: “as a gift” or “without payment”
544	3:24	atij		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ αὐτοῦ χάριτι, διὰ τῆς ἀπολυτρώσεως τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of grace and redemption, you could express the same ideas with different forms. Alternate translation: “by God being gracious through redeeming them in Christ Jesus” or “due to how kind God is, because Christ Jesus redeemed them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
545	3:24	hyeb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀπολυτρώσεως	1	The word translated as redemption refers to rescuing someone from captivity by paying a ransom. Your language may require you to indicate what the people are redeemed from. This could mean: (1) Jesus redeems people from eternal punishment. Alternative translation: “redemption from eternal punishment” (2) Jesus redeems people from being enslaved to sin. Alternative translation: “redemption from enslavement to sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
546	3:24	lno6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	Here, Paul speaks of redemption as if it were an object that could be inside Jesus. Paul means that God redeemed all people who believe in Jesus by uniting them to Christ Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you can express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “that comes through union with Christ Jesus” or “that is through being united to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
547	3:25	ci0v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὃν προέθετο ὁ Θεὸς ἱλαστήριον	1	Here Paul uses presented as if Jesus were an Old Testament atonement sacrifice that was presented to God in the temple. He means that Jesus’ death was a sacrifice for the sins of humankind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “whom God offered to atone for the sins of humanity” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
548	3:25	t2d8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἱλαστήριον, διὰ πίστεως & εἰς ἔνδειξιν τῆς δικαιοσύνης αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of propitiation, faith, demonstration, or righteousness, you could express the same ideas with different forms. Alternate translation: “to atone for people’s sins by trusting … to demonstrate how he makes people righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
549	3:25	m159		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ αὐτοῦ αἵματι	1	Here Paul uses his blood to refer to Jesus’ death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in Christ’s death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
550	3:25	ieq9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς ἔνδειξιν τῆς δικαιοσύνης αὐτοῦ	1	Here, for indicates that the phrase that follows is the purpose for which God presented Jesus as a propitiation. Use a natural way in your language to indicate a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order to demonstrate his righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
551	3:25	ze9m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῆς δικαιοσύνης αὐτοῦ	1	See how you translated “the righteousness of God” in 1:17. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
552	3:25	siri		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	διὰ τὴν πάρεσιν τῶν & ἁμαρτημάτων	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of overlooking, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “because he overlooked the sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
553	3:25	ydoj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῶν προγεγονότων ἁμαρτημάτων	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of sin, you could express the same idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “how they had sinned previously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
554	3:26	b2f6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐν	1	Here, in introduces a reason clause. Paul is giving the reason for God “overlooking of the sins that happened previously,” as stated in the previous verse. Starting a new sentence, use a natural way in your language to indicate a reason. Alternate translation: “The reason for this is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
555	3:26	lm1r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ ἀνοχῇ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of forbearance, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “because God is so forbearing” or “since God forbears” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
556	3:26	cg55		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐν τῇ ἀνοχῇ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe God as being characterized by forbearance. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “in God’s forbearance” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
557	3:26	b1xa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	πρὸς τὴν ἔνδειξιν τῆς δικαιοσύνης αὐτοῦ	1	See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
558	3:26	v1c9			ἐν τῷ νῦν καιρῷ	1	Alternate translation: “at this time in history” or “currently”
559	3:26	jjwq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς τὸ εἶναι αὐτὸν	1	Here, so that indicates that what follows is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God now demonstrates his righteousness. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order that he would be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
560	3:26	x6cf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	τὸν ἐκ πίστεως Ἰησοῦ	1	Paul is speaking of all people who have faith in Jesus, not one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “anyone who is from faith in Jesus” or “every person who trusts in Jesus”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
561	3:26	qdkw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸν ἐκ πίστεως Ἰησοῦ	1	Here Paul is using the possessive form to describe a person who is characterized by faith in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the one who is characterized by faith in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
562	3:26	ab0w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	πίστεως Ἰησοῦ	1	See how you translated this phrase in 3:22. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
563	3:27-31	emwi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion		0	Connecting Statement: In 3:27–31 Paul uses a series of rhetorical questions and answers in order to emphasize that God alone makes people righteous through faith in Jesus. Like in 3:1–9, Paul is speaking as if he were a non-Christian Jew when he asks the rhetorical questions, but he is speaking as himself when he answers those questions. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
564	3:27	e0wc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Here, then indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in 3:21–26. If it might be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly, inserting a parenthetical phrase between commas. Alternate translation: “, if it is God who makes people righteous through faith in Jesus,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
565	3:27	fjm4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ποῦ οὖν ἡ καύχησις?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using this question to express an objection that a Jew might have to what Paul said in 3:21–26. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “There then is no grounds for boasting!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
566	3:27	mvs0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ποῦ οὖν ἡ καύχησις	1	Here Paul speaks of boasting as if it were an object that could be in a location. He means that no one can boast, because only God makes people righteous. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “Then can anyone boast” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
567	3:27	pub7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ποῦ οὖν ἡ καύχησις	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of boasting, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “Who then can boast” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
568	3:27	px29		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐξεκλείσθη	1	In this sentence Paul responds to the rhetorical question in the previous sentence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘It is excluded!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
569	3:27	eufl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐξεκλείσθη	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has excluded it” or “God does not allow it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
570	3:27	v3ut		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	διὰ ποίου νόμου? τῶν ἔργων? & διὰ νόμου πίστεως	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that these sentences would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Through what kind of law is a person made righteous? Is a person made righteous through the works of the law? … a person is made righteous through a law of faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
571	3:27	dpny		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	διὰ ποίου νόμου? τῶν ἔργων?	1	In these two sentences Paul is not asking for information, but is using these two questions to express the objections that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous sentence and in 3:21–26. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely through a kind of law! Surely through the works!” or “Surely a person is made righteous through a kind of law! Surely a person is made righteous through works!”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
572	3:27	bgyy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῶν ἔργων?	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a law that is characterized by works. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Through a law characterized by works?” or “By doing what the law requires?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
573	3:27	h9wb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐχί, ἀλλὰ διὰ νόμου πίστεως	1	In this sentence Paul responds to the rhetorical questions in the previous two sentences. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘No! But through a law of faith.’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
574	3:27	tg79		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	οὐχί	1	No! is an exclamation that communicates a strong contrast to the previous statement. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating a strong contrast. Alternate translation: “Not at all!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
575	3:27	ynz1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	διὰ νόμου πίστεως	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a law that is characterized by faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “through a law characterized by faith” or “by doing what faith requires” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
576	3:27	mlcq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πίστεως	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “of trusting in God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
577	3:28	qe9p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, what follows explains what “the law of faith” means in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
578	3:28	jtqq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	λογιζόμεθα	1	Here, we is used exclusively to speak of Paul and other Christian Jews, as indicated in 3:9. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “we believing Jews consider” or “we believing Jews regard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
579	3:28	t8um		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπον	1	Although the term man is masculine, Paul is using the word here in the generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “humankind” or “a person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
580	3:28	ph88		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δικαιοῦσθαι & ἄνθρωπον	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in an active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “that God justifies a man” or “that God makes a man righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
581	3:28	jb14		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πίστει	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “by believing in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
582	3:28	ycx2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἔργων νόμου	1	Paul is using the possessive form to refer to the works that God requires in the law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the works that the law requires” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
583	3:29	hdbq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἢ	1	Or here indicates that the next two sentences are the responses that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Or you Jews might say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
584	3:29	ineu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	οὐχὶ καὶ ἐθνῶν? ναὶ, καὶ ἐθνῶν	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that these sentences would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Is he not also God of Gentiles? Yes, he is also God of Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
585	3:29	m8eo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐθνῶν & ἐθνῶν	1	See how you translated Gentiles in 1:5. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
586	3:29	ch7p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	Ἰουδαίων ὁ Θεὸς μόνον? οὐχὶ καὶ ἐθνῶν?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using these two questions here to express the responses that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “God is surely not only the God of Jews! He is surely also the God of Gentiles!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
587	3:29	rq5m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ναὶ, καὶ ἐθνῶν	1	In this sentence Paul responds to the rhetorical questions in the previous two sentences. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘Yes, also of Gentiles’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
588	3:29	gp74		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ναὶ	1	Yes is an exclamation that communicates enthusiasm. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating enthusiasm. Alternate translation (change the period to an exclamation point): “Of course!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
589	3:30	vur7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἴπερ	1	Paul uses if as if the rest of the verse were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation, (without either comma preceding): “Since we know” or “Because it is true that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
590	3:30	qdiu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἴπερ	1	This phrase introduces the reason why Paul could say in the previous verse that God is also the God of the Gentiles. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a reason clause. Alternate translation: “since, indeed” or “we know this is true because, indeed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
591	3:30	ux30		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἷς ὁ Θεός	1	Paul speaks of God as if he were a number. He means that God is the one and only true God for both Jews and Gentiles. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “there is only one God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
592	3:30	rjxp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	ὃς δικαιώσει περιτομὴν ἐκ πίστεως, καὶ ἀκροβυστίαν διὰ τῆς πίστεως	1	This phrase gives further information about who our God is. It is not making a distinction between the one true God and false gods. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “he is the one who will justify the circumcision by faith, and he will justify the uncircumcision through the same faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
593	3:30	kw62		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	περιτομὴν & ἀκροβυστίαν	1	The words circumcision and uncircumcision are singular nouns that refer to groups of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the circumcised people … the uncircumcised people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
594	3:30	gk5d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	περιτομὴν & ἀκροβυστίαν	1	Here Paul uses the circumcision to refer to the Jews by associating them with circumcision, and he uses the uncircumcision figuratively to refer to the Gentiles by associating them with uncircumcision. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people … the non-Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
595	3:30	s9i4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐκ πίστεως & διὰ τῆς πίστεως	1	See how you translated this phrase in 3:26. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
596	3:31	vj40		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	νόμον οὖν καταργοῦμεν	1	Here, then indicates that this sentence is the response that a Jew might have made to what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then you Jews might say, ‘Do we nullify the law’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
597	3:31	y6qx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	νόμον οὖν καταργοῦμεν διὰ τῆς πίστεως	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using this question to express the response that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then we surely nullify the law through the same faith!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
598	3:31	nzr7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	οὖν καταργοῦμεν	1	Here, we is used exclusively to speak of the unbelieving Jews on whose behalf Paul is speaking. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “Do we Jews then nullify” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
599	3:31	cw0k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	νόμον οὖν καταργοῦμεν	1	Here, nullify the law means to make the law useless or no longer applicable to anyone. Paul is stating that the Jews might worry that he is teaching that the law of Moses does not have any function at all because God makes people righteous by faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Do we make the law useless” or “Do we throw away the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
600	3:31	aj6s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	διὰ τῆς πίστεως	1	See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
601	3:31	pjgc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μὴ γένοιτο! ἀλλὰ νόμον ἱστάνομεν	1	In these two sentences Paul responds to the rhetorical questions in the previous sentence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘May it never be! Instead, we establish the law’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
602	3:31	rhy5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	μὴ γένοιτο	1	See how you translated this phrase in 3:6. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
603	3:31	ppvo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	νόμον ἱστάνομεν	1	Here, we is used exclusively to refer to Paul and other Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “we Christians uphold the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
604	3:31	c295		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	νόμον ἱστάνομεν	1	Paul uses uphold to refer to the law as if it were an object that people could hold up high. The meaning of uphold here is the opposite meaning of nullify, used earlier in the verse. It could mean: (1) Christians fulfill the requirements of the law by trusting in Jesus, who fulfilled the law for them. Alternate translation: “we fulfill the law by faith” (2) Christians value the law and affirm that it is useful. Alternative translation: “we confirm that the law is useful” or “we affirm that the law has value”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
605	4:intro	f9jc				0	Romans 4 General Notes Structure and Formatting Righteousness is received through Jesus Christ by trusting in him (3:21–5:21) God’s righteousness is received through faith (3:21–26) No one can boast in works (3:27–31) The examples of Abraham and David (4:1–25) Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with 4:7–8 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament. Special Concepts in this Chapter The purpose of the law of Moses In this chapter Paul continues to develop his argument based on what he wrote in the previous chapter. He explains how God made Abraham, the ancestor of all Jews, righteous a long time before God gave the law of Moses to the Jews. Even Abraham could not become righteous by what he did. Rather, God made Abraham righteous on the basis of Abraham’s faith. Obeying the law of Moses does not make a person righteous. People have always become righteous only by faith. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]]) Circumcision Circumcision was important to the Israelites. It identified a person as a descendant of Abraham. It was also a sign of the covenant between Abraham and Yahweh. However, being circumcised never made anyone righteous. In this chapter Paul uses “circumcision” to refer to Jews and “uncircumcision” to refer to non-Jews. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/circumcise]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]]) Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter Rhetorical Questions In 4:1, 3, and 9–10 Paul continues using rhetorical questions like he did in the previous chapter. He does this in order to answer objections that Jews might make about what he is saying.
606	4:1-12	q7wc				0	Connecting Statement: 4:1–12 are a series of rhetorical questions and answers that Paul uses to emphasize that even Abraham, the ancestor of the Jewish people, was made righteous by God “through faith.”
607	4:1	gxv3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	τί οὖν	1	Here, then indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous chapter, especially what he said in 3:27–31. See how you translated What then in 3:1. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
608	4:1	gw29		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν, εὑρηκέναι Ἀβραὰμ τὸν προπάτορα ἡμῶν κατὰ σάρκα?	1	In this verse Paul is not asking for information, but is using a question to express the objections that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous chapter, especially what he said in 3:27–31. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then we will say that Abraham, our forefather according to the flesh, has surely discovered something!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
609	4:1	rhrp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν, εὑρηκέναι Ἀβραὰμ τὸν προπάτορα ἡμῶν κατὰ σάρκα?	1	In this verse and the first part of the next verse, Paul is speaking as if he were a non-Christian Jew arguing against Paul. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
610	4:1	s4b5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἐροῦμεν	1	In 4:1–9 Paul uses we exclusively to speak of himself and other Jews. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “will we Jews say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
611	4:1	ot88		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	εὑρηκέναι Ἀβραὰμ τὸν προπάτορα ἡμῶν κατὰ σάρκα	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “that Abraham has discovered, who is our forefather according to the flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
612	4:1	fk5t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατὰ σάρκα	1	See how you translated according to the flesh in 1:3. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
613	4:2	pmua		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	εἰ γὰρ Ἀβραὰμ ἐξ ἔργων ἐδικαιώθη, ἔχει καύχημα	1	These clauses continue the the statements that an unbelieving Jew might make against Paul that began in the previous verse. You may need to indicate this with a closing quotation mark at the end of these clauses or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
614	4:2	ka9b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that what follows is the reason for the statement in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This must be the case because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
615	4:2	oe12		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ & Ἀβραὰμ ἐξ ἔργων ἐδικαιώθη, ἔχει καύχημα	1	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that the unbelieving Jew might think that this is actually true. In Paul’s time some Jewish teachers taught that Abraham had a right to boast because of his faith. However, since translating this as if it were true might confuse your readers, it is best to use a hypothetical sentence, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
616	4:2	wvmh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	Ἀβραὰμ & ἐδικαιώθη	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God justified Abraham” or “God made Abraham right with himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
617	4:2	sibe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐξ ἔργων	1	Paul assumes that his readers would understand that worksmeans “works of the law” as in 3:28. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by doing what God requires from his people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
618	4:2	mefy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀλλ’ οὐ πρὸς Θεόν	1	In this clause Paul begins to respond to the rhetorical questions he wrote in the previous clauses and previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘But not before God!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
619	4:2	me3d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλ’ οὐ πρὸς Θεόν.	1	What follows the word but here is an emphatic contrast to what was just stated. Paul is negating the argument that he presented earlier in this verse and in the previous verse. You could make this emphasis explicit by replacing the period with an exclamation point or another natural way in your language for introducing am emphatic contrast. Alternate translation: “but certainly not before God!” or “however, not from God’s perspective!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
620	4:2	z9wx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πρὸς Θεόν	1	Paul speaks of Abraham as if he were located in the presence of God. He means that Abraham could not boast to God about his righteousness if it was righteous by works. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “from God’s perspective” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
621	4:3	w9i5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that what follows in this verse is the reason why Paul said in the previous verse that Abraham cannot boast “before God.” Use a natural way in your language to introduce a reason clause. Alternative translation: “This is true because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
622	4:3	hih3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί & ἡ Γραφὴ λέγει	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “the scripture surely says” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
623	4:3	g1wz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	τί & ἡ Γραφὴ λέγει	1	Here Paul uses say as if the scripture were a person who could speak. He means that the scripture he is about to quote contains information related to the topic he is discussing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what information is in the scripture” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
624	4:3	r9te		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	τί & ἡ Γραφὴ λέγει?	1	Here Paul uses what does the scripture say to indicate a quotation from an Old Testament book (Genesis 15:6). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “what is written in the scripture” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
625	4:3	xdtx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἡ Γραφὴ	1	Here, the scripture refers specifically to the quotation from Genesis 15:6 that follows in this verse. It does not refer to the Scriptures in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the scripture that Moses wrote in Genesis” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
626	4:3	smc6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God credited it to him as righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
627	4:3	az65		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐλογίσθη	1	The pronoun it refers to Abraham’s faith, which was implied by the statement that Abraham believed God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “his faith was credited” or “his trust in God was credited” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
628	4:3	qked		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δικαιοσύνην	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of righteousness, you could express the same idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “being righteous” or “being right with God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
629	4:4	ihul		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Now here indicates that what follows in verses 4–5 is an explanation of the scripture quotation in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “Certainly,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
630	4:4	oojx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	τῷ & ἐργαζομένῳ	1	Here, the one who works refers to a hypothetical person who obeys the laws God gave through Moses and is “made righteous by works” (see 4:2). However, since the meaning of verses 4–5 is given in the next verse, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
631	4:4	dsl8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ μισθὸς οὐ λογίζεται κατὰ χάριν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he does not consider his wage as grace” or “he does not regard his pay as grace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
632	4:4	xo4x			κατὰ χάριν & κατὰ ὀφείλημα	1	Alternate translation: “as a matter of grace … as a matter of obligation” or “as a gift … as an obligation”
633	4:4	ossx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	κατὰ χάριν & κατὰ ὀφείλημα	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of grace and obligation, you could express the same ideas with different forms. Alternate translation: “as what is gracious … as what is owed” or “as something gifted … as something owed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
634	4:5	ynp2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Now here indicates that what follows in this verse is in contrast to what Paul said in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language to express contrasting ideas. Alternate translation: “But” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
635	4:5	j3ir		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῷ & μὴ ἐργαζομένῳ	1	Here, the one who does not work refers to a person who does not obey the laws God gave through Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the one who is does not obey God’s laws” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
636	4:5	fezj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν δικαιοῦντα	1	Here, the one who justifies refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God who justifies” or “God who makes righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
637	4:5	tovp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τὸν ἀσεβῆ	1	Paul is using the singular adjective phrase the ungodly as a noun in order to describe a group of people. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are ungodly” or “people who do ungodly things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
638	4:5	va3e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	λογίζεται ἡ πίστις αὐτοῦ εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. See how you translated a similar phrase in 4:3. Alternate translation: “God credited his faith as righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
639	4:5	s00l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ πίστις αὐτοῦ εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of faith and righteousness, you could express the same ideas with different forms. Alternate translation: “how he trusts … as being righteous” or “how he trusts in God … as being right with God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
640	4:6	hil6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	καὶ Δαυεὶδ λέγει	1	Paul uses David also speaks of here to introduce a scripture quotation from Psalm 31:1–2, which David wrote. This occurs in 4:7–8. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from the Old Testament. Alternate translation: “David also wrote in the Old Testament of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
641	4:6	s0v1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸν μακαρισμὸν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of blessedness, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “how blessed the man is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
642	4:6	vyse		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸν μακαρισμὸν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the man that is characterized by blessedness. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the blessed man” or “the happy man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
643	4:6	x40j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	τοῦ ἀνθρώπου	1	Paul is speaking of people in general, not of one particular man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “of a person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
644	4:6	c6zs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	ᾧ ὁ Θεὸς λογίζεται δικαιοσύνην χωρὶς ἔργων	1	This phrase gives further information about the the man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “that is, the man God credits as righteous apart from works” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
645	4:6	lilj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	λογίζεται δικαιοσύνην	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of righteousness, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “counts being righteous” or “counts being right with himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
646	4:6	o260		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	χωρὶς ἔργων	1	See how you translated this phrase in 3:28. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
647	4:7	zqwl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	μακάριοι, ὧν ἀφέθησαν αἱ ἀνομίαι καὶ ὧν ἐπεκαλύφθησαν αἱ ἁμαρτίαι	1	This verse is the beginning of a quotation from Psalm 31:1–2. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
648	4:7	dur6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	μακάριοι, ὧν ἀφέθησαν αἱ ἀνομίαι καὶ ὧν ἐπεκαλύφθησαν αἱ ἁμαρτίαι	1	These two clauses mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show how Blessed these people are. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “How blessed are those people whom God forgives completely for all their sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
649	4:7	lq4w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὧν & αἱ ἀνομίαι & ὧν & αἱ ἁμαρτίαι	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of lawless deeds and sins, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the lawless things they have done … the sins they have committed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
650	4:7	d4f4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀφέθησαν & ἐπεκαλύφθησαν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God forgives … God covers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
651	4:7	hj2w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὧν ἐπεκαλύφθησαν αἱ ἁμαρτίαι	1	Paul quotes David leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “blessed are those whose sins have been covered” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
652	4:7	hqfm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπεκαλύφθησαν	1	Paul quotes David using covered to refer to God forgiving sins as if he covers sins so that he no longer sees them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “have been forgiven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
653	4:8	jjov		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	μακάριος ἀνὴρ, οὗ οὐ μὴ λογίσηται Κύριος ἁμαρτίαν	1	The end of this verse is the end of a quotation from Psalm 31:1–2. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
654	4:8	yox7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	μακάριος ἀνὴρ, οὗ οὐ μὴ λογίσηται Κύριος ἁμαρτίαν	1	This verse means the same thing as the two clauses in the previous verse. Paul says the same thing here in a slightly different way to emphasize how Blessed people are whom God forgives for their sins. Use a natural way in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “How truly blessed is a man whose sin the Lord does certainly not count!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
655	4:8	kpfe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	ἀνὴρ	1	Paul quotes David speaking of people in general, not of one particular man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “a person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
656	4:8	y21b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτίαν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of sin, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “sinful deeds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
657	4:8	jdrm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὐ μὴ λογίσηται	1	Paul quotes David using count to refer to God remembering or regarding people’s sins after he has forgiven them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “does certainly not regard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
658	4:8	yxh2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐ μὴ	1	The phrase certainly not translates two negative words in Greek. Paul quotes David using them together to emphasize how certain it is that God does not regard people’s sin after he has forgiven them. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “never” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
659	4:9	qtgb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Then here introduces a result clause. This verse indicates the logical conclusion to what Paul has stated in 4:6–8. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “As a result,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
660	4:9	g4f6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ὁ μακαρισμὸς & οὗτος ἐπὶ τὴν περιτομὴν, ἢ καὶ ἐπὶ τὴν ἀκροβυστίαν?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “this blessedness is surely upon the circumcision and also upon the uncircumcision!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
661	4:9	alrb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ μακαρισμὸς & οὗτος	1	Here, this blessedness refers to the joyful state of those people whom God forgives and makes righteous, as mentioned in 4:6–8. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “is this blessed state of being forgiven by God” or “is this blessed forgiveness from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
662	4:9	jmym		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὁ μακαρισμὸς & οὗτος ἐπὶ τὴν περιτομὴν & ἐπὶ τὴν ἀκροβυστίαν	1	Paul speaks of blessedness as if it were an object that could be put upon someone. He means that both circumcised and uncircumcised people can receive the blessing of forgiveness from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is this blessedness given to the circumcision … to the uncircumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
663	4:9	dn7v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	τὴν περιτομὴν & τὴν ἀκροβυστίαν	1	See how you translated these words in 3:30. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
664	4:9	mrsm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γάρ	1	For here indicates that what follows answers the rhetorical question. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Indeed, ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
665	4:9	w2xt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	λέγομεν	1	Here Paul uses we exclusively to refer to Paul and other Jews. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “we Jewish people say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
666	4:9	o51f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	λέγομεν	1	Paul uses we say here to introduce a modified scripture quotation from Genesis 15:6, which Moses wrote. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from the Old Testament. Alternate translation: “we say what Moses wrote in the Old Testament” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
667	4:9	m3uh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐλογίσθη τῷ Ἀβραὰμ ἡ πίστις εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1	See how you translated the similar clauses in 4:3 and 4:5. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
668	4:10	trz4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	πῶς οὖν ἐλογίσθη? ἐν περιτομῇ ὄντι, ἢ ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ?	1	In these two sentences Paul is not asking for information, but is using these two questions to emphasize that Abraham was made righteous without being circumcised. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. You may need to combine these sentences. Alternate translation: “Then you surely know how it was credited to him! You surely know whether it was in circumcision or in uncircumcision!” or “Then you surely know how it was credited to him, whether in circumcision or in uncircumcision!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
669	4:10	unuf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	πῶς οὖν	1	Here, then introduces a result clause that is in the form of a rhetorical question. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “How, as a result,” or “So then, how” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
670	4:10	uj5i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	πῶς	1	How here means “in what circumstances.” Paul is not asking how God made Abraham righteous, but is asking whether or not Abraham was circumcised when God made him righteous. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “In what circumstances” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
671	4:10	bw38		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐλογίσθη & οὐκ ἐν περιτομῇ	1	In this verse the pronoun it refers to Abraham’s faith, as stated in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “was Abraham’s faith credited … His faith was not in circumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
672	4:10	p5rp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πῶς οὖν ἐλογίσθη	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “How then did God credit it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
673	4:10	wbta		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἐν περιτομῇ ὄντι, ἢ ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ? οὐκ ἐν περιτομῇ, ἀλλ’ ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ	1	Here Paul is leaving out some the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “Was it credited being in circumcision, or was it credited being in uncircumcision? It was not credited in circumcision, but it was credited in uncircumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
674	4:10	zj6b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν περιτομῇ ὄντι, ἢ ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ? οὐκ ἐν περιτομῇ, ἀλλ’ ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of circumcision and uncircumcision, you could express the same ideas in a different way. Paul implies that Abraham is the subject of these sentences. Alternate translation: “While Abraham was circumcised, or while he was uncircumcised? It was not while he was circumcised, but while he was uncircumcised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
675	4:11	unmg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	περιτομῆς & ἐν τῇ ἀκροβυστίᾳ & δι’ ἀκροβυστίας	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of circumcision and uncircumcision, you could express the same ideas in a different way. Alternate translation: “of being circumcised … while being uncircumcised … through being uncircumcised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
676	4:11	d564		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	σημεῖον & περιτομῆς	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the sign that is circumcision. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the sign that is circumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
677	4:11	rjhr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	σφραγῖδα τῆς δικαιοσύνης τῆς πίστεως τῆς ἐν τῇ ἀκροβυστίᾳ	1	This phrase gives further information about the sign of circumcision. Circumcision is not only a sign, but also a seal. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these clauses clearer. Alternate translation: “that is, a seal of the righteousness of the faith that he had in his uncircumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
678	4:11	wm54		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	σφραγῖδα τῆς δικαιοσύνης	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a seal that proves the righteousness to be real. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a seal that proves the righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
679	4:11	n31z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῆς δικαιοσύνης τῆς πίστεως	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe righteousness that comes from faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “of the righteousness from faith” or “of being right with God that comes from trusting in him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
680	4:11	zlwg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	τῆς ἐν τῇ ἀκροβυστίᾳ	1	This clause gives further information about the faith that Abraham had. Paul is referring to the faith that Abraham had before he was circumcised. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “that Abraham had in his uncircumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
681	4:11	mob7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν τῇ ἀκροβυστίᾳ	1	Here Paul speaks of uncircumcision as if it were a location someone could be in. He means that Abraham was in the state of being uncircumcised. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “while he was uncircumcised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
682	4:11	f5vv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς τὸ εἶναι αὐτὸν	1	Here, so that introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God required Abraham to become circumcised. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that he would be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
683	4:11	ue6v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πατέρα πάντων τῶν πιστευόντων δι’ ἀκροβυστίας	1	Paul uses father to refer to Abraham as if he physically produced all those who believe in God. Paul means that Abraham spiritually represents all uncircumcised non-Jews who trust in God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternative translation: “the spiritual representative of all those who believe through uncircumcision” or “like the father of all those who believe through uncircumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
684	4:11	etyl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δι’ ἀκροβυστίας	1	Here the word translated as through refers to going through a time period. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “during uncircumcision” or “throughout the time they were uncircumcised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
685	4:11	hm61		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς τὸ λογισθῆναι αὐτοῖς τὴν δικαιοσύνην	1	Here, so that indicates that this clause could refer to: (1) the purpose of Abraham being the father of all those who believe. Alternate translation: “in order that the righteousness would be credited to them” (2) the result of Abraham being the father of all those who believe. Alternate translation: “resulting in the righteousness being credited to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
686	4:11	y88e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	εἰς τὸ λογισθῆναι αὐτοῖς τὴν δικαιοσύνην	1	See how you translated counted in 4:3–5 and 9–10. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
687	4:11	ehib		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν δικαιοσύνην	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of righteousness, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “being righteous” or “being right with God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
688	4:12	v9bu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ πατέρα περιτομῆς	1	Here, and indicates that what follows is another purpose for God commanding Abraham to be circumcised after he trusted in God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could repeat some of the information from the previous sentence and start a new sentence. Alternate translation: “and also so that he would be the father of circumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
689	4:12	u8j3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πατέρα περιτομῆς τοῖς οὐκ ἐκ περιτομῆς μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ τοῖς στοιχοῦσιν τοῖς ἴχνεσιν τῆς ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ πίστεως, τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἀβραάμ	1	Paul uses father of circumcision to indicate that Abraham is both the physical ancestor and spiritual ancestor of Jewish people who believe in Jesus. They are both physically circumcised and have the “circumcision of the heart,” which Paul refers to in 2:29. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to those Jews who are not only circumcised, but who also follow in the steps of the faith of our father Abraham in his uncircumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
690	4:12	krkf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῖς οὐκ ἐκ περιτομῆς μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ τοῖς στοιχοῦσιν τοῖς ἴχνεσιν τῆς ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ πίστεως, τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἀβραάμ	1	Paul assumes that his readers will know that these two clauses refer to those Jews who are not only circumcised in their bodies, but also have the same faith in God that Abraham had before he was circumcised. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to those Jews who are not only circumcised, but who also follow in the steps of the faith of our father Abraham in uncircumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
691	4:12	s9jt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	καὶ τοῖς στοιχοῦσιν τοῖς ἴχνεσιν τῆς & πίστεως, τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἀβραάμ	1	Here, follow in the steps is an idiom that means to follow someone’s example. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “who follow the example of the faith of our father Abraham” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
692	4:12	btrd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῆς & πίστεως, τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἀβραάμ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the faith that our father Abraham had. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “of our father Abraham’s faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
693	4:12	u5ur		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἀβραάμ	1	Here, our refers to Paul and his fellow believing Jews, as in 3:9. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “of our Jewish father Abraham” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
694	4:12	ykdc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ	1	Here, in uncircumcision has the same meaning as “through circumcision” stated in the previous verse. See how you translated the phrase there. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
695	4:13	i6xc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For here gives the reason why Abraham is the spiritual “father” of both non-Jews and Jews, as stated in 4:11–12. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
696	4:13	e0a3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἐπαγγελία & τὸ κληρονόμον αὐτὸν εἶναι κόσμου	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of promise and heir, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “God promised … that he would inherit the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
697	4:13	yqxx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἢ	1	Here, the world translated or indicates that the promise is to Abraham and his seed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and also” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
698	4:13	ew13		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ	1	Here Paul uses seed to refer to “offspring.” Just as plants produce seeds that grow into many more plants, so people can have many offspring. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to his descendants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
699	4:13	ct1f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	κόσμου	1	Here the world could refer to: (1) all the land of the world. Although God had promised to give the land of Canaan to Abraham’s descendants, the Jews in Paul’s time understood that this promise included the whole earth. This will indeed take place when Jesus, a descendent of Abraham, rules over the whole world. Alternate expression: “of all the land in the world” (2) the people who live in the world, as in 3:19. Alternate translation: “of the people who live in the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
700	4:13	pjyt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐ & διὰ νόμου & ἀλλὰ διὰ δικαιοσύνης	1	Here the word translated as through indicates the means by which God gave the promise. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “was not by means of the law but by means of the righteousness” or “was not on the basis of the law but on the basis of the righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
701	4:13	kquo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	νόμου	1	See how you translated the law in 3:21. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
702	4:13	iqsm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	δικαιοσύνης πίστεως	1	See how you translated the similar phrase in 4:11. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
703	4:14	hba4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that 4:14–15 give the reasons why God’s promise to Abraham was given “through the righteousness of faith” and not “through the law,” as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for introducing reasons. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
704	4:14	n0x6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ & οἱ ἐκ νόμου κληρονόμοι, κεκένωται ἡ πίστις	1	Paul is using a hypothetical situation to help his readers recognize the serious implications of how people inherit God’s promises. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “suppose the heirs are from the law, then the faith has been emptied” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
705	4:14	ksui		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	οἱ ἐκ νόμου κληρονόμοι & ἡ πίστις & ἡ ἐπαγγελία	1	See how you translated “heir”, the law, and faith in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
706	4:14	k4ip		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κληρονόμοι	1	Here, heirs refers to “Abraham” and “his seed” from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the heirs, Abraham or his seed, are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
707	4:14	w977		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ ἐκ νόμου κληρονόμοι	1	Here, from the law refers to those who try to obey the law of Moses so that God will count them as righteous. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the heirs are those who try to obey the law so that God will count them as righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
708	4:14	hxvd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κεκένωται ἡ πίστις	1	Paul speaks of faith as if it were a container that could be emptied. He means that faith would become powerless or useless to make a person righteous if simply obeyingthe law allows a person to inherit God’s promises. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “then it would be impossible to become righteous by trusting in God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
709	4:15	v1ow		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For indicates that the rest of the verse gives the reason why inheriting God’s promise by obeying the law would nullify faith and the promise, as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
710	4:15	qma4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὁ & νόμος ὀργὴν κατεργάζεται	1	Here Paul speaks of the law as if it were a person who could produce something. He means that the law causes God to punish people because they cannot obey it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “the law results in wrath for those who do not obey it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
711	4:15	h1x1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὀργὴν	1	See how you translated the same use of this word in 1:18. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
712	4:15	px0m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὗ δὲ οὐκ ἔστιν νόμος, οὐδὲ παράβασις	1	Paul speaks of the law and transgression as if they were located in a specific place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “but where the law is not present, neither is transgression present” or “but in a place where God’s law does not exist, transgression also does not exist” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
713	4:15	t0wx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	παράβασις	1	See how you translated the same use of transgression in 2:23. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
714	4:16	defl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκ πίστεως	1	Here, it refers to the promise mentioned later in the verse and introduced in 4:13. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the promise is by faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
715	4:16	nchm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκ πίστεως	1	Here, by faith indicates the means by which someone acquires the promise. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a person acquires God’s promise by faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
716	4:16	bc5k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	This phrase introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God makes faith the means for acquiring the promise. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “so that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
717	4:16	fvax			κατὰ χάριν	1	Alternate translation: “by grace” or “on the basis of grace”
718	4:16	cgpq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	χάριν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of grace, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “how gracious God is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
719	4:16	v8it		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς τὸ εἶναι βεβαίαν, τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν	1	Here, so that could indicate: (1) a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order for the promise to be certain” (2) a result clause. Alternate translation: “with the result that the promise might be certain” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
720	4:16	qalp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν	1	See how you translated promise in 4:13. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
721	4:16	r8ji		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	παντὶ τῷ σπέρματι	1	The phrase all the seed is singular but refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “all the descendants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
722	4:16	xzsp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	παντὶ τῷ σπέρματι	1	See how you translated seed in 4:13.(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
723	4:16	a4ai		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	οὐ τῷ ἐκ τοῦ νόμου μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ τῷ ἐκ πίστεως Ἀβραάμ	1	These clauses give further information about the phrase all the seed. They distinguish between the seed associated with the law and the seed associated with the faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “both from those believers associated with Abraham through the law and those associated with the faith of Abraham” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
724	4:16	ns6r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκ τοῦ νόμου	1	See how you translated this phrase in 4:14. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
725	4:16	qctv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκ πίστεως Ἀβραάμ	1	Here, from the faith of Abraham refers to those who trust in God the way Abraham did. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “who has the same faith as Abraham” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
726	4:16	welr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὅς ἐστιν πατὴρ πάντων ἡμῶν	1	Paul uses father to refer to Abraham as if he physically produced all human beings. Paul means that Abraham is the physical ancestor of all believing Jews and the spiritual ancestor of all believing non-Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “who spiritually represents all of us who believe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
727	4:16	kd6g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	πάντων ἡμῶν	1	Here, us all refers to all the seed and so is inclusive of all believing Jews and non-Jews. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “of all believers in God” or “of all of us who trust in God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
728	4:17	nuj8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	καθὼς γέγραπται, ὅτι πατέρα πολλῶν ἐθνῶν τέθεικά σε	1	Here Paul interrupts the sentence he began in the previous verse and inserts these two clauses in order to support his argument. If it would be helpful in your language, you could mark these clauses in a way that shows they are inserted into the middle of a sentence, as in the UST. You could also move these clauses to the end of the verse so that they do not divide the main sentence. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
729	4:17	ibwm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	Here Paul uses a quotation from the Old Testament in order to support the statement in the previous verse that Abraham “is the father of us all.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between this verse and the previous verse clearer. Alternate translation: “The fact that Abraham is the father of us all is written in the Scriptures, which say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
730	4:17	iju4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	See how you translated this phrase in 1:17. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
731	4:17	sjm0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation was written by Moses. Alternate translation: “just as Moses wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
732	4:17	peaf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	πατέρα πολλῶν ἐθνῶν τέθεικά σε	1	In this clause Paul quotes Genesis 17:5. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
733	4:17	mxm5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τέθεικά σε & ἐπίστευσεν	1	The pronoun I refers to God, and you and he refer to Abraham. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, have appointed you, Abraham, as … Abraham trusted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
734	4:17	n6l7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πατέρα πολλῶν ἐθνῶν	1	Paul quotes God using father to refer to Abraham as if he were going to physically produce children who would comprise many nations. God means that Abraham would become the spiritual ancestor of a large number of people from many nations who trust in God as does Abraham. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “the spiritual representative of numerous groups of people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
735	4:17	ph37		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατέναντι οὗ ἐπίστευσεν Θεοῦ,	1	Here Paul continues the sentence from the previous verse that he had interrupted with the first two clauses in this verse. This clause completes the previous statement from the previous verse, “who is the father of us all.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. You made need to start a new sentence, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “Abraham is the father of us all in the presence of God whom he trusted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
736	4:17	ifwu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κατέναντι & Θεοῦ	1	Paul uses in the presence of to refer to Abraham as if he were physically present with God. Paul means that God personally considers Abraham to represent the believers that come from many nations. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “according to what God thinks” or “in God’s view” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
737	4:17	s67j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	οὗ ἐπίστευσεν & τοῦ ζῳοποιοῦντος τοὺς νεκροὺς, καὶ καλοῦντος τὰ μὴ ὄντα ὡς ὄντα	1	These clauses give further information about God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer by making new sentences or by another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “This is the God whom he trusted. It is this God who makes the dead live and calls the things not existing as existing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
738	4:17	tg2e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καλοῦντος τὰ μὴ ὄντα ὡς ὄντα	1	Paul speaks of the things not existing as if God were calling to them. Paul means that God creates things by commanding them to exist, as Moses describes in Genesis 1:3–27. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “summons into being things that did not previously exist” or “by speaking, creates things that did not previously exist” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
739	4:18	emih		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὃς & αὐτὸν & σου	1	The pronouns who and he and your refer to Abraham, not God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
740	4:18	g8fm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὃς παρ’ ἐλπίδα, ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι ἐπίστευσεν	1	Here, against hope is an idiom meaning “despite what seemed hopeless.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “although it seemed hopeless, he believed on the basis of hope” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
741	4:18	auah		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὃς παρ’ ἐλπίδα, ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι ἐπίστευσεν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of hope, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “who hopefully believed although it seemed hopeless” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
742	4:18	n62i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἐπίστευσεν	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “believed in God” or “believed what God had promised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
743	4:18	bs6y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς τὸ γενέσθαι αὐτὸν	1	Here, so that indicates that this is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the result of Abraham believing on the basis of hope. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a result clause. Alternate translation: “which resulted in him becoming” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
744	4:18	qbdq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πατέρα πολλῶν ἐθνῶν	1	See how you translated this phrase in 4:17. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
745	4:18	b92q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	τὸ εἰρημένον	1	Here Paul uses what was said to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book (Genesis 15:5). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “what was said in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
746	4:18	cryi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸ εἰρημένον	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation was spoken by God. Alternate translation: “what God said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
747	4:18	p5el		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὕτως ἔσται τὸ σπέρμα σου	1	Paul assumes that his readers would know the rest of what God said in the verse he is quoting (Genesis 15:5). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Look now at the heavens and count the stars, if you are able to count them. So will your seed be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
748	4:18	i2ev		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸ σπέρμα	1	See how you translated seed in 4:16.(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
749	4:19	ycte		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	καὶ μὴ ἀσθενήσας τῇ πίστει, κατενόησεν τὸ ἑαυτοῦ σῶμα ἤδη νενεκρωμένον, ἑκατονταετής που ὑπάρχων, καὶ τὴν νέκρωσιν τῆς μήτρας Σάρρας	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “He considered his own body as already having died (being about a hundred years old)—and the deadness of the womb of Sarah—but he was not weakening in the faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
750	4:19	m9gq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	καὶ μὴ ἀσθενήσας τῇ πίστει	1
751	4:19	s6u1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μὴ ἀσθενήσας τῇ πίστει	1	Paul speaks of Abraham’s faith as if it were something in which a person could be weakening. He means that Abraham kept trusting God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “not ceasing to trust” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
752	4:19	b3w6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ πίστει	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “in how he trusted God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
753	4:19	bn9k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἤδη νενεκρωμένον	1	Paul speaks of Abraham as if he actually thought his body was dead. Paul means that Abraham knew he was too old to produce a child. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “unable to father a child” or “useless for procreating” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
754	4:19	bfsr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	ἑκατονταετής που ὑπάρχων	1	Here Paul provides background information about Abraham’s age to help his readers understand why Abraham considered his own body as already being dead. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “since he was about 100 years old” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
755	4:19	hro2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	τὴν νέκρωσιν τῆς μήτρας Σάρρας	1	Here Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “he also considered the deadness of the womb of Sarah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
756	4:19	ghhm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν νέκρωσιν τῆς μήτρας Σάρρας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of deadness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that the womb of Sarah was dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
757	4:19	qil5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὴν νέκρωσιν τῆς μήτρας Σάρρας	1	Paul speaks of Sarah’s womb as if it were dead. He means that she was unable to conceive children. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “how Sarah was unable to conceive” or “that Sarah could not bear children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
758	4:19	yx92		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὴν νέκρωσιν τῆς μήτρας Σάρρας	1	Paul assumes that his readers would know that Sarah had been unable to become pregnant throughout her life, as described in the Old Testament book of Genesis. This fact makes Abraham’s faith even more amazing. If your readers would be unfamiliar with the story of Abraham and Sarah, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the deadness of the womb of Sarah, since she could never become pregnant before” or “the deadness of the womb of Sarah, which had always been dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
759	4:20	qn5h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	εἰς δὲ τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, οὐ διεκρίθη τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “Abraham did not waver in unbelief about what God promised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
760	4:20	kicf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1
761	4:20	o3zu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰς & τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	The word translated as toward could also mean “with regard to” or “regarding.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “with regard to the promise of God” or “regarding the promise of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
762	4:20	qcod		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the promise that comes from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the promise that came from God” or “the promise from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
763	4:20	wgmc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of promise, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “the things God promised” or “the things God said would happen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
764	4:20	ep2z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐ διεκρίθη τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ	1	Here, did not waver and unbelief form a double negative expression. If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “he did not waver in believing” or “his belief did not waver” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
765	4:20	th2x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ & τῇ πίστει	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of unbelief and faith, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “by distrusting … by trusting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
766	4:20	zdj5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐνεδυναμώθη τῇ πίστει	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God strengthened him in the faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
767	4:20	a4g4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐνεδυναμώθη τῇ πίστει	1	Paul speaks of Abraham’s faith as if it were something in which a person could be strengthened. He means that God enabled Abraham to continue trusting him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “was enabled to keep on trusting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
768	4:20	ew3r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δοὺς δόξαν τῷ Θεῷ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of glory, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “having glorified God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
769	4:21	y2sh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πληροφορηθεὶς	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God fully convinced him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
770	4:21	plbf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐπήγγελται & ἐστιν	1	The pronoun he refers to God, not Abraham. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God had promised, God is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
771	4:21	j12r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὃ ἐπήγγελται	1	Here, what he had promised refers to the promise Paul describes in 4:13. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the things God promised to Abraham” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
772	4:22	ympp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ καὶ	1	Here, therefore introduces a result clause. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “And for this reason” or “And this is the reason why” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
773	4:22	wlnh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1	This clause is a quotation from Genesis 15:6. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
774	4:22	i56a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1	See how you translated this in 4:3. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
775	4:23	zdc0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	οὐκ ἐγράφη & δι’ αὐτὸν μόνον, ὅτι ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases and combine them. Alternate translation: “Now the phrase ‘it was credited to him,’ was not written only for his sake” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
776	4:23	r65c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν & αὐτῷ	1	The pronouns his and him refer to Abraham. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Abraham’s … to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
777	4:23	bfiw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὐκ ἐγράφη & δι’ αὐτὸν μόνον	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Moses wrote the quotation. Alternate translation: “Moses did not write it only for Abraham’s sake” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
778	4:23	bmlm			δι’ αὐτὸν	1	Alternate translation: “for him” or “regarding him”
779	4:23	ae1u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ὅτι ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ,	1	This clause is a quotation from Genesis 15:6. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
780	4:23	jft0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ	1	See how you translated this in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
781	4:24	pfc9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	δι’ ἡμᾶς, οἷς μέλλει λογίζεσθαι, τοῖς πιστεύουσιν ἐπὶ τὸν ἐγείραντα Ἰησοῦν, τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	Here, our and whom refer to all those who believe in Jesus. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “for the sake us believers who are about to be credited, to us who believe in the one who raised from the dead ones Jesus, the Lord of us all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
782	4:24	ffdm			δι’ ἡμᾶς	1	See how you translated “for his sake” in the previous verse.
783	4:24	nh4k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οἷς μέλλει λογίζεσθαι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who will do the action, Paul implies that “God” will do it. Alternate translation: “to whom God is about to credit it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
784	4:24	bu1m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	μέλλει	1	Here the pronoun it refers to the “faith” mentioned in 4:5 and 4:20. Previously it referred to Abraham’s faith, but in this verse it refers to our faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “our faith is about” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
785	4:24	mujr			λογίζεσθαι	1	See how you translated credited in the previous verse.
786	4:24	artt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν ἐγείραντα Ἰησοῦν, τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	This clause refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God who raised Jesus our Lord from the dead ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
787	4:24	i6vl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐγείραντα Ἰησοῦν, τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν	1	Here, raised is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who caused Jesus our Lord to live again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
788	4:24	iq69		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	Here, the phrase translated the dead ones refers to dead people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from the place where dead people are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
789	4:25	irue		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὃς & ἡμῶν & τὴν δικαίωσιν ἡμῶν	1	Here the pronoun who refers to Jesus, and our refers to all “those who believe” in him, as mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus … we believers’ … the justification of us believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
790	4:25	cca1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὃς παρεδόθη & ἠγέρθη	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “whom God gave up … God raised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
791	4:25	b999		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὃς παρεδόθη	1	Paul speaks of Jesus as if he were a thing that could be given up to another person. Paul means that God allowed people to arrest and kill Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “who was allowed to be killed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
792	4:25	op41		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	διὰ τὰ παραπτώματα ἡμῶν & διὰ τὴν δικαίωσιν ἡμῶν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas of trespasses and justification, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “because we trespassed … to make us righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
793	4:25	imvc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὰ τὰ παραπτώματα ἡμῶν	1	Here Paul uses for the sake of differently than he did in 4:23–24. Here Paul uses this phrase to indicate the reason why Jesus was given up. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “because of our trespasses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
794	4:25	gmbd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἠγέρθη	1	See how you translated raised in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
795	4:25	hzop		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	διὰ τὴν δικαίωσιν ἡμῶν	1	Here Paul uses for the sake of differently than he did in the first part of this verse. Here Paul uses this phrase to indicate one of the purposes for Jesus being raised. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of our justification” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
796	5:intro	i1dt				0	Romans 5 General Notes Structure and Formatting Righteousness is received through Jesus Christ by trusting in him (3:21–5:21) God’s righteousness is received through faith (3:21–26) No one can boast in works (3:27–31) The examples of Abraham and David (4:1–25) The blessings of justification (5:1–11) Adam and Christ are compared (5:12–5:21) Special Concepts in this Chapter The second Adam Adam was the first man. He was created by God and called the first “son” of God. He brought sin and death into the world by eating the forbidden fruit. In this chapter Paul describes Jesus as the “second Adam” and the true son of God. Jesus brings eternal life and overcame sin and death by dying on the cross. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofgod]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/other/death]]) Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter Inclusive language In this chapter the pronouns “we”, “us”, and “our” refer inclusively to all believers in Christ. Paul calls these people those who have been “justified by faith” in 5:1. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
797	5:1	age4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	The word Therefore here marks a new section of the letter. It also introduces a result clause that summarizes the blessed results of a person becoming righteous by trusting in Jesus, which Paul just discussed in 1:18–4:25. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “Since all these things are true” or “As a result of everything that I have just told you being true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
798	5:1	xmp3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	δικαιωθέντες & ἐκ πίστεως, εἰρήνην ἔχωμεν πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν, διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “let us have peace with God through our Lord Jesus Christ, because we have been justified by faith” or “we can have peace with God through our Lord Jesus Christ, since we have been justified by faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
799	5:1	xott		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δικαιωθέντες	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “because God makes us righteous” or “since God makes us right with him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
800	5:1	wbwx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐκ πίστεως	1	See how you translated this phrase in 4:16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
801	5:1	ldru		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	εἰρήνην ἔχωμεν	1	Some ancient copies say “we have peace,” which makes sense, since 5:1–5 are a list of blessings that belong to those people who have been justified by faith. If the reading let us have peace is correct, this phrase may be indicating Paul’s desire that his fellow believers continue to experience the peace they have with God. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the readings of ULT and UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
802	5:1	kjpb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	ἔχωμεν	1	Paul uses the phrase let us have peace to exhort his Christian readers to continue living peacefully with God. It is not a command. This phrase does not imply that those who have been justified by faith do not yet have peace with God. Use a form in your language that communicates an exhortation. Alternate translation: “we must continue to have” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
803	5:1	hi12		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰρήνην ἔχωμεν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of peace, you could express the same idea with a verbal form, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
804	5:1	o2yr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰρήνην ἔχωμεν	1	Paul speaks of these people as if they could possess or own peace. He means that they can live peacefully with God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “let us live in a peaceful manner” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
805	5:1	s6xd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἔχωμεν & ἡμῶν	1	Here and throughout this chapter, us and our inclusively refer to all those having been justified by faith in Jesus. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “let us believers have … our” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
806	5:1	xaeg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here, through indicates that our Lord Jesus Christ is the means by which believers have peace with God. This refers to what Jesus did for believers in order for them to have peace with God, as briefly mentioned in 4:25. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “through what our Lord Jesus Christ did for us” or “which was caused by our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
807	5:2	slyh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δι’ οὗ καὶ τὴν προσαγωγὴν ἐσχήκαμεν, τῇ πίστει εἰς τὴν χάριν ταύτην, ἐν ᾗ ἑστήκαμεν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of access, faith, or grace, you could express the same ideas another way. Alternate translation: “through whom we also access and stand in how gracious God is by trusting in him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
808	5:2	tsbo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὗ	1	The pronoun whom refers to “our Lord Jesus Christ,” as mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
809	5:2	i50u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	καὶ & ἐσχήκαμεν & ἑστήκαμεν & καυχώμεθα	1	The pronoun we in this verse refers inclusively to all believers in Christ. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “we believers also have … we believers stand … we believers boast” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
810	5:2	af0n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰς τὴν χάριν ταύτην, ἐν ᾗ ἑστήκαμεν	1	Paul speaks of grace as if it were a location that someone could access and stand within. He means that trusting in Jesus allows believers to confidently experience how gracious God is toward his people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “to confidently experience how kind God is” or “to safely experience how gracious God is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
811	5:2	dxcu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	καυχώμεθα ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of hope and glory, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “we may boast because we are confident that we will be glorified with God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
812	5:2	zp5p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using possessive forms to describe how glory relates to God. This could refer to: (1) the glory that God shares with believers. This was the same glory that God shared with humans when he created them, but which they lost when the first humans sinned, as mentioned in 3:23. Alternate translation: “of sharing in the glory God has” or “of the glory from God” (2) glorifying God, as in the similar phrase “the glory of the imperishable God” in 1:23. Alternate translation: “of glorifying God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
813	5:3	q5p7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὐ μόνον δέ	1	The pronoun this here refers to boasting about “the hope of the glory of God,” as mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “And we not only boast on the basis of the hope of the glory of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
814	5:3	c644		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καὶ καυχώμεθα ἐν ταῖς θλίψεσιν	1	Here, in our sufferings could mean: (1) believers can boast about their sufferings. Alternate translation: “we can also boast about our sufferings” (2) believers can boast while they are experiencing sufferings. Alternate translation: “we can also boast when we are distressed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
815	5:3	xeak		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰδότες	1	Here, knowing indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse are the reasons why believers can boast in our sufferings. Use a natural way in your language for introducing reasons. Alternate translation: “since we know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
816	5:3	c0rl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ταῖς θλίψεσιν & ἡ θλῖψις & ὑπομονὴν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of sufferings, suffering, and endurance, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “when we suffer … when we suffer, it … a way to endure” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
817	5:3	lo57		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἡ θλῖψις ὑπομονὴν κατεργάζεται	1	Paul speaks of endurance as if it were an object that could be produced. He means that when Christians trust in God while suffering, they develop greater endurance than they had before experiencing suffering. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “this suffering helps us know how to endure” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
818	5:4	w7c2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἡ δὲ ὑπομονὴ δοκιμήν, ἡ δὲ δοκιμὴ ἐλπίδα	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and endurance produces character, and this character produces hope” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
819	5:4	dt8w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ & ὑπομονὴ	1	See how you translated endurance in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
820	5:4	gjvh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δοκιμήν, ἡ δὲ δοκιμὴ	1	The word translated character refers specifically to the mental and moral qualities of someone who has been approved by God because they have successfully endured testing. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of character, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “qualities of which God approves, and the approved qualities” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
821	5:4	eh9c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐλπίδα	1	See how you translated hope in 5:2. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
822	5:5	u4xh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἡ δὲ ἐλπὶς οὐ καταισχύνει, ὅτι ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐκκέχυται ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, τοῦ δοθέντος ἡμῖν	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “And because the love of God has been poured into our hearts through the Holy Spirit, who has been given to us, that hope does not disappoint” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
823	5:5	rctz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἡ δὲ ἐλπὶς	1
824	5:5	qka8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὅτι ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐκκέχυται ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, τοῦ δοθέντος ἡμῖν	1	Paul speaks of love as if it were something that could be poured out of a container, and he speaks figurative of our hearts as though they were containers that could be filled. He means that the Holy Spirit has completely revealed to God’s people how much God loves them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “because the Holy Spirit, who was given to us, has deeply revealed how much God loves his people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
825	5:5	dc95		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐκκέχυται ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, τοῦ δοθέντος ἡμῖν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit, whom God gave us, has poured the love of God into our hearts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
826	5:5	clmb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe how love relates to God. Here, the love of God could refer to: (1) God’s love for us. Alternate translation: “God’s love” or “God’s love for us” (2) our love for God. Alternate translation: “our love for God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
827	5:5	glt1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν	1	See how you translated this word in 1:21. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
828	5:6	x5eg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that what follows in 5:6–8 explains “the love of God” in 5:5. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
829	5:6	a7s7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	ἔτι & ὄντων ἡμῶν ἀσθενῶν	1	In this clause Paul is describing something that was true during the time period he is describing in the rest of the verse. You can make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “during the time we were still being weak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
830	5:6	xqr3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔτι & ὄντων ἡμῶν ἀσθενῶν	1	Here, weak means that people are completely unable to make themselves righteous. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “we still being powerless to make ourselves righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
831	5:6	xl85		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὑπὲρ ἀσεβῶν	1	Here, ungodly ones refers to the we mentioned earlier in the verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “on behalf of us ungodly ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
832	5:7	o92c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here,For introduces an explanation, by contrast, of how surprising it is that Christ would die on behalf of ungodly sinners, as stated in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
833	5:7	h089		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo	μόλις γὰρ & τις ἀποθανεῖται & γὰρ & τάχα τις	1	Paul uses someone twice in this verse in two hypothetical situations. He does this to help his readers recognize how rare it is for someone to voluntarily die on behalf of another person. Use the natural form in your language for expressing hypothetical situations. Alternate translation: “Let us consider how rare it would be for someone to die … Let us, though, suppose that perhaps someone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
834	5:7	x60d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	γὰρ & τάχα τις	2	What follows the word though here is in contrast to what Paul stated in the previous sentence. Although someone will hardly die for a righteous person, someone might possibly be willing to die for a good person. Although Paul does not state the difference between a righteous person and a good person, he contrasts both examples to emphasize how unlikely it is for a person to willingly die on behalf of another person. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “By contrast, perhaps someone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
835	5:7	mqyq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καὶ τολμᾷ ἀποθανεῖν	1	Paul speaks of dying as if it were a dare or challenge for someone to overcome. He means that someone would be brave enough to give their life for the sake of someone else. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “might even be willing to die” or “would even be brave enough to die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
836	5:8	qh0h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	ἑαυτοῦ	1	Paul uses the word his own to emphasize how much God loves his people. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “his very own” or “his personal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
837	5:8	vh6y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἑαυτοῦ ἀγάπην εἰς ἡμᾶς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of love, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “how much God loves us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
838	5:8	c8vd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	ἔτι ἁμαρτωλῶν ὄντων ἡμῶν	1	In this clause Paul is describing something that was true during the time period he is describing in the rest of the verse. You can make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “during the time we were still being sinners” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
839	5:8	fel5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ἔτι ἁμαρτωλῶν ὄντων ἡμῶν, Χριστὸς ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν ἀπέθανεν	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation (omitting the preceding comma): “Christ died for us while we were still being sinners” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
840	5:9	vnxd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	πολλῷ οὖν μᾶλλον	1	Here, then indicates that what follows is the result of what Paul described in 5:6–8. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “Much more, therefore” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
841	5:9	tewt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	πολλῷ οὖν μᾶλλον	1	Much more then here strongly emphasizes that what follows is another important result of what Christ did for us. Use a natural way in your language to express strong emphasis. Alternate translation: “It is then much more certain that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
842	5:9	zp4v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	δικαιωθέντες νῦν ἐν τῷ αἵματι αὐτοῦ	1	This clause states the reason why we can be much more certain that we will be saved. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “because we have now been justified by his blood” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
843	5:9	x9yi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δικαιωθέντες νῦν ἐν τῷ αἵματι αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express these ideas with active forms or in other ways that are natural in your language. Alternate translation: “his blood having now justified us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
844	5:9	nvs3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ αἵματι αὐτοῦ	1	See how you translated his blood in 3:25. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
845	5:9	jbaz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σωθησόμεθα δι’ αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express these ideas with active forms or in other ways that are natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he will save us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
846	5:9	bev3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ὀργῆς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of the wrath, you could use a different expression. Here, the wrath refers specifically to “the day of wrath”, which is mentioned in 2:5. Alternate translation: “when God finally judges sinners” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
847	5:10	wply		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, For introduces an explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
848	5:10	mz06		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ & ἐχθροὶ ὄντες	1	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since, being enemies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
849	5:10	rnc5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κατηλλάγημεν τῷ Θεῷ διὰ τοῦ θανάτου τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use passive forms in this way, you could express these ideas with active forms or in other ways that are natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the death of his Son reconciled us to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
850	5:10	cu3c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	Son is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
851	5:10	o1m6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	πολλῷ μᾶλλον	1	Here, much more strongly emphasizes that what follows is an important result of having been reconciled with God. See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “it is much more certain” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
852	5:10	n817		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καταλλαγέντες	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express this idea with an active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he having reconciled us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
853	5:10	e4ug		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καταλλαγέντες	1	This clause states the reason why we can be much more certain that we will be saved. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “because we have been reconciled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
854	5:10	tmxf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σωθησόμεθα ἐν τῇ ζωῇ αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express this idea with an active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “his life will save us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
855	5:10	gcto		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	σωθησόμεθα	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the similar statement in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “when God finally judges people, we will be saved ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
856	5:10	eeo4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῇ ζωῇ αὐτοῦ	1	Here life implies the life that Jesus has after God made him alive again. This resurrection life showed that God had accepted Jesus’ death as the payment for the sins of everyone who trusts in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus’ life after God caused him to become alive again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
857	5:10	b3z4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ζωῇ αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of life, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “him being alive again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
858	5:11	a0vk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὐ μόνον δέ	1	The pronoun this could refer to: (1) what Paul said in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Not only are we saved by his life, but” (2) what Paul said in 5:2–10. Alternate translation: “Not only are all these things true, but” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
859	5:11	zp36		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καὶ καυχώμενοι ἐν τῷ Θεῷ	1	Paul speaks of these people as if they were boasting inside of God. Paul means that these believers in Christ boast about how great God is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “we also are boasting about how great God is” or “we also are boasting because of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
860	5:11	uukm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here, through indicates that our Lord Jesus Christ is the means by which believers can boast. This refers to what Jesus did for believers in order for them to be able to boast. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “through what our Lord Jesus Christ did for us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
861	5:11	r0zj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δι’ οὗ νῦν τὴν καταλλαγὴν ἐλάβομεν	1	Here, through indicates that Jesus is the means by which believers have received the reconciliation. This refers to what Jesus did for believers in order for them to have peace with God, as briefly mentioned in 4:25. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “through what he did for us that caused us to receive the reconciliation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
862	5:11	xjes		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	νῦν τὴν καταλλαγὴν ἐλάβομεν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of reconciliation, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “we have now been reconciled with God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
863	5:12	hjx4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	διὰ τοῦτο	1	The phrase For this reason indicates that what follows in 5:12–21 is Paul’s explanation of the relationship between human sin and God’s grace. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Because of this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
864	5:12	wf9f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὥσπερ δι’ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου ἡ ἁμαρτία εἰς τὸν κόσμον εἰσῆλθεν, καὶ διὰ τῆς ἁμαρτίας ὁ θάνατος; καὶ οὕτως εἰς πάντας ἀνθρώπους ὁ θάνατος διῆλθεν	1	Here Paul speaks of sin and death as if they were objects that could enter a place or spread within people. Paul means that the way God intended for the world and human beings to function became thoroughly corrupted by sin and death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “just as through one man sin began to exist in the world, and that sin would result in that man’s death, so also all men born after that man would die too” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
865	5:12	pa8s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δι’ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου	1	Paul uses the phrase one man to refer to Adam, the first human being. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly, as in 5:14. Alternate translation: “through the first man, Adam,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
866	5:12	smc2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἁμαρτία & τῆς ἁμαρτίας ὁ θάνατος; καὶ οὕτως & ὁ θάνατος	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of sin and death, you could use different expressions. Alternate translation: “sinful things … sinful things, living things could die, so also the ability to die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
867	5:12	uxcs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	διὰ τῆς ἁμαρτίας ὁ θάνατος	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “and through sin death entered into the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
868	5:12	xhbv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπους	1	Although the term men is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
869	5:12	jy25		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐφ’ ᾧ πάντες ἥμαρτον	1	Here the pronoun which could refer to: (1) the fact that Paul states in the next phrase. Alternate translation: “because of this fact, namely, that all sinned” (2) the one man mentioned earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “because of the one man, all sinned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
870	5:12	si2i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πάντες	1	Paul is using the adjective all as a noun in order to describe a group of people. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “all men” or “all humanity” or “all people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
871	5:13	at4i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that what follows in 5:13–14 explains what came before it. Here it explains how death and sin existed before the law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
872	5:13	e6bx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἄχρι γὰρ νόμου & μὴ ὄντος νόμου	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “For until the law came … as that was when there was no law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
873	5:13	abjg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	νόμου & νόμου	1	In this verse law refers to the laws that God gave the Jews. See how you translated law in 2:12. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
874	5:13	v51t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτία & ἁμαρτία	1	See how you translated sin in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
875	5:13	uyd4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἁμαρτία ἦν ἐν κόσμῳ	1	Here Paul speaks of sin as if it were an object that could exist in a place. Paul means that people sinned in the world before God gave his laws to Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “people sinned in the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
876	5:13	juq7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἁμαρτία & οὐκ ἐλλογεῖται	2	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God did not charge them with sinning” or “God did not reckon it as sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
877	5:13	izno			ἁμαρτία & οὐκ ἐλλογεῖται	2	Alternate translation: “a record of sin is not kept” or “no account is kept of sins”
878	5:13	v5l9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	μὴ ὄντος νόμου	1	Here, being could indicate: (1) the reason why sin is not charged. Alternate translation: “because there was no law” (2) the time when sin is not charged. Alternate translation: “when there was no law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
879	5:13	j04c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μὴ ὄντος νόμου	1	Here, no law implies that God had not yet given people his laws that could help them identify what sin is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “being no law to identify to people what sin is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
880	5:14	bd3q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐβασίλευσεν ὁ θάνατος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰμ μέχρι Μωϋσέως, καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς	1	Here Paul speaks of death as if it were a king who ruled over people. Paul means that nobody could prevent themselves from dying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “no human from Adam until Moses could escape dying, even those” or “human life from Adam until Moses inevitably ended in death, even the lives of those” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
881	5:14	u66m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὁ θάνατος	1	See how you translated death in 5:12. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
882	5:14	pdrh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀπὸ Ἀδὰμ μέχρι Μωϋσέως	1	Here, Adam refers to the period of time when Adam lived and Moses refers to the period of time when Moses lived. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “from the time when Adam lived until the time when Moses lived” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
883	5:14	w24g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς μὴ ἁμαρτήσαντας ἐπὶ τῷ ὁμοιώματι τῆς παραβάσεως Ἀδάμ	1	This phrase gives further information about over whom death ruled. It is not making a distinction between those who lived during the time of Adam and Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “even over the people who did not disobey God in the same way as did Adam” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
884	5:14	skns		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐπὶ τῷ ὁμοιώματι τῆς παραβάσεως Ἀδάμ, ὅς ἐστιν τύπος τοῦ μέλλοντος	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of likeness, transgression, and pattern, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in the same way that Adam transgressed, who typifies the one who is coming” or “exactly how Adam transgressed, who resembles the one who is coming” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
885	5:14	k2w7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐπὶ τῷ ὁμοιώματι τῆς παραβάσεως Ἀδάμ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe how the likeness relates to the transgression. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “like Adam’s transgression” or “in the same way Adam transgressed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
886	5:14	e4ze		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	Ἀδάμ, ὅς ἐστιν τύπος τοῦ μέλλοντος	1	Paul speaks of Adam as if he were a model or pattern. Paul means that Adam’s role is similar to the role of the one who is coming because both people do things that affect all human beings. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “Adam, who is a replica of the one who is coming” or “Adam, who models the one who is coming” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
887	5:14	mu4s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦ μέλλοντος	1	The phrase the one who is coming refers to Jesus. Paul means that Adam represents the ideal human being, Jesus, who would come in the future. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “representing Jesus, who would come in the future” or “prefiguring Jesus, who was destined to come” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
888	5:15	x37x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ παράπτωμα & τὸ χάρισμα & τῷ τοῦ ἑνὸς παραπτώματι & ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ ἡ δωρεὰ ἐν χάριτι	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of trespass, gracious gift, grace, and gift, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “how Adam trespassed … what God graciously gave … when the one man trespassed … how gracious God is and what he graciously gave” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
889	5:15	ieb0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	οὐχ ὡς τὸ παράπτωμα, οὕτως καὶ τὸ χάρισμα	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “the gracious gift is not like the trespass” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
890	5:15	sful		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces an explanation of the difference between the trespass and the gracious gift. Use a connection word or other way to indicate that the second sentence of this verse explains the first one. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “You see,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
891	5:15	yxej		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is true. He has concluded that the benefits of the gracious gift are superior to the consequences of the trespass. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is true. Alternate translation: “as” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
892	5:15	kdhb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῷ τοῦ ἑνὸς παραπτώματι	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the trespass that was committed by the one man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “by one man’s trespass” or “because one man trespassed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
893	5:15	e9me		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	οἱ πολλοὶ & τοὺς πολλοὺς	1	Here Paul is using the adjective many as a noun in order to describe a large group of people. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
894	5:15	h6c3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	πολλῷ μᾶλλον	1	Here, how much more strongly emphasizes the difference between the results of the trespass of Adam and the grace of God that comes through Jesus Christ. Use a natural way in your language to express strong emphasis. Alternate translation: “even more certainly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
895	5:15	tfhj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ ἡ δωρεὰ ἐν χάριτι, τῇ τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, εἰς τοὺς πολλοὺς ἐπερίσσευσεν	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “abounded to the many the grace of God and the gift by the grace of the one man, Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
896	5:15	ejxz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe grace that comes from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “God’s grace” or “the grace from God” or “how kind God is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
897	5:15	wn36		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the grace that comes from the one man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “from the one man” or “associated with the one man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
898	5:16	ns9a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ οὐχ ὡς δι’ ἑνὸς ἁμαρτήσαντος, τὸ δώρημα; τὸ μὲν γὰρ κρίμα ἐξ ἑνὸς, εἰς κατάκριμα, τὸ δὲ χάρισμα ἐκ πολλῶν παραπτωμάτων, εἰς δικαίωμα	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these sentences, since the second sentence gives the reason for the result that the first sentence describes. Alternate translation: “Indeed, because the judgment came from one man unto condemnation, but the gift came from many trespasses unto justification. This is why the gift is not the same as through the one man who sinned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
899	5:16	rmpt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ δώρημα & τὸ δὲ χάρισμα	1	See how you translated these two phrases in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
900	5:16	ok2k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὡς δι’ ἑνὸς ἁμαρτήσαντος	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the same as what came through one who sinned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
901	5:16	muum		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἑνὸς ἁμαρτήσαντος	1	Here, one who sinned refers to Adam, as mentioned in 5:12–15. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Adam, the one who sinned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
902	5:16	ub9s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ & κρίμα	2	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of judgment, you could express the same idea in another way, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
903	5:16	eusx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐξ ἑνὸς	1	Here, one refers to the one sin Adam committed. It does not refer to Adam himself, as the previous one does. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “from Adam’s trespass” or “from the sin Adam committed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
904	5:16	xza3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐξ ἑνὸς	1	Here, from one could indicate: (1) that the judgment happened after the one trespass. Alternate translation: “after one” (2) that the judgment happened because of the one trespass. Alternate translation: “because of one” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
905	5:16	t4t8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς κατάκριμα & παραπτωμάτων, εἰς δικαίωμα	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of condemnation, trespasses, and justification, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “to cause God to condemn … sinful deeds people have done, to cause God to justify” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
906	5:16	s82t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς κατάκριμα	1	Here, to indicates that was follows is the result of God’s judgment. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation (omitting the comma): “to the resulting condemnation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
907	5:16	m5k4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐκ πολλῶν παραπτωμάτων	1	Here, from many trespasses could indicate: (1) that the gracious gift happened after many trespasses. Alternate translation: “after many trespasses” (2) that the gracious gift happened because of many trespasses. Alternate translation: “because of many trespasses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
908	5:16	jarb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς δικαίωμα	1	Here, to indicates that was follows is the result of God’s gracious gift. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “to the resulting justification” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
909	5:17	n5zx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces a further explanation of the difference between the trespass and the gracious gift, as discussed in 5:15–16. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
910	5:17	mhtc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is true. He has concluded that the benefits of the gift are superior to the consequences of the trespass. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is true. Alternate translation: “considering that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
911	5:17	lcyd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῷ τοῦ ἑνὸς παραπτώματι	1	See how you translated this phrase in 5:15. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
912	5:17	whbf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοῦ ἑνὸς & τοῦ ἑνός & τοῦ ἑνὸς	1	See how you translated the first occurrence of one in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
913	5:17	yvq5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῷ τοῦ ἑνὸς παραπτώματι, ὁ θάνατος & τὴν περισσείαν τῆς χάριτος καὶ τῆς δωρεᾶς τῆς δικαιοσύνης & ἐν ζωῇ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “because the one man trespassed, the fact that people die … how abundantly kind God is and how he makes people righteous … by living” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
914	5:17	kz6z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὁ θάνατος ἐβασίλευσεν	1	See how you translated this phrase in 5:14. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
915	5:17	mtr9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὰ τοῦ ἑνός	1	Here, through indicates that the one is the reason why death ruled. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “because of the one” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
916	5:17	lf7t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	πολλῷ μᾶλλον	1	See how you translated this phrase in 5:10 and 5:15. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
917	5:17	hfvt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ἐν ζωῇ βασιλεύσουσιν, διὰ τοῦ ἑνὸς, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ.	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “through the one man Jesus Christ will … rule in life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
918	5:17	xy6h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἱ & ἐν ζωῇ βασιλεύσουσιν	1	Paul speaks of these people as if they were kings who rule in a location called life. This could mean: (1) they will have control over their sinful desires while physically alive. Alternate translation: “will those … have control over their sinfulness while alive” (2) they will rule with Jesus Christ while living eternally. Alternative translation: “will those … rule and live eternally” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
919	5:17	nr25		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	οἱ τὴν περισσείαν τῆς χάριτος καὶ τῆς δωρεᾶς τῆς δικαιοσύνης λαμβάνοντες	1	This clause describes the people who will rule in life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “those who receive the abundance of the grace and the gift of the righteousness as well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
920	5:17	fodc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	οἱ τὴν περισσείαν τῆς χάριτος & λαμβάνοντες	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe abundance that relates to grace. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “those who receive God’s abundant grace” or “those who experience how abundantly gracious God is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
921	5:17	o8c3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῆς δωρεᾶς τῆς δικαιοσύνης	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe how righteousness is a gift. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the gift, which is that of being made righteous,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
922	5:17	ehbk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὰ τοῦ ἑνὸς, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here, through indicates that the one, Jesus Christ is the reason why his people will rule in life. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “because of the one, Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
923	5:17	uifs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦ ἑνὸς, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	The phrase the one, Jesus Christ refers to what Jesus did for believers in order for them to rule in life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “what the one, Jesus Christ has done for them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
924	5:18	e7cq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἄρα οὖν ὡς δι’ ἑνὸς παραπτώματος, εἰς πάντας ἀνθρώπους εἰς κατάκριμα, οὕτως καὶ δι’ ἑνὸς δικαιώματος, εἰς πάντας ἀνθρώπους εἰς δικαίωσιν ζωῆς	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “So then, as one man trespassed and this trespass caused all men to become condemned, so also one man acted righteously and this act caused all men to become justified for living eternally” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
925	5:18	mccf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἄρα οὖν	1	So then indicates that what follows in 5:18–21 summarizes the ideas of 5:12–17. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a clearer expression. Alternate translation: “Finally” or “In summary” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
926	5:18	sfwg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	δι’ & δι’	1	See how you translated through in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
927	5:18	z0jq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	παραπτώματος & κατάκριμα & δικαίωσιν	1	See how you translated trespass, condemnation, and justification in 5:16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
928	5:18	n8pr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	πάντας ἀνθρώπους	-1	Although the term men is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. See how your translated all men in 5:12. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
929	5:18	bcm2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	δικαίωσιν ζωῆς	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe how justification relates to life. This could mean: (1) justification that leads to life. Alternate translation: “justification that brings eternal life” (2) justification that is life. Alternate translation: “justification, which is eternal life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
930	5:18	bmey		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ζωῆς	1	Here, life refers to “eternal life.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of eternal life” or “for living forever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
931	5:19	hj69		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that what follows explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
932	5:19	sjek		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὥσπερ & οὕτως καὶ	1	See how you translated the similar connective words just as and so also in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
933	5:19	rgji		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὰ & διὰ	1	See how you translated through in the previous two verses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
934	5:19	z8r8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς παρακοῆς τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου & τῆς ὑπακοῆς τοῦ ἑνὸς	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of disobedience and obedience, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. You may need to supply an object for the verbs, such as “God” or “God’s command.” Alternate translation: “the one man disobeying God … the one man obeying God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
935	5:19	qpsm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου	1	Here, the one man refers to “Adam.” See how you translated the similar use of one man in 5:12. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
936	5:19	q8lj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διὰ τῆς παρακοῆς τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου, ἁμαρτωλοὶ κατεστάθησαν οἱ πολλοί	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the disobedience of the one man caused the many to become sinners” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
937	5:19	huig		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	οἱ πολλοί	-1	See how you translated the many in 5:15. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
938	5:19	px2r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἁμαρτωλοὶ	1	See how you translated sinners in 5:8. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
939	5:19	bhra		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διὰ τῆς ὑπακοῆς τοῦ ἑνὸς, δίκαιοι κατασταθήσονται οἱ πολλοί	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the obedience of the one caused the many to become righteous ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
940	5:19	haks		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦ ἑνὸς	2	Here, the one refers to “Jesus Christ.” See how you translated the third occurrence of **the one ** in 5:17. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
941	5:20	lah6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	νόμος	1	See how you translated the law in 2:12. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
942	5:20	w958		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	παρεισῆλθεν	1	The word translated slipped in can refer to sneaking in unnoticed, as in Jude 1:4. Paul may be stressing how the coming of the law was like an unwelcome person secretly intruding at some location. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “intruded like a person sneaking in unnoticed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
943	5:20	ttcw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ παράπτωμα & ἡ ἁμαρτία & ἡ χάρις	1	See how you translated trespass in 5:15–18, sin in 5:12–13, and grace in 5:15 and 5:17. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
944	5:20	relk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πλεονάσῃ τὸ παράπτωμα & ἐπλεόνασεν ἡ ἁμαρτία, ὑπερεπερίσσευσεν ἡ χάρις	1	Paul speaks of the trespass, sin, and grace as if they were objects that could increase in amount. He means that the power or influence of these concepts expanded throughout humanity. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “the trespass might be more evident … sin became more evident, the grace became even more obvious” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
945	5:20	wbh3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα πλεονάσῃ τὸ παράπτωμα	1	This clause could refer to: (1) one of God’s purposes for giving the law. Alternate translation: “in order to increase the trespass” (2) the result of God giving the law. Alternate translation (with preceding comma): “resulting in the trespass increasing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
946	5:20	godn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὗ	1	Here Paul uses where to refer to sin and grace as if they were located somewhere. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “as” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
947	5:21	ycy7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	The phrase so that here introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God caused grace to abound, as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “for the purpose that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
948	5:21	ymxy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὥσπερ & οὕτως καὶ	1	See how you translated just as and so also in the 5:19. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
949	5:21	leu9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἁμαρτία ἐν τῷ θανάτῳ & ἡ χάρις & δικαιοσύνης & ζωὴν αἰώνιον	1	See how you translated sin and grace in the previous verse, death and righteousness in 5:17, and eternal life in 2:7. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
950	5:21	wmy8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐβασίλευσεν ἡ ἁμαρτία	1	Here Paul speaks of sin as if it were a king ruling over people. Paul means that everyone was controlled by their sinful desires. While death ruled in 5:14, sin ruled after God gave the law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everyone was controlled by sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
951	5:21	wuh2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ θανάτῳ	1	Here, in death could refer to: (1) the location in which sin ruled. Alternate translation: “in the place where death exists” (2) the means by which sin ruled. Alternate translation: “by means of death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
952	5:21	kc21		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	χάρις βασιλεύσῃ διὰ δικαιοσύνης	1	Here Paul speaks of grace as if it were a king ruling over people. Paul means that God’s grace allows people to become righteous. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “how gracious God is might make people become righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
953	5:21	bk72		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὰ & διὰ	1	See how you translated through in the 5:17–19. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
954	5:21	c9nj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον	1	Here, to indicates that was follows is the result of God’s grace ruling through righteousness. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “resulted in eternal life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
955	5:21	axr9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν	1	The phrase Jesus Christ our Lord refers to what Jesus did for believers in order for them to have eternal life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “what Jesus Christ our Lord has done for them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
956	6:intro	v522				0	Romans 6 General Notes Structure and Formatting Becoming like Christ in this life (6:1–8:39) Baptism represents union with Christ’s death (6:1–14) Christians are now slaves of righteousness (6:15–23) Special Concepts in this Chapter Slavery In this chapter Paul frequently uses the metaphor of the relationship between slaves and their masters. He speaks figuratively of people who live sinfully as if they were slaves to sin and the death it causes (6:6, 16–17, 20). He also speaks figuratively of Christians as if God has freed them from being enslaved to sin and has himself or righteousness as their master (6:18, 22). Because Christians are no longer controlled by their desire to sin, they should instead serve God and live in a way that glorifies him (6:12–14, 19). (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/servant]]) Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter Rhetorical Questions In 6:1–3, 15–16, and 21 Paul uses rhetorical questions in order to answer objections that people might make about what he is saying. Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter Inclusive language In this chapter the pronouns “we”, “us”, and “our” refer inclusively to all believers in Christ. Paul calls these people those who have been “baptized into Christ Jesus” in 6:3. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
957	6:1	fxgw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	τί οὖν	1	Here, then indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous chapter, especially what he said in 5:20. See how you translated What then in 3:1 and 4:1. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
958	6:1	pvg3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? ἐπιμένωμεν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, ἵνα ἡ χάρις πλεονάσῃ?	1	In this verse Paul is not asking for information, but is using a question to address rumors some people may have been spreading that misrepresent his teachings. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation or communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then we will say that we should continue in the sin so that the grace might increase!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
959	6:1	t8tl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? ἐπιμένωμεν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, ἵνα ἡ χάρις πλεονάσῃ?	1	In this verse and the first part of the next verse, Paul is speaking as if he were a Christian who misunderstood what Paul had taught in the previous chapter. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
960	6:1	fj9e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἐροῦμεν? ἐπιμένωμεν	1	Here, we includes all those of whom Paul spoke as those “who were baptized into Christ Jesus,” as mentioned in 6:3, so we is inclusive of all Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
961	6:1	ngpt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ & ἡ χάρις	1	See how you translated sin and grace in 5:21. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
962	6:1	sa16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπιμένωμεν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ	1	Paul speaks of sin as if it were a location. He is referring to the idea of people continuing to live sinfully after they have become Christians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “Should we continue to live sinfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
963	6:1	ju6f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἵνα ἡ χάρις πλεονάσῃ	1	Paul speaks here of grace as if it were an object that could increase in amount, as he also does in 5:20. He is referring to the idea of Christians experiencing the power or influence of grace in their lives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “so that we can experience more grace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
964	6:1	f5qt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα ἡ χάρις πλεονάσῃ	1	The phrase so that here introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the supposed purpose for which someone would sin. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order to increase the grace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
965	6:2	e82n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μὴ γένοιτο	1	In this verse Paul responds to the rhetorical questions he wrote in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘May it never be!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
966	6:2	pa6g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	μὴ γένοιτο	1	See how you translated this phrase in 3:4. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
967	6:2	wvhg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οἵτινες ἀπεθάνομεν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, πῶς ἔτι ζήσομεν ἐν αὐτῇ?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We who died to sin surely cannot still live in it!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
968	6:2	rgte		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἵτινες ἀπεθάνομεν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, πῶς ἔτι ζήσομεν ἐν αὐτῇ?	1	Paul speaks of sin as if it were a location where Christians could live or die. Here, died to sin refers to the idea that Christians are no longer controlled by their sinful desires. By contrast, live in sin means to continue being controlled by sinful desires. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “We who are no longer controlled by our desire to sin, how could we still live as though we are controlled by that desire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
969	6:3	wwaw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἢ ἀγνοεῖτε, ὅτι ὅσοι ἐβαπτίσθημεν εἰς Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν, εἰς τὸν θάνατον αὐτοῦ ἐβαπτίσθημεν?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You surely know that as many as were baptized into Christ Jesus were baptized into his death!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
970	6:3	wh26		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὅσοι	1	Paul is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “as many people as” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
971	6:3	yy94		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὅσοι ἐβαπτίσθημεν εἰς Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν, εἰς τὸν θάνατον αὐτοῦ ἐβαπτίσθημεν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as many people as someone baptized into Christ Jesus someone also baptized into his death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
972	6:3	bd11		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐβαπτίσθημεν εἰς Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν, εἰς τὸν θάνατον αὐτοῦ ἐβαπτίσθημεν	1	Paul speaks of Christ Jesus and his death as if they were locations into which someone could be baptized. Here, into Christ Jesus refers to being united with Christ Jesus, and into his death refers to sharing in the spiritual benefits of his death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of these two phrases plainly. Alternative translation: “were baptized are united with Christ Jesus and also share in the benefits of his death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
973	6:3	tcve		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸν θάνατον	1	See how you translated death in 5:21. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
974	6:4	m43r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	συνετάφημεν οὖν	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “We were buried, therefore” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
975	6:4	f4va		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	συνετάφημεν οὖν αὐτῷ	1	Paul speaks of Christians as if they were buried with Jesus when they were baptized. Paul mentions burial because it emphasizes that Jesus did indeed die. Here he means that Christians are indeed united with Christ’s death and share in its spiritual benefits. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “We are indeed united, then, with Christ’s death” or “We are so united, then, with Christ’s death that it is as if we were really buried with him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
976	6:4	vva7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ τοῦ βαπτίσματος εἰς τὸν θάνατον	1	Here, through indicates that the following phrase is the means by which Christians were buried with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of the baptism into his death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
977	6:4	kmn3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰς τὸν θάνατον	1	See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
978	6:4	y71v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸν θάνατον & τῆς δόξης & ζωῆς	1	See how you translated death in 6:3, glory in 5:2, and life in 5:21. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
979	6:4	k1el		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα ὥσπερ ἠγέρθη Χριστὸς ἐκ νεκρῶν διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός, οὕτως καὶ ἡμεῖς ἐν καινότητι ζωῆς περιπατήσωμεν	1	Here, so that indicates that what follows is a purpose clause. Paul is stating one purpose for which God instituted baptism. If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases to make this explicit. Alternate translation: “in order for us to walk in newness of life, just as Christ was raised from the dead by the glory of the Father” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
980	6:4	kado		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὥσπερ & οὕτως καὶ	1	See how you translated just as and so also in the 5:19. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
981	6:4	z6zk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile	ὥσπερ ἠγέρθη Χριστὸς ἐκ νεκρῶν διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός, οὕτως καὶ ἡμεῖς ἐν καινότητι ζωῆς περιπατήσωμεν	1	The point of this comparison is that the new way a Christian should live after being baptized is similar to being raised from the dead, as Christ was. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we should live in a new way, similar to when Christ was raised from death through the glory of the Father” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
982	6:4	dpy2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἠγέρθη Χριστὸς ἐκ νεκρῶν διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the glory of the Father raised Christ from dead ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
983	6:4	t47r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἠγέρθη Χριστὸς ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	See how you translated this phrase in 4:24. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
984	6:4	ce9z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	See how you translated this phrase in 4:24. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
985	6:4	gblc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe glory that comes from or characterizes the Father. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “through the glory from the Father” or “through the Father’s glory” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
986	6:4	y29w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῆς δόξης	1	Here, the glory refers specifically to God’s glorious power. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the glorious power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
987	6:4	r3hn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Πατρός	1	Father is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
988	6:4	gtns		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἡμεῖς & περιπατήσωμεν	1	Here Paul uses walk to refer to how a person lives and behaves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “we … might act” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
989	6:4	hyab		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐν καινότητι ζωῆς	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe life that is characterized by newness. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “with a new life” or “like those made newly alive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
990	6:5	msbq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “So then,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
991	6:5	jdzp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
992	6:5	p6xk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σύμφυτοι γεγόναμεν τῷ ὁμοιώματι τοῦ θανάτου αὐτοῦ	1	Here Paul speaks of death as if it were something with which Christians could be physically planted together. He means that by being baptized, Christians show that they participate in the spiritual benefits obtained by Christ’s death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “we participate in Christ’s death through baptism” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
993	6:5	z8wa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῷ ὁμοιώματι τοῦ θανάτου αὐτοῦ & τῆς ἀναστάσεως	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas of likeness and resurrection, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in what is like his death … his resurrecting from the dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
994	6:5	hg5y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῷ ὁμοιώματι τοῦ θανάτου αὐτοῦ	1	Here Paul implies that likeness of his death refers to the “baptism” referred to in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the likeness of his death that is represented by baptism” or “in baptism, which represents dying with him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
995	6:5	kfvs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀλλὰ καὶ τῆς ἀναστάσεως ἐσόμεθα	1	Here Paul speaks of resurrection as if it were something of which Christians could become part. He means that Christians will one day rise from the dead like Christ did. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “we will also certainly be resurrected like Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
996	6:6	fhvh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ παλαιὸς ἡμῶν ἄνθρωπος συνεσταυρώθη	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God crucified our old man together with him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
997	6:6	lu12		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὁ παλαιὸς ἡμῶν ἄνθρωπος συνεσταυρώθη	1	Paul speaks of our sinful human nature as if it were an old man who was nailed to the same cross as Christ. Paul means that when Christ was crucified, he destroyed the power of sin and death that controlled all humans. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “God destroyed the power of sin that controlled people when Christ was crucified” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
998	6:6	y0ib		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	συνεσταυρώθη	1	The pronoun him refers to Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “was crucified with Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
999	6:6	n6o6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	Here, in order that introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God crucified our old man. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “so that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1000	6:6	jpge		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καταργηθῇ τὸ σῶμα τῆς ἁμαρτίας	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God might nullify the body of sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1001	6:6	jw00		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καταργηθῇ τὸ σῶμα τῆς ἁμαρτίας	1	Paul speaks of the body of sin as if it were a condition of slavery that could be cancelled. He means that Christ’s crucifixion removed the ability of sinful desires to control people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “God might completely end how living sinfully controls people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1002	6:6	l6pd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ σῶμα τῆς ἁμαρτίας	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe how the body is related to sin. Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Here, the body of sin could refer to: (1) how humans tend to sin. Alternate translation: “our human tendency to sin” or “how living sinfully controls us” (2) how sin controls the human body. Alternate translation: “how sin controls our bodies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1003	6:6	l3zm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτίας & ἁμαρτίᾳ	1	See how you translated sin in 6:1. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1004	6:6	c5ie		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	τοῦ μηκέτι δουλεύειν	1	Here, for could indicate: (1) God’s purpose for nullifying the body of sin. Alternate translation: “in order for it to no longer enslave” (2) the result of the body of sin being nullified. Alternate translation: “causing it to no longer enslave” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1005	6:6	rpax		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῦ μηκέτι δουλεύειν ἡμᾶς τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ	1	Paul speaks of the body of sin as if it could enslave people. Here he means that the desire to sin that controls people would no longer do so. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “for it to no longer make us live sinfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1006	6:7	f893		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ & ἀποθανὼν	1	Here Paul implies that the one having died is the same “old man” whom Paul said “was crucified” with Christ in the previous verse. Paul means that God considers any person who has “died to sin” (6:2) to be freed from living sinfully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the one who has died to sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1007	6:7	qvgd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	δεδικαίωται ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας	1	Paul continues the metaphor of sin enslaving people from the previous verse. Here Paul speaks of sin as if it were something that people need to be freed from. He means that the desire to sin that controls people would no longer do so. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “no longer has to live sinfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1008	6:7	hoqm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δεδικαίωται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God has freed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1009	6:7	geua		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτίας	1	See how you translated sin in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1010	6:8	mbx9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	In this verse, Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is true. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is true. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
1011	6:8	wwhf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀπεθάνομεν σὺν Χριστῷ	1	Paul speaks of Christians as if they physically died with Christ. He means that through baptism Christians show that they participate in the spiritual benefits obtained by Christ’s death and will one day live together with him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “we are united to Christ’s death when baptized” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1012	6:8	c724		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πιστεύομεν	1	Paul implies that since Christians have died with Christ, the result is that they have confidence that they will live together with him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “we are confident” or “this persuades us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1013	6:8	nuc1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ συνζήσομεν αὐτῷ	1	Here Paul implies that live together with him refers to “eternal life”, as he mentioned in 5:21 and 6:4–5. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “we will also live forever with him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1014	6:9	bebx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	εἰδότες ὅτι Χριστὸς ἐγερθεὶς ἐκ νεκρῶν, οὐκέτι ἀποθνῄσκει	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “knowing that Christ no longer dies, having been raised from dead ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1015	6:9	zdkc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	εἰδότες ὅτι	1	See how you translated the similar phrase in 6:6. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1016	6:9	gjqq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	Χριστὸς ἐγερθεὶς ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God raised Christ from dead ones, Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1017	6:9	zkq2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐγερθεὶς ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	See how you translated the similar clause in 6:4. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1018	6:9	lvv8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	οὐκέτι ἀποθνῄσκει; θάνατος αὐτοῦ οὐκέτι κυριεύει	1	These two phrases mean similar things. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that Christ can never die again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “will absolutely never die again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1019	6:9	wem1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	θάνατος αὐτοῦ οὐκέτι κυριεύει	1	Here Paul speaks of death as if it were a lord who could rule over someone. Paul means that Jesus could not possibly die again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he no longer submits to being dead” or “he can never die again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1020	6:9	kl3e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	θάνατος	1	See how you translated death in 6:4. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1021	6:10	ehi9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows is the reason why Christ “no longer dies,” as stated in the previous verse. Use the most natural way in your language for indicating a reason, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1022	6:10	e290		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὃ	1	Here, that which refers to Christ’s death and life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the death which” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1023	6:10	aw31		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ ἀπέθανεν	1	Here, to sin implies that Christ died for the sake of freeing humanity from being “enslaved to sin.” It does not mean that Jesus himself was ever controlled by sin before he died. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternative translation: “he died for the sake of removing sin’s control over people” or “he died to stop sin from controlling people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1024	6:10	j7bl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὃ δὲ ζῇ	1	Here, what he lives refers to Christ’s life after God raised him from the dead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “But the life which” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1025	6:10	z4yb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ζῇ τῷ Θεῷ	1	Here, to God implies that Christ now lives for the sake of glorifying God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternative translation: “he lives for the sake of glorifying God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1026	6:11	zjjv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ὑμεῖς	1	Throughout 6:11–23, the pronouns you and “your” are plural and refer to the believers in Rome to whom Paul wrote this letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you believers at Rome” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
1027	6:11	dw6l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἶναι νεκροὺς μὲν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ	1	See how you translated “died to sin” in 6:2. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1028	6:11	bjxg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ζῶντας & τῷ Θεῷ	1	See how you translated the similar phrase “he lives to God” in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1029	6:11	nkvd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	See how you translated this phrase in 3:24. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1030	6:12	pp2t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Therefore here introduces a result clause. Paul is stating how he wants his readers to act in response to what he said in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a result clause. Alternate translation: “This is why” or “Because of this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1031	6:12	s6h1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	μὴ & βασιλευέτω ἡ ἁμαρτία ἐν τῷ θνητῷ ὑμῶν σώματι	1	Here Paul speaks of sin as if it were a king who rules over a place called mortal body. By do not let sin rule, Paul means that Christians should not allow sin to control the way they use their bodies. See how you translated a similar use of rule in 5:21. Alternate translation: “do not let your physical body become controlled by sinning” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1032	6:12	z1ia		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	ἐν τῷ θνητῷ ὑμῶν σώματι,	1	Although body here is a singular noun, Paul is referring to the bodies of his readers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a plural form. Alternate translation: “in your mortal bodies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
1033	6:12	cm8d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐν τῷ θνητῷ ὑμῶν σώματι	1	Here, body could refer to: (1) the whole person. Alternative translation: “in you” or “in your whole being” (2) the physical human body. Alternative translation: “in your physical body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1034	6:12	r462		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς τὸ ὑπακούειν ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις αὐτοῦ	1	Here to indicates that what follows is the result of letting sin rule. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “causing you to obey its lusts” or “resulting in you obeying your lusts”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1035	6:12	yg9l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	εἰς τὸ ὑπακούειν ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις αὐτοῦ	1	Here Paul speaks of lusts as if they were people who could be obeyed. He means that people can submit to their desires to do sinful things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to submit to your lustful desires” or “to do what you lust for” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1036	6:12	zs9g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of lusts, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how it urges you to lust” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1037	6:12	kh3w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ	1	The pronoun its refers to mortal body. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “your mortal body’s” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1038	6:13	wt07		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	μηδὲ παριστάνετε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, ὅπλα ἀδικίας τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, ἀλλὰ παραστήσατε ἑαυτοὺς τῷ Θεῷ, ὡσεὶ ἐκ νεκρῶν ζῶντας, καὶ τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, ὅπλα δικαιοσύνης τῷ Θεῷ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses in order to emphasize the similar ideas. Alternate translation: “And do not keep presenting your members as tools of unrighteousness to sin, but present your members as tools of righteousness to God. And present yourselves to God, as living from dead ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1039	6:13	mxto		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μηδὲ παριστάνετε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, ὅπλα ἀδικίας τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ & καὶ τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, ὅπλα δικαιοσύνης τῷ Θεῷ	1	Paul speaks of body parts as if they were tools that could be offered to someone or used by someone. He means that he wants his readers to stop using their body parts for sinning, but instead to use them to live in the way God wants. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “And do not keep using your members to act unrighteously by sinning … and use your members to act righteously for God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1040	6:13	qncn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ὅπλα ἀδικίας	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe tools that are characterized by unrighteousness. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “as unrighteous tools” or “as tools for living unrighteously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1041	6:13	hlzf			ὅπλα & ὅπλα	1	The word translated as tools often refers to “weapons.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as weapons … as weapons”
1042	6:13	dq4n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀδικίας & δικαιοσύνης	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of unrighteousness and righteousness, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “of what is unrighteous … of what is righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1043	6:13	wq3m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	παραστήσατε ἑαυτοὺς τῷ Θεῷ	1	Paul speaks of his readers as if they could offer themselves as slaves to their master, who is God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “give yourselves to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1044	6:13	px9k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile	ὡσεὶ ἐκ νεκρῶν ζῶντας	1	The point of this comparison is that Christians should live in such a way that demonstrates that they are now dead to sin, but alive to God, as mentioned in 6:11. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “as those who are free from living sinfully” or “as those who are no longer controlled by living sinfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
1045	6:13	vk76		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	See how you translated this phrase in 6:4. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1046	6:13	amyo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	καὶ τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν	1	Paul is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this from the beginning of this sentence. Alternate translation: “and present your members” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1047	6:13	dz8u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ὅπλα δικαιοσύνης	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe tools that are characterized by righteousness. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “as righteous tools” or “as tools for living righteously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1048	6:14	xfz1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces an explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1049	6:14	u36f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἁμαρτία & ὑμῶν οὐ κυριεύσει, οὐ γάρ ἐστε ὑπὸ νόμον, ἀλλὰ ὑπὸ χάριν	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “because you are not under law, but under grace, do not allow sin to rule over you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1050	6:14	gez3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἁμαρτία & ὑμῶν οὐ κυριεύσει	1	See how you translated the similar phrase in 6:12. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1051	6:14	bl09		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative	ἁμαρτία & οὐ κυριεύσει	1	Paul is using a future statement to give a command. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for a command. Alternate translation: “sin must not rule over” or “do not allow sin to rule over” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
1052	6:14	caqv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1	Here, for indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul urges his readers to not allow sin to lord over them. Use the most natural form in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1053	6:14	a0dz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	οὐ γάρ ἐστε ὑπὸ νόμον, ἀλλὰ ὑπὸ χάριν	1	Paul speaks of law and grace as if they were rulers under whose authority people have to live. He means that Christians are no longer controlled by the requirements of the law, which resulted in people sinning more, as stated in 5:20. By contrast, Christians now serve the gracious God, as is explained in 6:15–23. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “for the law no longer controls you, but you are now controlled by God’s grace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1054	6:14	eibi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	νόμον	1	See how you translated law in 2:12. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
1055	6:14	ypqx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὑπὸ χάριν	1	Here, grace refers specifically to God’s gracious empowering of people to stop sinning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternative translation: “controlled by God’s grace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1056	6:15	yk81		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	τί οὖν	1	Here, then indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in 6:1–14. See how you translated What then in 3:1, 4:1, and 6:1. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1057	6:15	zxb8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί οὖν? ἁμαρτήσωμεν ὅτι οὐκ ἐσμὲν ὑπὸ νόμον, ἀλλὰ ὑπὸ χάριν?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using a question form here to address an objection that some people may have to what he said in the previous verses. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation or communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then we should sin because we are not under law, but under grace!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1058	6:15	rtts		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	τί οὖν? ἁμαρτήσωμεν ὅτι οὐκ ἐσμὲν ὑπὸ νόμον, ἀλλὰ ὑπὸ χάριν?	1	In these two sentences, Paul is speaking as if he were a Christian who misunderstood what Paul had taught in the previous verses. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1059	6:15	t4cc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὑπὸ νόμον & ὑπὸ χάριν	1	See how you translated these phrases in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1060	6:15	t52x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μὴ γένοιτο	1	In this sentence Paul begins to respond to the rhetorical questions he posed earlier in the verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘May it never be!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1061	6:15	c77g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	μὴ γένοιτο	1	See how you translated this phrase in 3:4 and 6:2. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
1062	6:16	n5j4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὐκ οἴδατε, ὅτι ᾧ παριστάνετε ἑαυτοὺς δούλους εἰς ὑπακοήν, δοῦλοί ἐστε ᾧ ὑπακούετε—ἤτοι ἁμαρτίας εἰς θάνατον, ἢ ὑπακοῆς εἰς δικαιοσύνην?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You surely know that to what you keep presenting yourselves as slaves for obedience, you become slaves to what you obey—whether of sin leading to death, or of obedience leading to righteousness!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1063	6:16	hn6y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ᾧ & ᾧ	1	The pronoun translated what here indicates a general reference to a thing or person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to whomever or whatever … to whomever or whatever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1064	6:16	g6zz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	παριστάνετε ἑαυτοὺς δούλους & δοῦλοί ἐστε ᾧ ὑπακούετε	1	Paul speaks of people as if they could offer themselves as slaves to someone or something. He is referring to being controlled by someone or something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “you keep being controlled by … you become controlled by what you obey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1065	6:16	psrr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς ὑπακοήν	1	Here, for indicates that this is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which these people are presenting themselves as slaves. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order to obey” or “for the purpose of obeying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1066	6:16	zim4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς ὑπακοήν & ὑπακοῆς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of obedience, you could express the same idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “to obey … to obey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1067	6:16	h0ar		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἤτοι ἁμαρτίας εἰς θάνατον, ἢ ὑπακοῆς εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1	Here, sin and obedience are spoken of as if they were masters that slaves would obey. Paul means that people can be controlled either by their desire to sin or a desire to obey God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this plainly. Alternate translation: “whether you are controlled by sinning, leading to death, or you are controlled by obeying God, leading to righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1068	6:16	gtzd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἁμαρτίας & ὑπακοῆς	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe slaves that belong to sin or obedience. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “slaves that belong to sin … slaves that belong to obedience” or “sin’s slaves … obedience’s slaves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1069	6:16	cyct		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτίας & δικαιοσύνην	1	See how you translated sin in 6:1 and righteousness in 6:13. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1070	6:16	zfgc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς θάνατον & εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1	Here, leading to indicates result. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “resulting in death … resulting to righteousness” or “causing death … causing righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1071	6:16	d8gv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰς θάνατον	1	Here, death refers to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “leading to spiritual death” or “causing one to die spiritually” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1072	6:17	xj75		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	χάρις & τῷ Θεῷ	1	Here, thanks be to God is an exclamatory phrase that communicates Paul’s thankfulness. Use an exclamation form that is natural in your language for communicating thanks. Alternate translation: “I give thanks to God!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
1073	6:17	tl5d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ὅτι ἦτε δοῦλοι τῆς ἁμαρτίας	1	Here, that indicates that the clause that follows provides a contrast between who Paul’s readers were before they became Christians and who they were after they had listened from the heart to true Christian teaching. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “even though you were slaves of sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
1074	6:17	yxt7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	δοῦλοι τῆς ἁμαρτίας	1	See how you translated the similar phrase of sin in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1075	6:17	uwcy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὑπηκούσατε δὲ ἐκ καρδίας, εἰς & τύπον διδαχῆς	1	Here Paul speaks of the pattern of teaching as if it were a person who could be listened to. He means that his readers accepted the true Christian teaching that Christians were teaching them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “but you accepted the form of teaching” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1076	6:17	ep7k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὑπηκούσατε	1	The word translated listened implies that the people who listened also responded by obeying what they heard. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you clung” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1077	6:17	my2z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὑπηκούσατε & ἐκ καρδίας	1	Here, from the heart is an idiom that refers to being sincere or doing something with one’s will and emotions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you totally listened” or “you listened from deep within” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1078	6:17	lugj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	εἰς ὃν παρεδόθητε τύπον διδαχῆς	1	Here Paul speaks of the pattern of teaching as if it were a slave-master to which people are given over to as slaves when they become Christians. Paul means that Christians should submit to the authority of true Christian teaching. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the pattern of teaching that you were submitted to” or “to the pattern of teaching that you were handed over to, as if you were its slave” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1079	6:17	pz14		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὃν παρεδόθητε	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that God gave you over to” or (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1080	6:18	fcd1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐλευθερωθέντες δὲ ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, ἐδουλώθητε τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ	1	Here Paul speaks of sin and righteousness as if they were slave-masters that people could be enslaved to. Paul means that his readers are no longer controlled by their sinful desires, but are controlled by the desire to live righteously. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “And having been freed from having to live sinfully, you now have to live righteously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1081	6:18	y2zg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐλευθερωθέντες δὲ ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, ἐδουλώθητε	1	If your language does not use passive forms in this way, you could express these ideas in active forms or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “And God having freed you from sin, he enslaved you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1082	6:18	twpq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτίας & δικαιοσύνῃ	1	See how you translated sin and righteousness in 6:16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1083	6:19	jlmd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἀνθρώπινον λέγω, διὰ τὴν ἀσθένειαν τῆς σαρκὸς ὑμῶν	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because of the weakness of your flesh, I speak as a man” or “Because you are still immature, I have to speak in simple terms” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1084	6:19	puvh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀνθρώπινον λέγω	1	Here, as a man is an idiom meaning “the way people do” or “like a human being.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I am speaking based on how human beings perceive things” or “I am talking like a mere human being” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1085	6:19	gt1n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἀσθένειαν τῆς σαρκὸς ὑμῶν & τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, καὶ τῇ ἀνομίᾳ εἰς τὴν ἀνομίαν & τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ εἰς ἁγιασμόν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of weakness, uncleanness, lawlessness, righteousness, and sanctification, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how weak your flesh is … to act impurely and to be more and more lawless … for living righteously, which leads to being sanctified” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1086	6:19	l4ah		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τὴν ἀσθένειαν τῆς σαρκὸς ὑμῶν	1	Here, flesh is an idiom that refers to human nature. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “your human weakness” or “your natural limitations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1087	6:19	psmw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces an explanation of what Paul said in 6:17–18. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Moreover,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1088	6:19	x2kt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὥσπερ & οὕτως	1	See how you translated just as and so in the 5:19. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1089	6:19	jbcz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	παρεστήσατε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν δοῦλα τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, καὶ τῇ ἀνομίᾳ εἰς τὴν ἀνομίαν & παραστήσατε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, δοῦλα τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ	1	Paul speaks of body parts as if they were slaves that could be offered to someone or used by someone. He means that his readers used to use their body parts to act impurely and to disobey God’s laws, but now they should use them to live in the way God wants. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated similar phrases in 6:13. Alternative translation: “you used your members to act uncleanly and to disobey God more and more … use your members to act righteously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1090	6:19	o0ta		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς ἁγιασμόν	1	The phrase leading to indicates result. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “resulting in sanctification” or “causing sanctification” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1091	6:20	s9pk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For here introduces a result clause. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “This reason for this is that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1092	6:20	i1ze		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὅτε & δοῦλοι ἦτε τῆς ἁμαρτίας, ἐλεύθεροι ἦτε τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ	1	Here, Paul speaks of sin and righteousness as if they were slave-masters. Paul means that when his readers had previously used their bodies to act sinfully, they were not serving God’s purposes as slaves of righteousness. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when you were controlled by sin, you did not serve God” or “when you were living sinfully, you did not live righteously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1093	6:20	mu0y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony	ἐλεύθεροι ἦτε τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ	1	Paul is not making a serious suggestion here that sinful people are not required to live righteously. Paul means to communicate the opposite of the literal meaning of free. If this would be misunderstood in your language, consider expressing the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you were unrighteous” or “you were unable to live righteously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
1094	6:21	x3bn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	τίνα & καρπὸν εἴχετε τότε, ἐφ’ οἷς νῦν ἐπαισχύνεσθε? τὸ γὰρ τέλος ἐκείνων θάνατος	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these sentences since the second sentence gives the reason for the result that the first sentence describes. Alternate translation: “since the outcome of those things is death, what fruit were you then having because of which things you are now ashamed?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1095	6:21	kjl5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίνα οὖν καρπὸν εἴχετε τότε, ἐφ’ οἷς νῦν ἐπαισχύνεσθε	1	Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the futility of being “slaves to sin” in the previous verse. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation in order to communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “So you were not then having any fruit because of which things you are now ashamed!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1096	6:21	vgam		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	καρπὸν	1	Here, fruit is an idiom that refers to a benefit or advantage. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “advantage” or “profit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1097	6:21	pnbm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐφ’ οἷς & ἐκείνων	1	Here, which things and those things refer to sins. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of which sins … of those sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1098	6:21	j2ie		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ γὰρ τέλος ἐκείνων θάνατος	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of outcome and death, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “For those things finally result in you dying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1099	6:21	tj21		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	θάνατος	1	Here, death refers to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. See how you translated the same use of death in 6:16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1100	6:22	x8vw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	νυνὶ δέ	1	But now introduces a contrast with the previous two verses, a contrast that focuses on time. The word translated now refers to the time after the Roman believers became Christians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify what now refers to. Alternate translation: “But now that you believe in Jesus,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
1101	6:22	cqlf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐλευθερωθέντες ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, δουλωθέντες δὲ τῷ Θεῷ	1	This clause indicates the reason why Paul’s readers have fruit leading to sanctification. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “because you have been freed from sin and have been enslaved to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1102	6:22	fmtc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐλευθερωθέντες ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, δουλωθέντες δὲ τῷ Θεῷ	1	Here Paul speaks of sin and God as if they were slave-masters. Paul means that Christians are no longer controlled by their desire to sin, but are supposed to obey God instead. See a similar phrase in 6:18. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having been freed from having to live sinfully and having begun to serve God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1103	6:22	z3ap		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐλευθερωθέντες ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, δουλωθέντες δὲ τῷ Θεῷ	1	If your language does not use passive forms in this way, you could express these ideas in active forms or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God having freed you from sin and having enslaved you to himself” or “God having released you from being controlled by your sin and having caused you to serve him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1104	6:22	npf3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἔχετε τὸν καρπὸν ὑμῶν	1	See how you translated fruit in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1105	6:22	a478		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς ἁγιασμόν, τὸ & τέλος ζωὴν αἰώνιον	1	See how you translated sanctification in 6:19, outcome in 6:21, and eternal life in 5:21. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1106	6:22	lvhh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς ἁγιασμόν	1	See how you translated this phrase in 6:19. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1107	6:23	gacy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that this verse gives the reason for what Paul said in the previous two verses. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is true because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1108	6:23	ze3f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	τὰ & ὀψώνια τῆς ἁμαρτίας θάνατος	1	Here, Paul speaks of sin as if it were a person who could pay wages. Paul means that the result of living sinfully is eternal death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when a person lives sinfully, it results in eternal death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1109	6:23	juc4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὰ & ὀψώνια τῆς ἁμαρτίας θάνατος	1	Paul speaks of death as if it were wages paid to those who sin. He means that the result of living sinfully is eternal death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternative translation: “whoever lives sinfully receives eternal death as the result” or “whoever lives sinfully earns eternal death as if it were wages for work” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1110	6:23	iyv3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὰ & ὀψώνια τῆς ἁμαρτίας	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the wages that come from sin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “sin’s wages” or “the wages that come from sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1111	6:23	pizh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	θάνατος	1	Here, death refers to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. See how you translated the same use of death in 6:16 and 6:21. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1112	6:23	slyb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	θάνατος; τὸ & χάρισμα & ζωὴ αἰώνιος	1	See how you translated death in 6:21, gracious gift in 5:15–16, and eternal life in 6:22. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1113	6:23	cwkw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ & χάρισμα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the gracious gift that comes from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “God’s gracious gift” or “the gracious gift from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1114	6:23	jn66		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	Paul speaks of eternal life as if it were occupying space inside of Christ Jesus. Paul means that eternal life comes by being united to Christ Jesus, as stated in 6:11. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “for those who are united to Christ Jesus” or “comes through being united to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1115	7:intro	fl1y				0	Romans 7 General Notes Structure and Formatting Becoming like Christ in this life (6:1–8:39) Baptism represents union with Christ’s death (6:1–14) Christians are now slaves of righteousness (6:15–23) Christians have been freed from the law (7:1–6) The law is not sinful (7:7–12) Christians still struggle with indwelling sin (7:13–25) Special Concepts in this Chapter “The Law” Throughout most of this chapter Paul uses the singular noun “the law” to refer to the group of laws that God gave Israel through Moses. However, in 7:21–25 Paul uses the word “law” in several different ways. Each of these different uses will be addressed in the notes. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]]) Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter Marriage Scripture commonly uses marriage as a metaphor. Here Paul uses it to describe how the church relates to the law of Moses and now to Christ. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter Inclusive language In this chapter the pronouns “we”, “us”, and “our” refer inclusively to all Jewish believers in Christ. Paul calls these people “brothers” in 7:1 and 7:4. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1116	7:1	mk7w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἢ ἀγνοεῖτε, ἀδελφοί (γινώσκουσιν γὰρ νόμον λαλῶ), ὅτι ὁ νόμος κυριεύει τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐφ’ ὅσον χρόνον ζῇ?	1	Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that the Jew is required to obey the law of Moses his whole life. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You surely know, brothers (for I am speaking to those who know the law), that the law is lord of the man for as long as he lives!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1117	7:1	guk4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	Although the term brothers is masculine, Paul is using the word here to refer to both male and female Jewish believers in Christ. Alternate translation: “my fellow Jewish Christians” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1118	7:1	s4su			(γινώσκουσιν γὰρ νόμον λαλῶ)	1	Here Paul interrupts himself in order to clarify that he is specifically directing this part of the letter to the Jewish believers in the church at Rome. If this would be confusing in your language, you could add parentheses, as done in the ULT, or use a natural way in your language to indicate this.
1119	7:1	j67x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, for indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it explains the reason why Paul expects these brothers to understand what he is saying. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “I know you should understand this because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1120	7:1	ajk4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	λαλῶ	1	The pronoun I here and throughout this chapter refers to Paul (see 6:19). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, am speaking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1121	7:1	k3h5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	νόμον & ὁ νόμος	1	For every occurrence of the law in 7:1–20, translate the phrase in the same way you translated it in 2:12. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
1122	7:1	okz5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὁ νόμος κυριεύει τοῦ ἀνθρώπου	1	Here Paul speaks of the law as if it were a king. Paul means that, like a king, the law must be obeyed by those who are obligated to do so. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or with a simile. Alternate translation: “like a king, the law must be obeyed by every Jewish person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1123	7:1	r9fl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τοῦ ἀνθρώπου & ζῇ	1	Although the man and he are masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “of a person … that person lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1124	7:2	as1h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces an explanation of an example from God’s law that illustrates how “the law rules over the man for as long as he lives,” as Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “For example,” or “As an illustration,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1125	7:2	j4sn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	ἡ & ὕπανδρος γυνὴ τῷ ζῶντι ἀνδρὶ δέδεται νόμῳ; ἐὰν δὲ ἀποθάνῃ ὁ ἀνήρ, κατήργηται & τοῦ ἀνδρός	1	Paul is speaking of Jewish married women and husbands in general, not of one particular woman or husband. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “married women remain bound by law to their living husbands, but if their husbands die, they have been released … of their husbands” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
1126	7:2	hpn4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἡ & ὕπανδρος γυνὴ & δέδεται νόμῳ & κατήργηται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the law continually binds the married woman … God releases her” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1127	7:2	l6d9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἡ & ὕπανδρος γυνὴ τῷ ζῶντι ἀνδρὶ δέδεται νόμῳ & κατήργηται ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου τοῦ ἀνδρός	1	Here Paul speaks of the law as if it were a person who could tie a woman to her husband. Paul means that the law of Moses requires a married woman to stay married to her husband only while he is alive. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God requires in his law that the married woman remain married to her living husband … she is no longer required to remain married to the husband” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1128	7:2	ag23		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τοῦ νόμου τοῦ ἀνδρός	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the law that is related to the husband. This phrase refers to the law already described in the previous clause. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the law that requires her to remain bound to the husband” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1129	7:3	w3yw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἄρα οὖν	1	See how you translated this phrase in 5:18. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1130	7:3	ss60		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ζῶντος τοῦ ἀνδρὸς, μοιχαλὶς χρηματίσει, ἐὰν γένηται ἀνδρὶ ἑτέρῳ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “if she becomes married to another husband, the first husband being alive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1131	7:3	jbvc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	ζῶντος τοῦ ἀνδρὸς	1	In this clause Paul is describing something that was occurring during the same time period as what he describes in the next clause. You can make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “at the same time that the husband is alive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
1132	7:3	ci5r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	τοῦ ἀνδρὸς & ὁ ἀνήρ	1	See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
1133	7:3	r2m4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μοιχαλὶς χρηματίσει	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the law will title her an adulteress” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1134	7:3	wg4k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐλευθέρα ἐστὶν ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου	1	Here Paul speaks of the law as if it were an object or person someone could be freed from. Paul means that the law that prohibited a woman from marrying another husband did not apply if her first husband died. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated the similar phrase “she has been released from the law” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “she is no longer required to remain married to the first husband” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1135	7:4	kvqw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε	1	So then here introduces the result of what Paul said in 7:1–3. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a result clause. Alternate translation: “Since this is true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1136	7:4	ne64		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	See how you translated this word in 7:1. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1137	7:4	z8zj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐθανατώθητε τῷ νόμῳ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you also died to the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1138	7:4	svrq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐθανατώθητε	1	Paul uses the word yourselves to emphasize that even Jewish Christians are not required to obey the law of Moses. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “you very Jews yourselves were also made dead” or “even you Jews yourselves were also made dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
1139	7:4	vpwf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐθανατώθητε τῷ νόμῳ	1	Here Paul uses made dead to refer to Jewish Christians not being required to obey the law of Moses. Just as dead people don’t have to obey the law, so too, Jewish Christians no longer have to obey it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “your yourselves no longer have to obey the law” or “you yourselves are like dead people in that you do not have to obey the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1140	7:4	v2tu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ τοῦ σώματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here, through indicates that the body of Christ is the means by which believers were made dead to the law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of the body of Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1141	7:4	glzf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	διὰ τοῦ σώματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here, the body of Christ refers to the death of Jesus’ body. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “through the death of Christ’s body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1142	7:4	xw6f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς τὸ γενέσθαι ὑμᾶς ἑτέρῳ	1	Here, so that introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God made believers dead to the law. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order for us to become married to another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1143	7:4	g59t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰς τὸ γενέσθαι ὑμᾶς ἑτέρῳ	1	Here Paul uses married to another to refer to Christians being united with Christ as if they became married to him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “so that you might become united to Jesus” or “so that you might be united with Christ like a woman becomes married to another husband”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1144	7:4	rj6u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τῷ ἐκ νεκρῶν ἐγερθέντι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to the one whom God raised from dead ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1145	7:4	t9nt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τῷ ἐκ νεκρῶν ἐγερθέντι	1	See how you translated a similar phrase in 4:24. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1146	7:4	gxjj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα καρποφορήσωμεν τῷ Θεῷ	1	Here, in order that introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God raised Jesus from dead ones. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order for us to produce fruit for God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1147	7:4	c4rl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καρποφορήσωμεν τῷ Θεῷ	1	Paul uses fruit here to refer to actions that please God as if they were fruit that a person could grow. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we might be able to do things pleasing to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1148	7:4	ka0o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	καρποφορήσωμεν	1	Here, we includes all those whom Paul called brothers earlier in this verse and in 7:1, so we is inclusive of all Jewish Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1149	7:5	i1zl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows in the next two verses explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1150	7:5	gmb9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἦμεν ἐν τῇ σαρκί	1	Here Paul speaks of the flesh as if it were a location that someone could be in. He means his readers used to live according to the desires of their sinful natures. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we were living according to our sinful natures” or “we were doing whatever we wanted to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1151	7:5	bl7i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὰ παθήματα τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν τὰ διὰ τοῦ νόμου ἐνηργεῖτο	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of passions, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the desire to sin that was through the law was working” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1152	7:5	g2rg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	τὰ διὰ τοῦ νόμου ἐνηργεῖτο	1	Paul is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the word from the context. Paul said something similar about the law causing sin to increase in 5:20. Alternate translation: “that were increased through the law were working” or “that were stimulated by the law were working” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1153	7:5	vlev		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ τοῦ νόμου	1	Here, through indicates the means by which the sinful passions increased. Paul means that the law stimulated people’s desire to sin even more. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1154	7:5	tvku		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐνηργεῖτο ἐν τοῖς μέλεσιν ἡμῶν	1	Here Paul speaks of the sinful passions are if they were people who could work within someone’s body parts. He means that people’s sinful desires caused them to sin with their bodies. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “were causing us to use our members to sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1155	7:5	denv			τοῖς μέλεσιν	1	See how you translated members in 6:13.
1156	7:5	pnw6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς τὸ καρποφορῆσαι	1	Here, to introduces a result clause. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “which resulted in producing fruit” or “so that they would produce fruit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1157	7:5	xed9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰς τὸ καρποφορῆσαι τῷ θανάτῳ	1	Here Paul uses fruit to refer to the result or outcome of someone’s actions. Paul is using fruit differently than how he used it in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “so that the outcome was fruit for death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1158	7:5	m071		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῷ θανάτῳ	1	See how you translated death in 6:16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1159	7:5	ub7z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῷ θανάτῳ	1	Here, death refers to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. See how you translated the same use of death in 6:16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1160	7:6	mze7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	νυνὶ δὲ	1	See how you translated this phrase in 6:22. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
1161	7:6	l8w4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κατηργήθημεν ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου & ἐν ᾧ κατειχόμεθα	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has released us from the law … to that which was holding us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1162	7:6	j6i3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	κατηργήθημεν ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου & ἐν ᾧ κατειχόμεθα	1	Here Paul speaks of the law as if it were a slave-master from which someone must be released and who can hold people captive. Paul means that Christians do not have to obey the laws God gave the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “we no longer have to obey the law … to that which we used to be required to obey” or “we are like slaves who have been released from the law … to that which we used to have to obey like slaves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1163	7:6	l2l3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν ᾧ κατειχόμεθα	1	The phrase that by which we were being held refers to the law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the law by which we were being held” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1164	7:6	vcok		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀποθανόντες ἐν ᾧ κατειχόμεθα	1	Paul speaks of the law as if it were a location where Christians could die. Here, died to the law refers to the idea that Christians no longer have to obey the requirements of the laws God gave the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “no longer being required to obey that by which we were being held” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1165	7:6	zafg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε δουλεύειν ἡμᾶς	1	Here, so that indicates that what follows is the result of Christians having died to the law. Use the natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “the result being that we might serve” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1166	7:6	f9n4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	δουλεύειν ἡμᾶς	1	Paul is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “we might serve God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1167	7:6	c1j8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν καινότητι & οὐ παλαιότητι	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of newness and oldness, you could express the same ideas in another way. These words indicate different ways in which peopleserve God. Alternate translation: “in the new way … not in the old way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1168	7:6	vhqd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐν καινότητι Πνεύματος	1	Paul uses the possessive form to describe the newness that is produced by the Spirit. Paul means that the Holy Spirit enables Christians to live in a new way that pleases God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in a new way that comes from the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1169	7:6	rm8r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	παλαιότητι γράμματος	1	Paul uses the possessive form to describe the oldness that is determined by the letter. Paul means that Christians do not live in the old way that the law of Moses requires. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the old way that the letter requires” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1170	7:6	iozz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	γράμματος	1	Paul uses the letter to refer to the law which is written down with letters. See how you translated this word in 2:27. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1171	7:7	k1jj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν?	1	Then indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, then indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous verses, especially what he said in 7:5. See how you translated this phrase in 6:1. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1172	7:7	bnyx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? ὁ νόμος ἁμαρτία?	1	In these two sentences Paul is not asking for information, but is using questions to address an objection that some people may have to what he said in 7:5 because they misunderstood him. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as statements or exclamations or communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then we will say that the law is sin!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1173	7:7	f3hc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? ὁ νόμος ἁμαρτία?	1	In these two sentences Paul is speaking as if he were a Jewish Christian who misunderstood what Paul had taught in the previous verses. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1174	7:7	zl8m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτία & τὴν ἁμαρτίαν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of sin, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “something sinful … what things are sinful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1175	7:7	erx6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μὴ γένοιτο	1	In this sentence Paul begins to respond to the rhetorical questions he wrote earlier in the verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘May it never be!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1176	7:7	u8gm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	μὴ γένοιτο	1	See how you translated this phrase in 3:4 and 6:2. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
1177	7:7	y92j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	But here indicates that what follows is in contrast to what came before it. Here, But introduces the contrast to the idea that the law is sinful. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Nevertheless,” or “By contrast,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
1178	7:7	zzsf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces an example from God’s law that illustrates the importance of the law. See how you translated the same use of For in 7:2. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1179	7:7	g0np		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τήν & ἐπιθυμίαν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of covetousness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what it means to be covetous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1180	7:7	refv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	ὁ νόμος ἔλεγεν	1	Here Paul uses said to indicate a quotation from the law that is written in the Old Testament (Exodus 20:17). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “it had been written in the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
1181	7:7	qb5v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὁ νόμος ἔλεγεν	1	Here Paul speaks of the law as if it were a person who could say something. He means that God said what was written down in the law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God said in the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1182	7:8	mz77		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἀφορμὴν & λαβοῦσα ἡ ἁμαρτία διὰ τῆς ἐντολῆς, κατειργάσατο ἐν ἐμοὶ πᾶσαν ἐπιθυμίαν	1	Here Paul speaks of sin as if it were a person who could take an opportunity and produce covetousness within a person. Paul means that his desire to sin by coveting increased when he learned the commandment that prohibits coveting. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my desire to sin, increasing as a result of the commandment, led me to covet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1183	7:8	fh6x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῆς ἐντολῆς	1	Here, the commandment refers specifically to the command, “You will not covet,” in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the command that we should not covet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1184	7:8	w6ah		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ἐντολῆς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of commandment, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what God commanded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1185	7:8	zeb5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐπιθυμίαν	1	See how you translated covetousness in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1186	7:8	r5i2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	χωρὶς & νόμου, ἁμαρτία νεκρά	1	Here Paul speaks of sin as if it were something which could be dead. Paul means that his desire to sin would not have increased if God had not given his laws. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “if there were no law, my desire to sin would not have been stimulated” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1187	7:9	cag9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	χωρὶς νόμου	1	Here Paul speaks about the law as if it did not exist before he knew about it. Paul means that he was not aware of God’s law at one time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “while unaware of the law” or “without knowledge of the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1188	7:9	sz5q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐλθούσης & τῆς ἐντολῆς	1	Paul speaks of the commandment as if it were a person who could come to Paul. He means that he became aware of the commandment. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when I became aware of the commandment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1189	7:9	i90y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ἐντολῆς, ἡ ἁμαρτία	1	See how you translated commandment and sin in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1190	7:9	d4wm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῆς ἐντολῆς	1	Here, the commandment could refer to: (1) all the commandments that make up God’s law. Alternate translation: “God’s commandments” (2) the commandment against coveting, as mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “the commandment against coveting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1191	7:9	q9le		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἡ ἁμαρτία ἀνέζησεν	1	Here Paul speaks of sin as if it were a person who could come to life. This could mean: (1) Paul’s desire to sin was stimulated, as mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “my desire to sin was stimulated” (2) Paul realized that he was sinning, as mentioned in 7:7. Alternate translation: “I became aware of my sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1192	7:10	ouxm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐγὼ & ἀπέθανον	1	Paul uses died here to refer to being spiritually dead, which is the spiritual condition of all non-Christians. Spiritual death results in eternal punishment in hell after a person’s body dies. Paul means here that he realized that he was spiritually dead when he understood God’s law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I died spiritually” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1193	7:10	mzx2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἐντολὴ	1	See how you translated commandment in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1194	7:10	jmso		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ζωὴν	1	Here, life refers to “eternal life.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of eternal life” or “for living forever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1195	7:10	yu1u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἡ ἐντολὴ, ἡ εἰς ζωὴν	1	Here, for indicates the purpose for the commandment. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “the commandment that was intended to cause life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1196	7:10	a0rz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εὑρέθη μοι & αὕτη εἰς θάνατον	1	Here, for indicates that what follows is the result of the commandment. Paul means that God’s laws resulted in eternal death for people. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “it was found to result in death for me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1197	7:10	hkce		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	εὑρέθη & αὕτη	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I found it to be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1198	7:10	jrrw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εὑρέθη & αὕτη	1	Here Paul speaks of the commandment as if it were an object that could be found. Paul means that he realized that God’s law results in spiritual death for people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I realized it was to be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1199	7:10	y97i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	θάνατον	1	Here, death refers to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. See how you translated the same use of death in 6:16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1200	7:11	r582		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἡ & ἁμαρτία ἀφορμὴν λαβοῦσα διὰ τῆς ἐντολῆς	1	See how you translated this clause in 7:8. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1201	7:11	qi99		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐξηπάτησέν με	1	Here Paul speaks of sin as if it were a person who could deceive people. Paul means that his desire to sin tricked him into thinking that he could become righteous by obeying the commandment. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “caused me to deceive myself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1202	7:11	qljg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	δι’ αὐτῆς	1	The pronoun it refers to the commandment. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “through the commandment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1203	7:11	f6sx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἀπέκτεινεν	1	Here Paul speaks of sin as if it were a person who could kill people. Paul means that his desire to sin caused him to disobey God’s law, which resulted in Paul being spiritually dead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “caused me to die spiritually” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1204	7:12	h0li		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε	1	So then indicates that what follows this phrase explains what came before it. So then here introduces the result of what Paul said in 7:7–11. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “Since this is true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1205	7:12	i3ka		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἐντολὴ	1	See how you translated commandment in 7:9. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1206	7:13	us69		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	The word Therefore indicates that what follows is a logical conclusion. Therefore here indicates that what follows is the result of what Paul said in 7:7–12. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “As a result” or “This is why” or “Because of this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1207	7:13	e1bx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τὸ & ἀγαθὸν ἐμοὶ ἐγένετο θάνατος?	1	Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that the law did not directly cause him to become spiritually dead. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “surely what is good did not become death to me!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1208	7:13	g451		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ & ἀγαθὸν & διὰ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ	1	Here, what is good refers to the law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God’s good laws … through those good laws” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1209	7:13	qwe9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐμοὶ ἐγένετο θάνατος	1	Here Paul speaks of the law as if it could become death. Paul is referring to the idea that God’s laws directly caused him to become spiritually dead. He rejects this idea in the next sentence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “did … cause me to die spiritually” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1210	7:13	ee64		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	θάνατος & θάνατον	1	In this verse death refers to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. See how you translated the same use of death in 6:16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1211	7:13	r84l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	θάνατος & ἡ ἁμαρτία & ἁμαρτία & θάνατον & ἡ ἁμαρτία διὰ τῆς ἐντολῆς	1	See how you translated the abstract nouns sin and commandment in 7:11 and death in 7:10. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1212	7:13	hgm6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	μὴ γένοιτο!	1	See how you translated this phrase in 3:4 and 6:2. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
1213	7:13	f9md		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ἀλλὰ ἡ ἁμαρτία, ἵνα φανῇ ἁμαρτία διὰ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ μοι κατεργαζομένη θάνατον	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “But sin produced death in me in order that it might be shown to be sin through what is good” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1214	7:13	qoe9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἁμαρτία, ἵνα φανῇ ἁμαρτία διὰ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ μοι κατεργαζομένη θάνατον	1	Here, in order that indicates a purpose clause. Paul is stating a purpose for sin producing death. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “sin produced death in me for the purpose of showing itself to be sin through what is good” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1215	7:13	kvhi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	φανῇ ἁμαρτία	1	Here Paul uses shown as if sin were an object that people could see. Paul means that God’s laws enable people to recognize what sin is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it might be recognized to be sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1216	7:13	e7r4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ	1	Here, through indicates that what is good is the means by which sin is clearly understood to be sin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of what is good” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1217	7:13	m4l5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἡ ἁμαρτία & μοι κατεργαζομένη θάνατον;	1	Here Paul speaks of sin as if it were a person who could kill someone. Paul means that his desire to sin caused him to disobey God’s law, which resulted in Paul being spiritually dead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “sin … caused me to die spiritually” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1218	7:13	pnq6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μοι κατεργαζομένη θάνατον	1	Here Paul speaks of death as if it were an object that could be inside a person. He means that he was spiritually dead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: Alternate translation: “killed me spiritually” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1219	7:13	cuct		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα γένηται καθ’ ὑπερβολὴν ἁμαρτωλὸς ἡ ἁμαρτία διὰ τῆς ἐντολῆς	1	Here, so that indicates a purpose clause. Paul is stating another purpose for sin producing death. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order for sin to become sinful beyond measure through the commandment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1220	7:13	a6zb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ τῆς ἐντολῆς	1	Here, through indicates that the commandment is the means by which sin becomes sinful beyond measure. Paul means that God’s laws provide a standard by which people can understand how extremely sinful sin is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of the commandment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1221	7:13	clht		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	γένηται καθ’ ὑπερβολὴν ἁμαρτωλὸς ἡ ἁμαρτία	1	Here Paul speaks of sin as if it were a person who could become more sinful. He means that God’s laws provide a standard by which people can understand how extremely sinful sin is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “sin might be recognized as sinful beyond measure” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1222	7:13	oy2w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	καθ’ ὑπερβολὴν	1	Here, beyond measure is an idiom that means “to a great degree” or “exceedingly.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar idiom from your language or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to an extreme degree” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1223	7:14	k5mg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that this verse is the reason why the previous statement is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “These things I have just said are true because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1224	7:14	quen		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ νόμος πνευματικός ἐστιν	1	Here, spiritual means that the source of the law is God’s Spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the law comes from God’s Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1225	7:14	vxn0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	ἐγὼ & σάρκινός εἰμι	1	Paul uses the word myself to emphasize the contrast between himself and the law. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I indeed am fleshly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
1226	7:14	big5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	σάρκινός	1	Here, fleshly refers to the weakness of sinful human nature, which is the inability to stop sinning without God’s help. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “spiritually frail” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1227	7:14	lx8f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πεπραμένος	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having sold myself into slavery” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1228	7:14	sr9e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πεπραμένος ὑπὸ τὴν ἁμαρτίαν	1	Here Paul speaks of himself as if he were a slave. Here, sold into slavery could refer to: (1) being influenced by one’s sinful human nature. In this case Paul would be speaking about his situation even after becoming a Christian. Alternate translation: “being under the influence of my sinful nature” (2) being controlled by one’s desire to sin. In this case Paul would be speaking about his situation before he became a Christian. Alternate translation: “being controlled by my desire to sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1229	7:14	p9pi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὑπὸ τὴν ἁμαρτίαν	1	See how you translated the similar use of this phrase in 3:9. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1230	7:15	udc8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that this verse is the reason why the previous statement is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “What I have just said is true because” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1231	7:15	u3av			ὃ & κατεργάζομαι, οὐ γινώσκω	1	Alternate translation: “I am not sure why I do some of the things that I do”
1232	7:15	gneb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	2	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces an explanation of “what I produce,” in the previous sentence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1233	7:15	e8ki		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	οὐ & ὃ θέλω & ὃ μισῶ	2	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “what I do not want to do … what I hate to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1234	7:15	az2z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	οὐ & ὃ θέλω, τοῦτο πράσσω & ὃ μισῶ, τοῦτο ποιῶ.	2	The phrases I practice and I do are exaggerations that Paul uses to emphasize that he often does what he does not want to do. It does not mean that Paul always does these things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “what I do not want, this I often practice … what I hate, this I often do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1235	7:16	xho0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ & ὃ οὐ θέλω	1	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since what I do not want” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
1236	7:16	y26s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ὃ οὐ θέλω, τοῦτο ποιῶ	1	See how you translated the similar phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1237	7:16	q3b5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	σύνφημι τῷ νόμῳ, ὅτι καλός	1	Here Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “I agree with the law and thus confess that it is good” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1238	7:17	x667		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	νυνὶ δὲ	1	But now indicates that this verse is the logical conclusion based on what Paul said in the previous two verses. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a conclusion. Alternate translation: “So it is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1239	7:17	k7ag		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	οὐκέτι ἐγὼ κατεργάζομαι	1	Paul uses the word myself to emphasize the contrast between himself and the sin that causes him to do what he does not want to do. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “it is no longer I who produces” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
1240	7:17	id6v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτὸ	1	The pronoun it here refers to doing the sinful acts that he does not want to do, as mentioned in the previous two verses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “those sinful deeds that I do not want to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1241	7:17	f6n8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἡ ἐνοικοῦσα ἐν ἐμοὶ ἁμαρτία	1	Here Paul speaks of sin as if it were a person who could live inside of a person. Paul means that his desire to sin causes him to do what he does not want to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my desire to sin deeply influences me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1242	7:18	nqhc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces an explanation of what Paul said in the previous sentence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1243	7:18	kf8z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	οἶδα & ὅτι οὐκ οἰκεῖ ἐν ἐμοί, τοῦτ’ ἔστιν ἐν τῇ σαρκί μου, ἀγαθόν	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “I know that good does not live in me, (that is, in my flesh)” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1244	7:18	p0ma		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	οὐκ οἰκεῖ ἐν ἐμοί & ἐν τῇ σαρκί μου, ἀγαθόν	1	Here Paul speaks of good as if it were a person who could live inside someone. He means that his sinful nature is not good at all. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “there is nothing good about me … about my flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1245	7:18	p1c1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῇ σαρκί μου	1	Here Paul uses flesh to refer to his sinful nature. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my sinful nature” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1246	7:18	kyx9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀγαθόν & τὸ καλὸν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of good, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “any good thing … what is good” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1247	7:18	ye8x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	2	For indicates that what follows this word relates to what came before it. For here indicates that the following sentence is the reason why the previous statement is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “What I have just said is true because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1248	7:18	gvev		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	τὸ & θέλειν παράκειταί μοι	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the wanting to do good is present in me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1249	7:18	h934		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸ & θέλειν παράκειταί μοι	1	Here Paul speaks of wanting as if it were a thing that could exist inside a person. Paul means that he truly wants to do something good. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I truly want” or “I deeply desire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1250	7:18	uxwb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	τὸ & κατεργάζεσθαι τὸ καλὸν οὔ	2	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the ability to produce the good is not in me” or “I am not able to produce the good” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1251	7:19	xftc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces an explanation of what Paul said in the last sentence of the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1252	7:19	ri3b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀγαθόν & κακὸν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of good and evil, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “good deeds … evil deeds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1253	7:19	j69g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὃ θέλω & ἀγαθόν & ὃ οὐ θέλω κακὸν	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that these clauses would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the good I want to do … the evil I do not want to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1254	7:20	kfvj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ & ὃ οὐ θέλω, τοῦτο ποιῶ	1	See how you translated this clause in 7:16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
1255	7:20	sk9q			οὐκέτι ἐγὼ κατεργάζομαι αὐτὸ, ἀλλὰ ἡ οἰκοῦσα ἐν ἐμοὶ ἁμαρτία	1	See how you translated these clauses in 7:17.
1256	7:21	rqfu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εὑρίσκω	1	Here Paul speaks of a law as if it were an object that he could find. Paul means that he became aware of the law that is described in the rest of the verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I became aware that there was” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1257	7:21	qae3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἄρα	1	Here, then introduces a result clause. 7:21–25 describe the logical conclusion to what Paul has stated in 7:14–20. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “as a result” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1258	7:21	y5vo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν νόμον	1	Here, law refers to a rule or principle. It does not refer to the laws God gave the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this rule” or “a different kind of law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1259	7:21	xxq9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	τῷ θέλοντι ἐμοὶ ποιεῖν τὸ καλὸν, ὅτι ἐμοὶ τὸ κακὸν παράκειται	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “that evil is present in me, in me, the one wanting to do good” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1260	7:21	mo4r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐμοὶ & ἐμοὶ τὸ κακὸν παράκειται	1	Here Paul speaks of evil as if it were an object that could be inside a person. Paul means that he does evil deeds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in me … I do evil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1261	7:21	qn1r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	τῷ θέλοντι & ποιεῖν τὸ καλὸν	1	Here, the one wanting to do good is giving further information about me, which refers to Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “who is the one wanting to do good” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
1262	7:21	hqp9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ καλὸν & τὸ κακὸν	1	See how you translated good and evil in 7:19. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1263	7:22	mvod		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows in this verse is the reason why the previous verse is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “What I have just said is true because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1264	7:22	x28l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	συνήδομαι & τῷ νόμῳ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here Paul speaks of the law of God as if it were a location in which a person could delight. He means that God’s laws cause him to delight. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I delight because of the law of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1265	7:22	nt65		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	τῷ νόμῳ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here, the law of God refers to the laws that God gave the Jews, which is usually what Paul means when he says the law. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:12. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
1266	7:22	m13q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸν ἔσω ἄνθρωπον	1	Here, the inner man refers to a person’s mind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the inner being” or “the mind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1267	7:23	zp7t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	βλέπω	1	Here Paul uses see to refer to noticing or perceiving something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I perceive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1268	7:23	fct8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἕτερον νόμον	1	Here, a different law refers to a rule or principle. It does not refer to the laws God gave the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this rule” or “a different kind of law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1269	7:23	ijp9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐν τοῖς μέλεσίν μου, ἀντιστρατευόμενον	1	Here Paul speaks of a different law as if it were a person who could fight within someone’s body parts. He means that his sinful desires caused him to use his body to do sinful things that he did not want to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “were causing me to use my members to sin in opposition to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1270	7:23	v8d8			τοῖς μέλεσίν	-1	See how you translated members in 6:13.
1271	7:23	t7yh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῷ νόμῳ τοῦ νοός μου	1	Here, the law of my mind could refer to: (1) a principle that Paul thinks, which is the delight for God’s laws that he said in the previous verse is in his “inner man.” Alternate translation: “the principle I have thought” or “the principle in my mind” (2) the laws God gave the Jews, which Paul says that he serves with his mind in 7:25. Alternate translation: “God’s law that is in my mind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1272	7:23	i8w4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	αἰχμαλωτίζοντά με	1	Here Paul speaks of a different law as if it were a person who could take someone captive. He means that his sinful desires controlled him against his will. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “controlling me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1273	7:23	u4ny		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῷ νόμῳ τῆς ἁμαρτίας	1	Here the law of the sin could refer to: (1) the principle that people have a sinful nature. Alternate translation: “the law that is my sinful nature” (2) the laws God gave the Jews, which Paul previously said in 7:5 stimulate people to sin more. Alternate translation: “God’s laws that stimulate sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1274	7:23	po29		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῷ ὄντι ἐν τοῖς μέλεσίν μου	1	Here Paul speaks of the law of the sin as if it were something that could be inside someone. He means he has a sinful nature that influences what he does with his body parts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “that influences what I do with my members” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1275	7:24	nu6u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ταλαίπωρος ἐγὼ ἄνθρωπος!	1	This sentence is an exclamation that communicates deep despair. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. Alternate translation: “O, how miserable I am!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
1276	7:24	hmhj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίς με ῥύσεται ἐκ τοῦ σώματος τοῦ θανάτου τούτου?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize his despair. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely no one will rescue me from the body of this death!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1277	7:24	md8e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τοῦ σώματος τοῦ θανάτου τούτου	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe how the body relates to this death. This phrase could refer to: (1) the body that results in this death. Alternate translation: “the body that causes this death” (2) the body that is characterized by this death. Alternate translation: “this mortal body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1278	7:24	q74f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῦ θανάτου τούτου	1	Here, this death could refer to: (1) physical death. Alternate translation: “that dies” (2) spiritual death. Alternate translation: “of this spiritual death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1279	7:25	w9ui		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	χάρις τῷ Θεῷ διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν	1	This sentence is an exclamation that communicates joy. It is the answer to the rhetorical question that Paul asked in the previous verse. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating joy. Alternate translation: “O, how thankful I am to God through Jesus Christ our Lord!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
1280	7:25	omjd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	χάρις τῷ Θεῷ διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Thanks be to God who did this through Jesus Christ our Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1281	7:25	evnn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἄρα οὖν	1	So then indicates that what follows this phrase explains what came before it. So then indicates that what follows in this verse summarizes previous ideas. Here Paul used it regarding the ideas of 7:14–24. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a clearer expression. See how you translated this phrase in 5:18. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1282	7:25	adx1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς ἐγὼ	1	Paul uses the phrase I myself to emphasize the contrast between himself and the sin that causes him to do what he does not want to do. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “it is indeed I who” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
1283	7:25	sxn3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	τῷ μὲν νοῒ δουλεύω νόμῳ Θεοῦ; τῇ δὲ σαρκὶ, νόμῳ ἁμαρτίας	1	Here Paul speaks of the law of God and the law of sin as if they were people whom he could serve. He means that he wants to obey the law of God, but often obeys his desire to sin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “obey the law of God with the mind, but with the flesh, I obey the law of sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1284	7:25	e163		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	νοῒ	1	See how you translated mind in 1:28. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1285	7:25	dzjl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	νόμῳ Θεοῦ	1	See how you translated this phrase in 7:22. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
1286	7:25	cdkb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	τῇ δὲ σαρκὶ, νόμῳ ἁμαρτίας	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “but with the flesh, I serve the law of sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1287	7:25	fm51		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῇ & σαρκὶ	1	Here Paul uses flesh to refer to his sinful nature. See how you translated the similar phrase in 7:18. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1288	7:25	he4l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	νόμῳ ἁμαρτίας	1	See how you translated the similar phrase in 7:23. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1289	8:intro	ev4r				0	Romans 8 General Notes Structure and Formatting Becoming like Christ in this life (6:1–8:39) Baptism represents union with Christ’s death (6:1–14) Christians are now slaves of righteousness (6:15–23) Christians have been freed from the law (7:1–6) The law is not sinful (7:7–12) Christians still struggle with indwelling sin (7:13–25) The Holy Spirit dwells in Christians (8:1–27) Christians have confidence in God’s love (8:28–8:39) Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with 8:36. Paul quotes these words from the Old Testament. Special Concepts in this Chapter Indwelling of the Spirit In 8:9–17 and 26–27 Paul says that the Holy Spirit dwells inside Christians to help them stop sinning and to intercede for them. The presence of the Holy Spirit within a person indicates that that person is a genuine Christian. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]]) Predestination Many scholars believe this chapter teaches on a subject known as “predestination.” See the use of the word “predestined” in 8:28–30 and “elect” in 8:33. Some scholars take this to indicate that God has, from before the foundation of the world, chosen some people to save. Christians have different views on what the Bible teaches on this subject, so translators need to take extra care when translating these verses. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/predestine]]) Important Figure of Speech in this Chapter Rhetorical questions In 8:24 and 8:31–35 Paul uses rhetorical questions in order to emphasize that what he is saying is true. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter Flesh Paul uses the word “flesh” in a variety of ways throughout this letter. In this chapter he frequently uses it to refer to sinful human nature. However, he uses the word “flesh” to refer to Christ’s physical body in 8:3. Every use of the word “flesh” will be discussed in the notes. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]]) Inclusive language In this chapter the pronouns “we”, “us”, and “our” refer inclusively to all believers in Christ. Paul calls these people “brothers” in 8:12. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1290	8:1	xq2y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὐδὲν ἄρα νῦν κατάκριμα	1	Here, therefore now marks the beginning of a new section in the letter. It also introduces a result clause that concludes what Paul discussed in chapters 5–7. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “Since all these things are true, there is no condemnation at all” or “As a result of everything that I have just told you being true, there is no condemnation at all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1291	8:1	xw65		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	κατάκριμα	1	See how you translated condemnation in 5:16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1292	8:1	ti0g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	See how you translated this phrase in 3:24. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1293	8:2	whhz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word relates to what came before it. For here indicates that this verse gives the reason why what Paul said in the previous verse is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1294	8:2	h1ka		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ὁ & νόμος τοῦ Πνεύματος τῆς ζωῆς	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the law that is characterized by the Spirit of life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the law that is characterized by the Spirit of life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1295	8:2	vt9k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ & νόμος	1	Here, the law refers to a rule or principle. It does not refer to the laws God gave the Jews. See how you translated the similar use of law in 7:21. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1296	8:2	hq2t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τοῦ Πνεύματος τῆς ζωῆς	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the Spirit that produces life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “of the Spirit that produces life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1297	8:2	x8uu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦ Πνεύματος	1	Here, the Spirit refers to the Holy Spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1298	8:2	ep3n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ζωῆς & τῆς ἁμαρτίας & τοῦ θανάτου	1	See how you translated life in 2:7, sin in 5:20, and death in 5:17. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1299	8:2	ionb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῆς ζωῆς	1	Here, life refers to eternal life. See how you translated this use of life in 5:18. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1300	8:2	irh6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῆς ζωῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ, ἠλευθέρωσέν σε	1	The phrase in Christ Jesus could refer to: (1) the means by which the Spirit set a person free. Alternate translation: “of life set you free in Christ Jesus” (2) a characteristic of the life. Alternate translation: “of the life that is in Christ Jesus set you free” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1301	8:2	cgbe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse and in 3:24. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1302	8:2	th4n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἠλευθέρωσέν σε ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου τῆς ἁμαρτίας καὶ τοῦ θανάτου	1	Here Paul speaks of the law of sin and death as if it were an object or person someone could be set free from. Paul means that the law that resulted in sin and death does not apply to those who are united with Christ Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “has caused the law of sin and death to no longer control you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1303	8:2	u82e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῦ νόμου τῆς ἁμαρτίας καὶ τοῦ θανάτου	1	This could refer to: (1) the principle that people have a sinful nature that results in death, as mentioned in 7:23–25. Alternate translation: “the principle that is my sinful nature that leads to death” (2) the laws God gave the Jews, which Paul previously said in 7:5 stimulate people to sin more. Alternate translation: “God’s laws that stimulate sin and death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1304	8:2	jlq1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦ θανάτου	1	Here, death refers to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. See how you translated the same use of death in 6:16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1305	8:3	mbh3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces what follows in this verse and the next verse as an explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1306	8:3	n9mr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	τὸ & ἀδύνατον τοῦ νόμου, ἐν ᾧ ἠσθένει διὰ τῆς σαρκός, ὁ Θεὸς	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “God did what the law was unable to do, in that it was weak through the flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1307	8:3	z2ej		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	τοῦ νόμου	1	Here, the law refers to the laws that God gave the Jews, which is usually what Paul means when he says the law. See how you translated this expression in 2:12. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
1308	8:3	t8lj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ & ἀδύνατον τοῦ νόμου & ὁ Θεὸς	1	Paul implies that what the law was unable to do was to make people righteous, which is the main theme of this book. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the law was unable to make people righteous … but God did so” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1309	8:3	j98t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	τὸ & ἀδύνατον τοῦ νόμου, ἐν ᾧ ἠσθένει διὰ τῆς σαρκός	1	Here Paul speaks of the law as if it were a person who was unable to do something and was weak. Paul means that the laws God gave the Jews could not make people righteous, because people are naturally sinful and unable to obey those laws. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the law could not stop people from sinning, because sinful human nature prevented people from obeying it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1310	8:3	g6g4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐν ᾧ ἠσθένει	1	This phrase is the reason why the law was unable to do what it was supposed to do. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a reason. Alternate translation: “since it was weak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1311	8:3	uzkh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὰ τῆς σαρκός	1	This phrase states the reason why the law was weak. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a reason. Alternate translation: “on account of the flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1312	8:3	etf2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	διὰ τῆς σαρκός	1	Here Paul uses flesh figuratively to refer to sinful human nature. See how you translated the similar use of flesh in 7:18. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1313	8:3	p4qq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν ἑαυτοῦ Υἱὸν πέμψας, ἐν ὁμοιώματι σαρκὸς ἁμαρτίας, καὶ περὶ ἁμαρτίας	1	This clause indicates how God condemned sin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1314	8:3	tc37		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	τὸν ἑαυτοῦ Υἱὸν πέμψας	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “having sent his own Son to the earth” or “having sent his own Son to mankind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1315	8:3	csl8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱὸν	1	Son is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
1316	8:3	uf94		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐν ὁμοιώματι σαρκὸς ἁμαρτίας	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the likeness that is characterized by sinful flesh. He means that Jesus had the same human flesh that sinful people have, although Jesus never sinned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “in the same flesh as that of sinful human beings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1317	8:3	xi5c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ὁμοιώματι σαρκὸς ἁμαρτίας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of likeness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in flesh like sinful flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1318	8:3	v0h2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	σαρκὸς ἁμαρτίας & τῇ σαρκί	1	Here Paul uses flesh figuratively to mean “the whole body,” which is made of flesh. See how you translated this use of flesh in 2:28. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1319	8:3	hfr2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	περὶ ἁμαρτίας	1	This could mean: (1) Jesus was sent for the sake of doing away with sin. Alternate translation: “in order to do away with sin” (2) Jesus was an offering to pay for sin. Alternate translation: “as an offering for sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1320	8:3	gid8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	κατέκρινε τὴν ἁμαρτίαν	1	Here Paul speaks of sin as if it were a guilty person whom a judge could condemn. Paul means that God removed the power that sin had to control people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he canceled the power of sin” or “he destroyed how sin controls people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1321	8:3	es29		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῇ σαρκί	1	Here, the flesh refers specifically to Jesus’ body, which died on the cross. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in his Son’s body on the cross” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1322	8:4	zcsi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	Here, so that indicates that what follows is the purpose for which God “condemned sin in the flesh” of Jesus. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1323	8:4	j9ff		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸ δικαίωμα τοῦ νόμου πληρωθῇ ἐν ἡμῖν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The one doing the action could be: (1) us. Alternate translation: “we might fulfill the righteous deeds of the law” (2) God. Alternate translation: “God might fulfill in us the righteous deeds of the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1324	8:4	puta		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸ δικαίωμα τοῦ νόμου πληρωθῇ ἐν ἡμῖν	1	Here Paul speaks of the righteous deeds of the law as if they were something that could be located inside a person. Paul means that God enables Christians to do those righteous deeds that his law required. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the righteous deeds of the law might be done by us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1325	8:4	w2aa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ δικαίωμα τοῦ νόμου	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a the righteous deeds that God commanded in the law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the righteous deeds that the law requires” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1326	8:4	rttr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	τοῦ νόμου	1	Here, the law refers to the laws that God gave the Jews, which is usually what Paul means when he says the law. See how you translated this expression in 2:12. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
1327	8:4	bsp0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	ἡμῖν, τοῖς μὴ κατὰ σάρκα περιπατοῦσιν, ἀλλὰ κατὰ Πνεῦμα	1	This clause gives further information about us. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “us, that is, those walking not according to the flesh, but according to the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
1328	8:4	acc4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῖς μὴ κατὰ σάρκα περιπατοῦσιν	1	Here Paul uses walking to refer to how people behave or lives their lives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “those not behaving according to the flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1329	8:4	grhf			κατὰ σάρκα & κατὰ Πνεῦμα	1	Alternate translation: “determined by the flesh … determined by the Spirit” or “in conformity with the flesh … in conformity with the Spirit”
1330	8:4	bgg7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατὰ σάρκα	1	Here Paul uses flesh figuratively to refer to sinful human nature. See how you translated the similar use of flesh in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1331	8:5	xzmt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that this verse gives the reason why what Paul said in the previous verse is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1332	8:5	s5sb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	σάρκα & τῆς σαρκὸς	1	See how you translated the flesh in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1333	8:5	b9in		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τὰ τῆς σαρκὸς φρονοῦσιν	1	The phrase set their minds on is an idiom that refers to thinking carefully about something or being intent on doing something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “are intent on doing the things of the flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1334	8:5	evgr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὰ τῆς σαρκὸς	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe things that are related to the flesh. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “things pertaining to the flesh” or “fleshly things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1335	8:5	cqwa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	οἱ δὲ κατὰ Πνεῦμα	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “but those existing according to the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1336	8:5	x3o6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	τὰ τοῦ Πνεύματος	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a phrase would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation (omitting the comma): “set their minds on the things of the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1337	8:5	a2n5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὰ τοῦ Πνεύματος	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe things that are related to the Spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “things pertaining to the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1338	8:6	uc6w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1339	8:6	vyw4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ & φρόνημα & τὸ & φρόνημα	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of mindset, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the way of thinking … the way of thinking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1340	8:6	my98		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ & φρόνημα τῆς σαρκὸς	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a mindset that is focused on the flesh. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the mindset that is focused on the flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1341	8:6	b0wo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τῆς σαρκὸς	1	See how you translated the flesh in the previous two verses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1342	8:6	czmn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	θάνατος	1	Here, is indicates that what follows is the result of the mindset of the flesh. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “results in death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1343	8:6	mbte		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	θάνατος	1	Here, death refers to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. See how you translated the same use of death in 6:16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1344	8:6	oviz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ & φρόνημα τοῦ Πνεύματος	2	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a mindset that is focused on the Spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the mindset that is focused on the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1345	8:6	q470		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ζωὴ καὶ εἰρήνη	1	Here, is indicates that what follows is the result of the mindset of the flesh. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “results in life and peace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1346	8:6	rqnl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ζωὴ καὶ εἰρήνη	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of life and peace, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “is living and being peaceful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1347	8:6	fjk8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ζωὴ	1	Here, life refers to eternal life. See how you translated this use of life in 5:18. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1348	8:7	lsdo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διότι	1	Here, because indicates that this verse and the next verse give the reasons why what Paul said in 8:5–6 is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating reasons. Alternate translation: “due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1349	8:7	gvcr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ φρόνημα τῆς σαρκὸς	1	See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1350	8:7	fpt4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἔχθρα	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of hostility, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “is hostile” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1351	8:7	pm7t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, for indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul said in the previous clause is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1352	8:7	thq8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὐχ ὑποτάσσεται, οὐδὲ & δύναται	1	Here, it refers to the mindset of the flesh mentioned earlier in the verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this mindset does not subject itself to … this mindset is not able to do so” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1353	8:7	z2ih		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	οὐχ ὑποτάσσεται, οὐδὲ γὰρ δύναται	1	Here Paul speaks of the mindset of the flesh as if it were a person who could subject himself to something. Paul means that the person who thinks with this mindset is unable to submit to God’s laws. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who thinks this way does not subject himself to … for he is not able to do so” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1354	8:7	srp9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	τῷ & νόμῳ τοῦ Θεοῦ οὐχ ὑποτάσσεται	1	Here Paul speaks of the law of God as if it were a king or master to whom someone could subject himself. Paul is referring to someone obeying God’s laws. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it does not obey the law of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1355	8:7	brde		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	τῷ & νόμῳ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	See how you translated this phrase in 7:22. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
1356	8:7	bhje		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	2	The word for indicates how what follows this word relates to what came before it. Here, for indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul said in the previous clause is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1357	8:8	me7u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἱ & ἐν σαρκὶ ὄντες	1	See how you translated this phrase in 7:5. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1358	8:9	vdhw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	However here indicates a strong contrast between people who have “the mindset of the flesh” referred to in the previous verse and the believers to whom Paul is writing this letter. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “On the contrary” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
1359	8:9	iybo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	ὑμεῖς δὲ οὐκ ἐστὲ	1	Paul uses the word yourselves to emphasize the contrast between his Christian readers and people who live in the flesh. Use a way that is natural in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “However, you are truly not” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
1360	8:9	czm9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν σαρκὶ	1	See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1361	8:9	e54u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν Πνεύματι	1	Here Paul speaks of the Holy Spirit as if he were a location that someone could be in. He could mean: (1) believers are controlled by the Holy Spirit, which is how in is used earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “controlled by the Spirit” (2) believers are united with the Holy Spirit, which is how Paul used in in 8:1. Alternate translation: “united with the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1362	8:9	p55f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Πνεύματι & Πνεῦμα Θεοῦ & Πνεῦμα Χριστοῦ	1	These phrases all refer to the Holy Spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit … the Holy Spirit of God … the Holy Spirit of Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1363	8:9	y3vg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὗτος	1	Here, this one refers to the person who does not have the Spirit of Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this person without the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1364	8:9	akl1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	οὗτος οὐκ ἔστιν αὐτοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a person who does not belong to Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “this one does not belong to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1365	8:10	ntqo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
1366	8:10	q8be		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	Χριστὸς ἐν ὑμῖν	1	Here Paul speaks of you as if you were a location that Christ could be in. See how you translated in you in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1367	8:10	q2q4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	τὸ μὲν σῶμα νεκρὸν διὰ ἁμαρτίαν, τὸ δὲ Πνεῦμα ζωὴ διὰ δικαιοσύνην	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “the Spirit is life because of righteousness even though the body is dead because of sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1368	8:10	lae8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	τὸ & σῶμα νεκρὸν	1	Paul is speaking of the bodies of believers in general, not of one particular body. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “the bodies are dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
1369	8:10	e6g9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸ μὲν σῶμα νεκρὸν διὰ ἁμαρτίαν	1	Here Paul speaks of the body as if it were already dead. Paul means that the physical body of a Christian will still die because of sin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the body will certainly die because of sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1370	8:10	yb1b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ δὲ Πνεῦμα ζωὴ	1	Here, the Spirit is life could mean: (1) the Holy Spirit gives a person eternal life. In this case Spirit refers to the Holy Spirit and life refers to eternal life. Alternate translation: “but the Holy Spirit grants eternal life” (2) a believer’s spirit is alive. In this case Spirit refers to the spirits of individual believers. Alternate translation: “but the spirit is alive” or “but your spirits are alive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1371	8:10	ya21		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	διὰ δικαιοσύνην	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of righteousness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because of your righteous status” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1372	8:11	jlc9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
1373	8:11	i618		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ Πνεῦμα & αὐτοῦ Πνεῦμα	1	These phrases refer to the Holy Spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit … his Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1374	8:11	b9pu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦ ἐγείραντος τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἐκ νεκρῶν & ὁ ἐγείρας ἐκ νεκρῶν Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν	1	These phrases refer to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of God, who raised Jesus from dead ones … God, who raised Christ Jesus from dead ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1375	8:11	jr6p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐγείραντος τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἐκ νεκρῶν & ἐγείρας ἐκ νεκρῶν Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν	1	See how you translated a similar phrase in 4:24. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1376	8:11	t27d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ζῳοποιήσει καὶ τὰ θνητὰ σώματα ὑμῶν	1	Paul uses make alive to imply that he is referring to the resurrection of Christians after they have died. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “will also resurrect your mortal bodies after you have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1377	8:11	xi76		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ & αὐτοῦ Πνεῦμα	1	Here, through indicates the means by which God will make Christians alive. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of his Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1378	8:11	e6t8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	τοῦ ἐνοικοῦντος αὐτοῦ Πνεῦμα ἐν ὑμῖν	1	Here, who lives in you gives further information about the Holy Spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “his Spirit, that is, the Spirit who lives in you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
1379	8:12	mv1r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἄρα οὖν	1	So then indicates that what follows this phrase explains what came before it. So then here indicates that what follows in 8:12–17 summarizes the ideas of 8:5–11. See how you translated this phrase in 5:18. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1380	8:12	qw5b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	See how you translated this word in 1:13. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1381	8:12	e3j8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὀφειλέται ἐσμέν	1	Here Paul speaks of Christians as if they are debtors. He means that Christians are obligated to live according to the Spirit and not according to the flesh. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we have an obligation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1382	8:12	fb3m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	οὐ τῇ σαρκὶ	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “we are not debtors to the flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1383	8:12	ecoo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῇ σαρκὶ & τοῦ & σάρκα	1	Here Paul uses the flesh to refer to sinful human nature. See how you translated the same use of this phrase in 7:18. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1384	8:12	dh1m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	τοῦ κατὰ σάρκα ζῆν	1	Here, to live introduces an explanation of the flesh. Use a word or phrase that introduces a further explanation or elaboration in your language. Alternate translation: “that is, to live according to the flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1385	8:12	gplu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τοῦ κατὰ σάρκα ζῆν	1	See how you translated the similar phrase in 8:4. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1386	8:13	dczr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces an explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1387	8:13	ri75		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατὰ σάρκα ζῆτε	1	See how you translated the similar phrase in 8:4 and in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1388	8:13	b9n5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μέλλετε ἀποθνῄσκειν	1	Here, die refers to dying spiritually, which means enduring eternal punishment in hell after experiencing physical death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you are going to die spiritually” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1389	8:13	ld2h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὰς πράξεις τοῦ σώματος θανατοῦτε	1	Here, put to death means “completely stop doing something.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you stop doing the practices of the body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1390	8:13	ze08		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὰς πράξεις τοῦ σώματος	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the practices that are done with the body. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “what is done with the body” or “what you do with the body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1391	8:13	o1ly		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὰς πράξεις τοῦ σώματος	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of practices, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what is practiced with the body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1392	8:13	nwul		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὰς πράξεις	1	Here, the practices refers specifically to sinful practices that a person does with his body. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the sinful practices of the body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1393	8:13	xihu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	τοῦ σώματος	1	Paul is speaking of bodies in general, not of one particular body. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “of your bodies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
1394	8:13	dr0e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ζήσεσθε	1	Here, live refers to living forever with God in heaven after experiencing physical death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you will live forever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1395	8:14	utms		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that this verse gives the reason why what Paul said in the previous verse is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1396	8:14	ojie		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὅσοι & οὗτοι	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “as many people as … these people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1397	8:14	u8pv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὅσοι & Πνεύματι Θεοῦ ἄγονται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as many as the Spirit of God leads” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1398	8:14	yz28		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Πνεύματι Θεοῦ	1	See how you translated the Spirit of God in 8:9. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1399	8:14	gd1i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	υἱοί Θεοῦ	1	Here Paul is using the term sons in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “the children of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1400	8:14	wrk1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	υἱοί Θεοῦ	1	Paul speaks of these people as if God were their physical father. He means that these people have a father-son relationship with God because they trust in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the spiritual children of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1401	8:15	wpp9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces an explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1402	8:15	zi1c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πάλιν	1	Here, again indicates that Paul’s readers had a spirit of slavery before they became Christians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for a second time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1403	8:15	r57o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πνεῦμα	1	Here, spirit could refer to: (1) a person’s attitude or emotional state. Alternate translation: “a mental state” (2) a demonic spirit. Alternate translation: “a demonic spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1404	8:15	av67		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	πνεῦμα δουλείας & Πνεῦμα υἱοθεσίας	1	In both of these phrases Paul is using the possessive form to describe something that causes something else to happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use different expressions. Alternate translation: “a spirit that causes slavery … the Spirit that causes adoption” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1405	8:15	iwyy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δουλείας & φόβον & υἱοθεσίας	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of slavery, fear, and adoption, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “of being a slave … you being afraid … of those who have been adopted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1406	8:15	c43f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς φόβον	1	Here, leading to indicates that fear is the result of receiving a spirit of slavery. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “resulting in fear” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1407	8:15	ew0a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Πνεῦμα	1	Here, the Spirit could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit, as indicated by the use of Spirit in the ULT. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit” (2) a person’s attitude or emotional state, as with the previous use of spirit in this verse. Alternate translation: “a mental state” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1408	8:15	ecq3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	Ἀββά, ὁ Πατήρ	1	Here, cry out indicates that what follows is an emotional exclamation. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. Alternate translation: “O Abba! Father!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
1409	8:15	vxs9			Ἀββά, ὁ Πατήρ	1	Here Paul writes out the sounds of this Jewish Aramaic word Abba with Greek letters, which means Father. Since John translates the meaning next in the verse, you should write out this word using the most similar sounds in your language.
1410	8:15	ahnr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Πατήρ	1	Father is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
1411	8:16	mwbw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῷ Πνεύματι ἡμῶν	1	Here, spirit refers to a person’s attitude or emotional state. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a mental state” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1412	8:16	aimw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τέκνα Θεοῦ	1	Here Paul uses children of God to refer to people who have a father-child relationship with God because they trust in Jesus. Here, children does not refer to young people, but only to the relationship that people have with their fathers. If you translate children using a literal term, choose a word that can refer to people of any age in relation to their fathers. Alternate translation: “God’s spiritual offspring” or “spiritual children of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1413	8:17	agxk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
1414	8:17	izpd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	εἰ & τέκνα, καὶ κληρονόμοι; κληρονόμοι μὲν Θεοῦ	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the end of the previous verse. Alternate translation: “if we are children, then we are also heirs: we are both heirs of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1415	8:17	hfwo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τέκνα	1	See how you translated this word in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1416	8:17	fj7w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κληρονόμοι; κληρονόμοι μὲν Θεοῦ	1	Paul uses heirs to refer to Christians as if they will inherit property and wealth from a family member. He means that they will receive everything that God has promised to give Christians. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “those who will receive what God has promised us: both those who receive those things from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1417	8:17	q751		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	συνκληρονόμοι & Χριστοῦ	1	Paul uses joint heirs to refer to Christians as if they, along with Christ, will inherit property and wealth from a family member. He means that God will give to Christians what he gives to Christ. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we will also receive what God has promised us and Christ together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1418	8:17	q6ka		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	συνπάσχομεν, ἵνα καὶ συνδοξασθῶμεν	1	The pronoun him here refers to Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “we suffering together with Christ so that we may also be glorified together with Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1419	8:17	ggl6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	Paul uses so that here to state the goal for which Christians suffer together with Christ. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1420	8:17	j6ia		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καὶ συνδοξασθῶμεν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God may also glorify us together with him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1421	8:18	i5nu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it indicates that what follows in 8:18–25 gives further information about what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1422	8:18	f3sv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	λογίζομαι	1	The pronoun I here refers to Paul (see 7:1). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, consider” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1423	8:18	b3b1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	λογίζομαι & ὅτι οὐκ ἄξια τὰ παθήματα τοῦ νῦν καιροῦ, πρὸς	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I cannot compare the sufferings of this present time with” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1424	8:18	oj49		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὰ παθήματα τοῦ νῦν καιροῦ & τὴν & δόξαν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of sufferings and glory, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the things that make us suffer in this present time … the glorious situation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1425	8:18	jjb8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μέλλουσαν & ἀποκαλυφθῆναι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that God will make known” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1426	8:19	qoj5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For indicates how what follows this word relates to what came before it. Here, it indicates that this verse gives additional support for what Paul said in 8:17. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1427	8:19	dn11		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἡ & ἀποκαραδοκία τῆς κτίσεως & ἀπεκδέχεται	1	Here, the eager expectation is an idiom Paul uses to emphasize how eagerly the creation is waiting. He does not mean that the eager expectation itself is waiting. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the creation is very eagerly expecting” or “the creation is eagerly expecting with much eagerness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1428	8:19	d911		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἡ & ἀποκαραδοκία τῆς κτίσεως & ἀπεκδέχεται	1	Here Paul speaks of the creation as if it were a person who eagerly expects something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “it is as if the creation is eagerly expecting with eager expectation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1429	8:19	ulvv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς κτίσεως & τὴν ἀποκάλυψιν τῶν υἱῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of creation and revelation, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “of the created things … the sons of God to be revealed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1430	8:19	dm6s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὴν ἀποκάλυψιν τῶν υἱῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for the time when God will reveal his sons” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1431	8:19	sr2p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῶν υἱῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	See how you translated this phrase in 8:14. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1432	8:20	nh58		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows in 8:20–22 is the reason why what Paul said in the previous verse is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1433	8:20	zjl2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ & ματαιότητι	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of futility, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to the condition of being futile” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1434	8:20	gdfe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ κτίσις	1	See how you translated this in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1435	8:20	l9ab		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἡ κτίσις ὑπετάγη	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God subjugated the creation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1436	8:20	yvl3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἡ κτίσις ὑπετάγη, οὐχ ἑκοῦσα	1	Here Paul speaks of the creation as if it were a person who could be subjected to someone and could have a will. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “it is as if the creation were subjected against its will” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1437	8:20	taz4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν ὑποτάξαντα	1	This phrase refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God, who subjected it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1438	8:20	l7bf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐφ’ ἑλπίδι	1	Here, hope refers to the creation’s hope, which is why the creation is “eagerly expecting the revelation of the sons of God” in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the basis of giving hope” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1439	8:20	tof4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἑλπίδι	1	See how you translated hope in 5:4. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1440	8:21	m3fi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	αὐτὴ ἡ κτίσις ἐλευθερωθήσεται ἀπὸ τῆς δουλείας τῆς φθορᾶς, εἰς τὴν ἐλευθερίαν τῆς δόξης	1	Here Paul speaks of the creation as if it were a person who was enslaved to someone and needed to be freed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the creation itself will no longer decay, but will experience the glory” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1441	8:21	l6qc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	αὐτὴ ἡ κτίσις ἐλευθερωθήσεται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will free the creation itself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1442	8:21	ovn5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ κτίσις	1	See how you translated the creation in the previous two verses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1443	8:21	l3vw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς δουλείας τῆς φθορᾶς & τὴν ἐλευθερίαν τῆς δόξης	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of slavery, decay, freedom, and glory, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “being enslaved to decay … being free to experience what is glorious” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1444	8:21	r2n9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῆς δουλείας τῆς φθορᾶς	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe slavery to decay. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “being enslaved to decay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1445	8:21	ba5h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῆς δουλείας τῆς φθορᾶς	1	Here Paul speaks of decay as if it could enslave someone. He means that the creation was certain to decay. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “being destined to decay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1446	8:21	tx57		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰς τὴν ἐλευθερίαν	1	Here Paul speaks of freedom as if it were a location someone could enter into. Paul means that the creation will experience this freedom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to experience the freedom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1447	8:21	bv03		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὴν ἐλευθερίαν τῆς δόξης	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the freedom that relates to the glory. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the freedom that comes from the glory” or “the freedom pertaining to the glory” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1448	8:21	zsks		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῆς δόξης τῶν τέκνων τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form the glory of the children of God to refer to the glory that God shares with believers. This was the same glory that God shared with humans when he created them, but which they lost when the first humans sinned, as mentioned in 3:23. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the glory that God gives the children of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1449	8:21	a5ix		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῶν τέκνων τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	See how you translated this phrase in the 8:16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1450	8:22	pcay		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it indicates that what follows in this verse gives further support for what Paul said about the miserable condition of the creation in the previous two verses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1451	8:22	l69k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	πᾶσα ἡ κτίσις συνστενάζει καὶ συνωδίνει	1	Here Paul speaks of the creation as if it were a woman who groans and labors in pain while giving birth to a baby. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all the creation is like a woman groaning and laboring in pain while giving birth” or “all the creation is suffering greatly together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1452	8:23	b5sz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὴν ἀπαρχὴν τοῦ Πνεύματος ἔχοντες	1	This clause could refer to: (1) Paul and his Christian readers. Alternate translation: “those who have the firstfruits of the Spirit” (2) the reason why Christians groan. Alternate translation: “because we have the firstfruits of the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1453	8:23	qyic		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὴν ἀπαρχὴν τοῦ Πνεύματος	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the firstfruits that is the Spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the firstfruits, that is, the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1454	8:23	wutm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὴν ἀπαρχὴν	1	Here Paul uses firstfruits to refer to the Holy Spirit as if they were the first crop that was harvested during the harvest season. Paul means that the Holy Spirit is the first part of the blessings that God gives Christians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the first gift” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1455	8:23	xun5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	αὐτοὶ	2	Paul uses the word ourselves here to emphasize that Christians also share in the suffering of the creation. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “our very selves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
1456	8:23	ch9t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν ἑαυτοῖς στενάζομεν	1	Here Paul uses groan to refer to the emotional anguish that Christians experience while they wait to be with God in heaven. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “experience emotional anguish” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1457	8:23	tiij		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	υἱοθεσίαν & τὴν ἀπολύτρωσιν	1	See how you translated adoption in 8:15 and redemption in 3:24. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1458	8:23	k1wy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	υἱοθεσίαν ἀπεκδεχόμενοι	1	Here, our adoption refers to when we will become full members of God’s family, as adopted sons. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “waiting for when we are fully members of God’s family” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1459	8:23	qsb9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	τοῦ σώματος ἡμῶν	1	Paul is speaking of the bodies of believers in general, not of one particular body. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “of our bodies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
1460	8:24	oocv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse is the reason why Christians “groan” and are “eagerly expecting” to be fully adopted and redeemed. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “We do this because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1461	8:24	sv0h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ & ἐλπίδι & ἐλπὶς & ἐλπίς	1	See how you translated the abstract noun hope in 5:4. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1462	8:24	xwvy			τῇ & ἐλπίδι	1	Here, in could indicate: (1) that hope is associated with being saved. Alternate translation: “in association with this hope” (2) the means by which people are saved. In this case, hope would refer to faith. Alternate translation: “by this hope”
1463	8:24	x4gi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐσώθημεν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God saved us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1464	8:24	edze		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	βλεπομένη & βλέπει	1	Paul uses seen and sees here to refer to experiencing something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “being experienced … he experiences” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1465	8:24	pgmc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	βλεπομένη	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that people can see” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1466	8:24	rxxy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	2	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows is the reason why the previous statement is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is true since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1467	8:24	tks9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ὃ γὰρ βλέπει τις, ἐλπίζει?	1	Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the thrust of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “For surely no one hopes for what he sees!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1468	8:25	ktqd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὃ οὐ βλέπομεν	1	See how you translated the similar use of “seen” and “sees” in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1469	8:25	g2pm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὃ οὐ βλέπομεν & ἀπεκδεχόμεθα	1	Here, what we do not see and it refer to the “adoption” and “redemption” mentioned in 8:23. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the adoption and redemption that we do not see … we are eagerly expecting these things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1470	8:25	l91v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δι’ ὑπομονῆς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of endurance, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “while enduring” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1471	8:26	bkwx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	συναντιλαμβάνεται & ὑπερεντυγχάνει	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “helps us … intercedes for us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1472	8:26	h8jy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ἀσθενείᾳ ἡμῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of weakness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in our weak condition” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1473	8:26	a6e1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows is the reason why the previous statement is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is true since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1474	8:26	k5pn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	τὸ & τί προσευξώμεθα καθὸ δεῖ, οὐκ οἴδαμεν	2	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “For we do not know the thing for which we should pray as we ought” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1475	8:26	fbjc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸ τὸ Πνεῦμα	1	Paul uses the word himself here to emphasize that Holy Spirit helps Christians. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “the very Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
1476	8:26	jmp8			στεναγμοῖς ἀλαλήτοις	1	Alternate translation: “with groanings that we cannot express in words”
1477	8:27	tq4n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ & ἐραυνῶν τὰς καρδίας	1	Here, the one who searches the hearts refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God, who searches the hearts,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1478	8:27	v184		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὁ & ἐραυνῶν τὰς καρδίας	1	The phrase searches the hearts means “examines thoughts and emotions.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who knows all our thoughts and feelings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1479	8:27	tz5h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὁ & ἐραυνῶν τὰς καρδίας	1	See how you translated “heart” in 1:21. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1480	8:27	bioe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ φρόνημα τοῦ Πνεύματος	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the mindset that belongs to the Spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the Spirit’s mindset” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1481	8:27	rgcb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ φρόνημα	1	See how you translated mindset in 8:6. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1482	8:27	fgdd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατὰ Θεὸν	1	Here, God implies God’s will. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “according to God’s will” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1483	8:28	u0ev		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀγαθόν & πρόθεσιν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of good and purpose, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what is good … what he purposes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1484	8:28	q3ce		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῖς & κλητοῖς οὖσιν	2	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for those whom God called” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1485	8:29	m3vv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὓς προέγνω	1	Here, foreknew could mean: (1) God had determined to know them ahead of time, which is how this word is used in 1 Peter 1:20. Alternate translation: “whom he chose beforehand” (2) God knew what they would do ahead of time. Alternate translation: “whom he knew beforehand,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1486	8:29	xhn2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	συμμόρφους τῆς εἰκόνος τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	Here, image refers to how Christians will one day resemble Jesus. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated image in 1:23. Alternate translation: “to be a similar form that is like his Son” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1487	8:29	yuw2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	Son is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
1488	8:29	ojxg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς τὸ εἶναι αὐτὸν	1	Here, so that introduces a purpose clause. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose that he might be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1489	8:29	r3vf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν	1	The pronoun he refers to God’s Son, Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Son” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1490	8:29	lf49		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸ & πρωτότοκον	1	Here, firstborn could mean: (1) the most important person among God’s children. Alternate translation: “the person ranked first” (2) the first person to be resurrected. Alternate translation: “the first person to be resurrected” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1491	8:29	s552		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοῖς	1	Although the term brothers is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1492	8:29	lxym		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀδελφοῖς	1	Here, brothers refers to Christians, whom Paul calls “joint heirs with Christ” in 8:17. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “children of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1493	8:30	hg3f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκάλεσεν & ἐκάλεσεν	1	Here, called refers to God choosing people to be his people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “chose to be his people … he chose” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1494	8:30	g29g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture	καὶ ἐδόξασεν	1	Paul uses the past tense in order to refer to something that will certainly happen in the future. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “will also glorify” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
1495	8:31	uqou		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν	1	Here, then indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous verses. See how you translated this phrase in 6:1. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1496	8:31	xpu3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν πρὸς ταῦτα? εἰ ὁ Θεὸς ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν, τίς καθ’ ἡμῶν?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form in these two sentences to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then we will say to these things: If God is for us, surely no one can be against us!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1497	8:31	ovfz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
1498	8:31	s21a			ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν	1	Alternate translation: “is on our side”
1499	8:32	fqim		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ὅς γε τοῦ ἰδίου Υἱοῦ οὐκ ἐφείσατο, ἀλλὰ ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν πάντων παρέδωκεν αὐτόν, πῶς οὐχὶ καὶ σὺν αὐτῷ, τὰ πάντα ἡμῖν χαρίσεται?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “He who indeed did not spare his own Son, but gave him up on behalf of us all will surely also with him freely give us all things!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1500	8:32	mifc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὅς	1	He who here refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God who” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1501	8:32	s9l9			οὐκ ἐφείσατο	1	Alternate translation: “did not refrain from giving” or “did not refuse to give up”
1502	8:32	l73i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ ἰδίου Υἱοῦ	1	Son is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
1503	8:32	b3au		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	παρέδωκεν αὐτόν	1	Here, gave him up means that God allowed people to kill Jesus. If it might be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “gave him up to be killed” or “allowed him to be killed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1504	8:33	vr1b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίς ἐγκαλέσει κατὰ ἐκλεκτῶν Θεοῦ?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely no one can bring an accusation against God’s elect!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1505	8:33	tidd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τίς ἐγκαλέσει	1	Here, accusation implies an accusation that is based on facts. If it might be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a true accusation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1506	8:33	ekqn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐκλεκτῶν Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of elect, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “those who have been chosen by God” or “those whom God has elected” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1507	8:33	qmca		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	Θεὸς ὁ δικαιῶν	1	This sentences states the reason why the idea in the previous sentence is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “No on can accuse them, because God is the one who justifies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1508	8:34	vt5r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίς ὁ κατακρινῶν?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely no one can condemn!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1509	8:34	j1dj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὁ κατακρινῶν	1	Paul is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the word from the context. Alternate translation: “the one who condemns us believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1510	8:34	u627		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς ὁ ἀποθανών, μᾶλλον δὲ ἐγερθείς ὅς, καί ἐστιν ἐν δεξιᾷ τοῦ Θεοῦ, ὃς καὶ ἐντυγχάνει ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν	1	This sentences states the reason why the idea in the previous sentence is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “No one can condemn because Christ Jesus is the one who died—but more than that, he was raised who also is at the right hand of God—who also intercedes on our behalf” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1511	8:34	tw3l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐγερθείς	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God raised him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1512	8:34	dea5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐγερθείς	1	See how you translated raised in 4:25. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1513	8:34	uc9o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἐν δεξιᾷ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the adjective right as a noun in order to indicate the right side. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “at the right side of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1514	8:34	vd8g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὅς, καί ἐστιν ἐν δεξιᾷ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	In this culture, the place at the right side of a ruler was a position of honor. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the place of honor next to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1515	8:35	h9ba		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίς ἡμᾶς χωρίσει ἀπὸ τῆς ἀγάπης τοῦ Χριστοῦ?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely no one will separate us from the love of Christ!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1516	8:35	btoo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἡμᾶς χωρίσει ἀπὸ τῆς ἀγάπης τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here Paul speaks figuratively of love as if it were an object that someone could be separated from. He means that Christ cannot stop loving those who believe in him. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express this plainly. Alternate translation: “will cause Christ to stop loving us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1517	8:35	ldx1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	θλῖψις, ἢ στενοχωρία, ἢ διωγμὸς, ἢ λιμὸς, ἢ γυμνότης, ἢ κίνδυνος, ἢ μάχαιρα?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely neither tribulation, nor distress, nor persecution, nor hunger, nor nakedness, nor danger, nor sword!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1518	8:35	m2hl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	θλῖψις, ἢ στενοχωρία, ἢ διωγμὸς, ἢ λιμὸς, ἢ γυμνότης, ἢ κίνδυνος, ἢ μάχαιρα?	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “Will tribulation, or distress, or persecution, or hunger, or nakedness, or danger, or sword separate us from the love of Christ?”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1519	8:35	qe2z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	θλῖψις, ἢ στενοχωρία, ἢ διωγμὸς, ἢ λιμὸς	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of Tribulation, distress, persecution, hunger, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “If people trouble us, or hurt us, or distress us, or persecute us, or cause us to be hungry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1520	8:35	q2dc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	θλῖψις, ἢ στενοχωρία	1	Tribulation and distress mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize what he is saying. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Extreme tribulation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1521	8:35	kcjr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἢ μάχαιρα	1	Here, sword refers to being killed violently. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “or being killed violently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1522	8:36	clec		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	See how you translated this phrase in 1:17. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
1523	8:36	f2de		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation was written by the sons of Korah. Alternate translation: “Just as the sons of Korah wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1524	8:36	wegb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ὅτι ἕνεκεν σοῦ, θανατούμεθα ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν; ἐλογίσθημεν ὡς πρόβατα σφαγῆς	1	In these clauses Paul quotes Psalm 44:22. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1525	8:36	t67y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ὅτι ἕνεκεν σοῦ	1	Here, your is singular and refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “For your sake, God,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
1526	8:36	s7wj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	θανατούμεθα & ἐλογίσθημεν	1	Here, we refers to the people who wrote this verse, so it would be exclusive. It does not refer to God, who is the one being spoken to. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1527	8:36	phxq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	θανατούμεθα & ἐλογίσθημεν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “our enemies put us to death … They consider us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1528	8:36	h6v7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	θανατούμεθα ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν	1	The phrase all day long is an exaggeration that emphasizes how frequently these people were being killed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we are killed regularly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1529	8:36	g3pi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile	ἐλογίσθημεν ὡς πρόβατα σφαγῆς	1	Here Paul compares to sheep those whom people kill because they are loyal to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “We are considered by those who kill us to only be as valuable as the sheep they kill” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
1530	8:36	gmi0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	σφαγῆς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of slaughter, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to be slaughtered” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1531	8:37	wytd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλ’	1	But here indicates that what follows 8:37–39 is the negative answer to the rhetorical questions in 8:35. If you translated the rhetorical question in 8:35 as a question, then here you could use a natural way in your language for introducing a negative answer to that question. If you changed the rhetorical question in 8:35 to a statement, then here you could use a word that indicates strong contrast. Alternate translation: “No,” or “On the contrary,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
1532	8:37	aii8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τούτοις	1	Here, these things refers to the list of various types of suffering mentioned in 8:35. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these kinds of suffering” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1533	8:37	iui3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὑπερνικῶμεν	1	Here, more than conquerors refers to those who have complete victory over their enemies. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we have complete victory” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1534	8:37	wcm6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς	1	Here, the one who loved us could refer to: (1) Christ, as in 8:35. Alternate translation: “through Christ, who loved us” (2) God, as in 8:39. Alternate translation: “through God, who loved us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1535	8:38	fch1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse is an explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1536	8:38	dgky		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πέπεισμαι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God convinced me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1537	8:38	ok7f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	θάνατος & ζωὴ & ἀρχαὶ & δυνάμεις	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of death, life, governments, or powers, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “being dead … being alive … those who govern … powerful things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1538	8:38	js9q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀρχαὶ	1	Here, governments could refer to: (1) demons, which is usually how Paul uses this word (1 Corinthians 15:24, Ephesians 6:12). Alternate translation: “ruling demons” (2) human kings and rulers. Alternate translation: “human rulers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1539	8:38	q7ti		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δυνάμεις	1	This could refer to: (1) demons with power, which is how Paul uses this word in 1 Corinthians 15:24 and Ephesians 1:21. Alternate translation: “demonic powers” (2) human beings with power. Alternate translation: “powerful people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1540	8:39	ppaz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὕψωμα & βάθος	1	Here, height refers to everything that exists above a person, and depth refers to everything that exists below a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everything that is above us … everything that is below us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1541	8:39	ajct		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τις κτίσις ἑτέρα	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “any other thing that God has created” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1542	8:39	sd7j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	δυνήσεται ἡμᾶς χωρίσαι ἀπὸ τῆς ἀγάπης τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	See how you translated the similar phrase in 8:35. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1543	8:39	fr5b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	Here, which marks that Paul is giving further information about the love of God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases more clear. Alternate translation: “that is, the love of God in Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
1544	8:39	tot5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	See how you translated this phrase in 6:23. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1545	9:intro	w6f4				0	Romans 9 General Notes Structure and Formatting God’s plan for Israel (9:1–11:36) Paul’s sorrow for Israel’s unbelief (9:1–5) God chooses whom he wants to choose (9:6–13) God shows mercy on whom he wants to show mercy (9:14–18) No one can question God’s choice (9:19–33) Chapter 9 begins a new topic in this letter. In chapters 9-11, Paul focuses on the nation of Israel. Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with 9:25-29 and 33 of this chapter. Paul quotes all of these words from the Old Testament. Special Concepts in this Chapter Predestination Many scholars believe that in this chapter Paul teaches extensively on a subject known as “predestination.” Some take this to indicate that God has chosen to save some people from before the world existed. Christians have different views on what the Bible teaches on this subject, so translators need to take extra care when translating this chapter. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/predestine]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/save]]) Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter Stone of stumbling In 9:30–33 Paul explains that God made some Gentiles righteous because they believed in Jesus, but most Jews rejected Jesus because they were trying to obey the law of Moses to become righteous. Paul quotes Isaiah 8:14 and 28:16 to describe Jesus as if he were a stone that the Jews trip over when walking. See the translations and notes for how Peter uses these same verses from Isaiah in 1 Peter 2:6, 8. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1546	9:1	yg93		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἀλήθειαν λέγω ἐν Χριστῷ, οὐ ψεύδομαι	1	These two expressions mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize that he is telling the truth. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I am telling you the absolute truth in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1547	9:1	igs8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ	1	See how you translated the similar phrase in 3:24. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1548	9:1	h9mp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	συνμαρτυρούσης μοι τῆς συνειδήσεώς	1	Here Paul uses conscience as if it were a person bearing witness in a courtroom. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated a similar phrase in 2:15. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1549	9:1	dsaj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ	1	Here, in the Holy Spirit indicates that the Holy Spirit is the one who guided Paul’s conscience. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by the guidance of the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1550	9:2	jx3a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	λύπη μοί ἐστιν μεγάλη, καὶ ἀδιάλειπτος ὀδύνη τῇ καρδίᾳ μου	1	Here, unceasing pain in my heart is an idiom that Paul uses to share his emotional distress. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am experiencing great and unceasing sorrow” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1551	9:2	jky1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	λύπη & μεγάλη, καὶ ἀδιάλειπτος ὀδύνη	1	These two expressions mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize how intense his emotions are. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “exceedingly great sorrow” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1552	9:3	sju1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows is the reason why the previous statement is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is true since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1553	9:3	b1g6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀνάθεμα εἶναι αὐτὸς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of accursed, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “myself to be cursed” or “myself to be an accursed person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1554	9:3	rh5h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀπὸ τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God separating me from Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1555	9:3	oma4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀπὸ τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here, separated from Christ refers to the idea of Paul losing his salvation, which is impossible. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “eternally kept apart from Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1556	9:3	og9y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὑπὲρ τῶν ἀδελφῶν μου	1	Here, for the sake of implies that Paul is talking about the salvation of his brothers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the sake of the salvation of my brothers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1557	9:3	gaim		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τῶν ἀδελφῶν μου	1	Although the term brothers is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “my brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1558	9:3	eg9b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῶν ἀδελφῶν μου	1	Here, brothers refers to Jews, who are Paul’s kinsmen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “my Jewish kinsmen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1559	9:3	gn5p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	τῶν συγγενῶν μου, κατὰ σάρκα	1	This clause gives further information about my brothers. If it might be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “who are those of my own race according to the flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
1560	9:3	qckq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατὰ σάρκα	1	See how you translated according to the flesh in 1:3. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1561	9:4	p1ys		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	οἵτινές εἰσιν Ἰσραηλεῖται	1
1562	9:4	jfzg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ υἱοθεσία & ἡ δόξα & ἡ νομοθεσία & ἡ λατρεία & αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of adoption, glory, law-giving, service, and promises, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “being adopted … glorious things … being given the law … serving … what has been promised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1563	9:4	l6vs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἡ υἱοθεσία	1	Here, adoption refers to the idea that the Israelites were like God’s children. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the status as God’s children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1564	9:4	n2vu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἡ νομοθεσία	1	Here, the law-giving refers to God giving his laws to the Jews. If it might be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the giving of God’s laws to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1565	9:4	vu6j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἡ λατρεία	1	Here, the service refers to Jewish worship in the temple, which was a way of serving God. If it might be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “serving God in his temple” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1566	9:5	tic7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἱ πατέρες	1	Here, the fathers refers to the first ancestors of the Israelites, who are Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “are Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1567	9:5	q5w4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατὰ σάρκα	1	See how you translated according to the flesh in 1:3 and 8:3. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1568	9:5	offl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ ὢν ἐπὶ πάντων	1	This clause refers to the Christ, mentioned earlier in the verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this connection clearer. Alternate translation: “Christ is the one who is over all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1569	9:5	l07v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ ὢν ἐπὶ πάντων	1	The phrase is over all implies ruling as king over all things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the one who reigns over all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1570	9:5	blop		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Θεὸς, εὐλογητὸς	1	Here, blessed God refers to Jesus. It does not refer to Father God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “he is the blessed God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1571	9:6	equ8			οὐχ οἷον & ὅτι ἐκπέπτωκεν ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Alternate translation: “it is not as if the word of God has failed” or “the word of God has not failed”
1572	9:6	vedq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐκπέπτωκεν ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here Paul speaks about the word of God as if it were a person who had not failed. He means that what God has said will certainly happen as he said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the word of God will remain unfulfilled” or “the word of God has proved false” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1573	9:6	bmq6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here, the word of God refers to what God promised to do for Israel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God’s word of promise” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1574	9:6	r8se		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that this sentence gives the reason why what Paul said in the previous sentence is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1575	9:6	wy8z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐ & πάντες οἱ ἐξ Ἰσραήλ οὗτοι, Ἰσραήλ	1	Here Paul uses the word Israel in two different ways. The phrase all the ones from Israel refers to all the physical descendants of Jacob, whom God also called Israel. However, the second occurrence of Israel refers to physical descendants of Jacob who trust in Jesus. If it might be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “not all the ones from physical Israel are part of spiritual Israel” or “not every physical Israelite is a true Israelite” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1576	9:7	s3rj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	οὐδ’ ὅτι εἰσὶν σπέρμα Ἀβραάμ πάντες τέκνα	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Neither is it such a thing that all the children are seed of Abraham” or “Neither is it true that all the children are seed of Abraham” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1577	9:7	m5av		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πάντες τέκνα	1	Here, children refers specifically to “the children of Israel,” which is a name for the Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “all the children of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1578	9:7	kpls		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πάντες τέκνα	1	Here, children refers to someone’s descendants. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all the descendants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1579	9:7	y86t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σπέρμα Ἀβραάμ & σοι σπέρμα	1	Here, seed refers to refers to physical descendants of Abraham who trust in Jesus, as did the second occurrence of “Israel” in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “true descendants of Abraham … your true seed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1580	9:7	kbnn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	ἀλλ’	1	But ere indicates that what follows in some way contradicts what was said previously. Here, Paul is using a quotation from an Old Testament book (Genesis 21:12). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “But God says in the Scriptures,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
1581	9:7	z2f3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ἐν Ἰσαὰκ κληθήσεταί σοι σπέρμα	1	This sentence is a quotation from Genesis 21:12. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1582	9:7	wam8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ἐν Ἰσαὰκ κληθήσεταί σοι σπέρμα	1	Here, your refers to Abraham, and so, it is singular. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Abraham, in Isaac your seed will be called” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
1583	9:7	obgo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν Ἰσαὰκ	1	Here, in Isaac means “through the descendants of Isaac.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “through Isaac’s descendants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1584	9:7	i640		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κληθήσεταί σοι σπέρμα	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The context indicates that God is the one who will do the action, and he is speaking in first person. Alternate translation: “I will call your seed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1585	9:8	yhq8			τοῦτ’ ἔστιν	1	Alternate translation: “Another way to say this is”
1586	9:8	s5xa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὰ τέκνα τῆς σαρκὸς,	1	Here, children of the flesh refers to the physical descendants of Abraham. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Abraham’s physical descendants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1587	9:8	y17u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τέκνα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	See how you translated this phrase in the 8:16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1588	9:8	ta8t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὰ τέκνα τῆς ἐπαγγελίας	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe children who are the result of the promise. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the children who result from the promise” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1589	9:8	z5no		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ἐπαγγελίας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of promise, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “who had been promised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1590	9:8	h751		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῆς ἐπαγγελίας	1	Here, the promise refers to God’s promise to give Abraham descendants. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the promise God made to Abraham” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1591	9:8	p768		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σπέρμα	1	See how you translated seed in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1592	9:9	f4ap		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces an explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1593	9:9	ptfv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	ἐπαγγελίας & ὁ λόγος οὗτος	1	This phrase indicates that what follows is a quotation from an Old Testament book (Genesis 18:10, 14). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “this is the word of promise that God spoke in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
1594	9:9	up57		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐπαγγελίας & ὁ λόγος	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a word that is a promise. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the word that was promised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1595	9:9	vplh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπαγγελίας & ὁ λόγος	1	Here, Paul used the term word to describe what God had said by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s spoken promise” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1596	9:9	sufo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	κατὰ τὸν καιρὸν τοῦτον, ἐλεύσομαι, καὶ ἔσται τῇ Σάρρᾳ υἱός	1	This sentence is a quotation from Genesis 18:10, 14. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1597	9:9	r9dw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐλεύσομαι	1	The pronoun I here refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, will come” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1598	9:9	hxl1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	Here, and indicates that what follows this word is related to what came before it. Here, and indicates that what follows is the result of what happened in the previous clause. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a result. Alternate translation: “and the result will be that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1599	9:9	h4kf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἔσται τῇ Σάρρᾳ υἱός	1	This clause is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “a son will be born to Sarah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1600	9:9	wqb2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἔσται τῇ Σάρρᾳ υἱός	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Sarah will have a son” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1601	9:10	icc1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὐ μόνον δέ	1	Here, this refers to what Paul said in the previous verse, which was an example of God’s promises. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Now, this is not the only example” or “Now, what God promised Abraham is not the only example” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1602	9:10	nqkc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀλλὰ καὶ Ῥεβέκκα	1	Paul implies that God made a promise to Rebekah and he states that promise in 9:12. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “but Rebekah also received a promise from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1603	9:10	mb5q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν	1	Here, father refers to Isaac as the ancestor of the Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “our forefather” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1604	9:11	h16y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	The words for indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, for indicates that what follows gives further information about what Paul says in the previous verse and the next verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “in fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1605	9:11	ekxa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	γὰρ	1	Here Paul is referring to God choosing to bless Jacob instead of Esau, the twin sons of Rebekah and Isaac. However, he does not state this explicitly until 9:13. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for God chose to bless only one of Rebekah’s two sons,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1606	9:11	luly		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	μήπω & γεννηθέντων, μηδὲ πραξάντων τι ἀγαθὸν ἢ φαῦλον	1	Paul is leaving out some words that these clauses would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “her sons not yet having been born, nor indeed having done anything good or bad” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1607	9:11	h32d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	Here, so that indicates that what follows is the purpose for which God chose only one of Rebekah’s sons. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1608	9:11	a1gz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ & πρόθεσις τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of purpose, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what God had purposed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1609	9:11	ts50		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	κατ’ ἐκλογὴν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of election, you could express the same idea in another way. The context indicates that Paul is referring to God electing people. Alternate translation: “according to electing people” or “in relation to choosing people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1610	9:12	ze3m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων, ἀλλ’ ἐκ τοῦ καλοῦντος	1	Here Paul is referring to the election of one of Rebekah’s sons, Jacob, as stated in the next verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God did not elect Jacob by works, but by the one who calls” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1611	9:12	h6uj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔργων	1	Here, works refers to human actions in general. It does not refer to “the works of the law” because God had not yet given his law to Moses when Jacob and Esau lived. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “what people do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1612	9:12	d6mr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦ καλοῦντος	1	Here, the one who calls refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God who calls” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1613	9:12	sie3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	τοῦ καλοῦντος	1	Paul is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the word from the context. Alternate translation: “the one who calls people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1614	9:12	wv7n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐρρέθη αὐτῇ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God said to her” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1615	9:12	fcho		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	ἐρρέθη αὐτῇ	1	This phrase indicates that what follows is a quotation from an Old Testament book (Genesis 25:23). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “it was said to her, as recorded in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
1616	9:12	y9cc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτῇ	1	Here, the pronoun her refers to Rebekah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1617	9:12	hwwn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ὁ μείζων δουλεύσει τῷ ἐλάσσονι	1	This sentence is a quotation from Genesis 25:23. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1618	9:12	b8px		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ μείζων δουλεύσει τῷ ἐλάσσονι	1	The phrases the older and the younger refer to Rebekah’s older and younger twin sons. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1619	9:13	heon		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	See how you translated this phrase in 1:17. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
1620	9:13	mxfw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation was written by the prophet Malachi, and God is the person speaking. Alternate translation: “It is just as God had Malachi write” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1621	9:13	xt7t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	τὸν Ἰακὼβ ἠγάπησα, τὸν δὲ Ἠσαῦ ἐμίσησα	1	This sentence is a quotation from Malachi 1:2–3. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1622	9:13	jcfs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἠγάπησα & ἐμίσησα	1	The pronoun I here refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, loved … I hated” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1623	9:13	y3zu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἐμίσησα	1	Paul quotes God using the word hated as an exaggeration to say that he did not love Esau and had completely rejected him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I completely rejected” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1624	9:14	lf2k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν?	1	Here, then indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in 9:6–13. See how you translated this phrase in 6:1. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1625	9:14	m8xk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? μὴ ἀδικία παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ?	1	In these two sentences Paul is not asking for information, but is using questions to address an objection that some people may have to what he said in the previous verses because they misunderstood him. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as statements or exclamations or communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then we will say that God is truly unrighteous!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1626	9:14	xvei		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? μὴ ἀδικία παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ?	1	In these two sentences Paul is speaking as if he were a person who misunderstood what Paul had taught in the previous verses. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1627	9:14	ya6m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μὴ ἀδικία παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of unrighteousness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “There is no unrighteous character with God, is there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1628	9:14	euci		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μὴ ἀδικία παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ	1	Here Paul speaks of unrighteousness as if it were an object that could not be with God. He is referring to the idea of God being unrighteous. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God is not unrighteous, is he” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1629	9:14	s1hm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μὴ γένοιτο!	1	In this sentence Paul begins to respond to the rhetorical questions he wrote in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘May it never be!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1630	9:14	jrp5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	μὴ γένοιτο!	1	See how you translated this phrase in 3:4 and 6:2. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
1631	9:15	x9ri		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul said in the previous verse is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1632	9:15	k9i0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	τῷ Μωϋσεῖ γὰρ λέγει	1	Here Paul uses this clause to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book (Exodus 33:19). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “For he says to Moses that which is written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
1633	9:15	v2x6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	λέγει & ἐλεήσω & ἐλεῶ & οἰκτειρήσω & οἰκτείρω	1	The pronouns he and I here refer to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God says … ‘I, God, will have mercy … I will have mercy … I, God, will have compassion … I will have compassion’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1634	9:15	kq2c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1	Here Paul uses the present tense verb says to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
1635	9:15	c2t0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ἐλεήσω ὃν ἂν ἐλεῶ, καὶ οἰκτειρήσω ὃν ἂν οἰκτείρω	1	This sentence is a quotation from Exodus 33:19. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1636	9:15	f61q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐλεήσω ὃν ἂν ἐλεῶ, καὶ οἰκτειρήσω ὃν ἂν οἰκτείρω	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of mercy and compassion, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “I will act mercifully to whomever I will act mercifully, and I will act compassionately to whomever I will act compassionately” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1637	9:15	f1hi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	ἐλεήσω ὃν ἂν ἐλεῶ, καὶ οἰκτειρήσω ὃν ἂν οἰκτείρω	1	These statements use parallelism internally and between each other. They emphasize that God does whatever he wants. If it would be helpful in your language, consider using another form that emphasizes that God is graciously kind to exactly those and only those to whom he chooses to show kindness, and he does so without outside influence. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1638	9:16	y06j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἄρα οὖν	1	So then indicates that what follows in this verse summarizes the ideas of 9:11–15. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a clearer expression. See how you translated this phrase in 5:18. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1639	9:16	hn5j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὐ	1	Here, it refers to God acting mercifully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God’s mercy is not” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1640	9:16	d4f5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τοῦ θέλοντος, οὐδὲ τοῦ τρέχοντος, ἀλλὰ & Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe what God’s mercy does or does not depend on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “depending on the one who wills, nor depending on the one who runs, but depending on God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1641	9:16	ues3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῦ τρέχοντος	1	Here Paul uses the one who runs to refer to a person who does good things to try to gain God’s favor as if that person were running a race. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who tries to gain favor” or “the one who works very hard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1642	9:16	plbr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	τοῦ ἐλεῶντος	1	This phrase gives further information about God. If it might be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “he being the one who has mercy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
1643	9:16	p1fn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τοῦ ἐλεῶντος	1	See how you translated mercy in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1644	9:17	st77		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows is the another reason why what Paul said in 9:14 is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “What I said previously is also true, due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1645	9:17	x1cj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	λέγει & ἡ Γραφὴ τῷ Φαραὼ	1	Here Paul uses the scripture as if it were a person who could speak. He means that the scripture he is about to quote contains information that God said to Pharaoh. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God says to Pharaoh in the scripture” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1646	9:17	e0r9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	λέγει & ἡ Γραφὴ τῷ Φαραὼ	1	This phrase indicates that what follows is a quotation from an Old Testament book (Exodus 9:16). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “God said to Pharaoh in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
1647	9:17	w1ki		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1	Here Paul uses the present tense verb says to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
1648	9:17	ipl3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ὅτι εἰς αὐτὸ τοῦτο ἐξήγειρά σε, ὅπως ἐνδείξωμαι ἐν σοὶ τὴν δύναμίν μου, καὶ ὅπως διαγγελῇ τὸ ὄνομά μου ἐν πάσῃ τῇ γῇ	1	This sentence is a quotation from Exodus 9:16. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1649	9:17	wfwo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	αὐτὸ τοῦτο	1	See how you translated purpose in 9:11. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1650	9:17	xu7s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐξήγειρά σε & ἐνδείξωμαι & μου	1	Here the pronouns I and my refer to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, raised you up … I might demonstrate my” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1651	9:17	pz5x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐξήγειρά σε	1	Paul quotes God using the phrase raised you up to refer to causing someone to become king. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I caused you to become king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1652	9:17	nfv5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	σε & σοὶ	1	Both occurrences of you in this verse are singular and refer to Pharaoh. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
1653	9:17	ho3g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ὅπως & ὅπως	1	Both occurrences of so that in this verse introduce purpose clauses. Use a natural way in your language for introducing purpose clauses. Alternate translation: “for the purpose that … for the purpose that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1654	9:17	dp4p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν δύναμίν μου	1	See how you translated power in 1:16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1655	9:17	wspw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν σοὶ	1	Paul quotes God speaking of his power as if it were an object that could be in Pharaoh. He means that Pharaoh is the means by which God would show his power. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by means of you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1656	9:17	gps5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὅπως διαγγελῇ τὸ ὄνομά μου	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that people might proclaim my name” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1657	9:17	jp6i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ ὄνομά μου	1	Here, my name represents God himself. If it might be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “who I am” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1658	9:18	qlty		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἄρα οὖν	1	So then indicates that what follows in this verse summarizes the ideas of 9:14–17. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a clearer expression. See how you translated this phrase in 5:18 and in 9:16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1659	9:18	jrj5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	θέλει, ἐλεεῖ & θέλει, σκληρύνει	1	In this verse he refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God has mercy … he wills … God wills … he hardens” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1660	9:18	bf3a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐλεεῖ	1	See how you translated mercy in 9:15. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1661	9:18	qzvz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σκληρύνει	1	Here, he hardens refers to causing someone to become stubborn. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he causes to become stubborn” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1662	9:19	z4j2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ἐρεῖς	1	You here is singular and refers to a hypothetical person who opposes Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “You people who oppose me will say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
1663	9:19	r6r7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐρεῖς μοι οὖν	1	Here, then indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in 9:14–18. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then you will respond to what I just said by saying to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1664	9:19	zt94		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	μοι	1	The pronoun me here refers to Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to me, Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1665	9:19	bbe4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ἔτι μέμφεται? τῷ γὰρ βουλήματι αὐτοῦ, τίς ἀνθέστηκεν?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using these two questions here to express the objections that someone who opposes him might have to what he said in 9:14–18. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then he should not find fault with us! No one has ever been able to withstand his will!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1666	9:19	eqph		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	τί οὖν	1	Here, then indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in 9:14–18. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “If these things are true, then why” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1667	9:19	hqr7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	μέμφεται & αὐτοῦ	1	In this verse the pronouns he and his refer to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “does God … find fault … God’s” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1668	9:19	zioz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἔτι μέμφεται	1	Here, find fault refers to blaming someone for doing something bad. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “does he blame us for our sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1669	9:20	n1ti		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὦ ἄνθρωπε	1	In this verse Paul begins to respond to the rhetorical questions from his hypothetical opponent in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘O man’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1670	9:20	g7mn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ὦ ἄνθρωπε, μενοῦνγε σὺ τίς εἶ, ὁ ἀνταποκρινόμενος τῷ Θεῷ? μὴ ἐρεῖ τὸ πλάσμα, τῷ πλάσαντι, τί με ἐποίησας οὕτως?	1	In this verse Paul is responding to the rhetorical questions from his hypothetical opponent in the previous verse. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1671	9:20	hci6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ὦ ἄνθρωπε,	1	O man here is an exclamation word that here communicates indignance. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. Alternate translation: “How dare you, man!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
1672	9:20	uu1t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπε	1	Although the term man is masculine, Paul is using the word here to emphasize human weakness. Alternate translation: “human being” or “mere mortal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1673	9:20	r5uu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	μενοῦνγε σὺ τίς εἶ, ὁ ἀνταποκρινόμενος τῷ Θεῷ?	1	Here, the one answering against God gives further information about who you is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these words clearer. Alternate translation: “who indeed are you who answer against God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
1674	9:20	qvsd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	μενοῦνγε σὺ τίς εἶ, ὁ ἀνταποκρινόμενος τῷ Θεῷ?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize his outrage at what was said in the previous verse. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you who are answering against God indeed are nothing!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1675	9:20	i3fa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	σὺ	1	Here, you is singular and refers to a hypothetical person who opposes Paul. See how you translated this word in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
1676	9:20	knb3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	μὴ ἐρεῖ τὸ πλάσμα, τῷ πλάσαντι, τί με ἐποίησας οὕτως?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “The one molded surely must not say to the one having molded it, ‘Why did you make me this way?’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1677	9:20	y6jz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	μὴ ἐρεῖ τὸ πλάσμα, τῷ πλάσαντι, τί με ἐποίησας οὕτως?	1	Here Paul speaks of a person whom God created as if that person were an object that was molded by God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The created person surely must not say to the one having created him, ‘Why did you make me this way?’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1678	9:20	styp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸ πλάσμα	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The one whom God molded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1679	9:20	s9hg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῷ πλάσαντι	1	Here, the one having molded it refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to God, who molded it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1680	9:20	dzn4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	μὴ ἐρεῖ τὸ πλάσμα, τῷ πλάσαντι, τί με ἐποίησας οὕτως	1	If you translated this verse as a direct quotation, then this sentence would be a direct quotation inside a direct quotation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “The one molded will not ask the one having molded it why he made it this way. Will it?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1681	9:20	wcj3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί με ἐποίησας οὕτως	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize what his hypothetical opponent is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not have made me this way!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1682	9:21	e94a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἢ οὐκ ἔχει ἐξουσίαν ὁ κεραμεὺς τοῦ πηλοῦ, ἐκ τοῦ αὐτοῦ φυράματος ποιῆσαι ὃ μὲν εἰς τιμὴν σκεῦος, ὃ δὲ εἰς ἀτιμίαν?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “The potter surely has authority over the clay to make from the same lump not only what is a vessel for honor, but also what is for dishonor!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1683	9:21	nsdy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor	ἢ οὐκ ἔχει ἐξουσίαν ὁ κεραμεὺς τοῦ πηλοῦ, ἐκ τοῦ αὐτοῦ φυράματος ποιῆσαι ὃ μὲν εἰς τιμὴν σκεῦος, ὃ δὲ εἰς ἀτιμίαν?	1	Paul speaks about God’s authority over people by using the metaphor of a potter and his clay. Paul means that God has the right to do whatever he wants with people, because he made them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “Or does God not have authority over us like a potter has authority over the clay to make from the same lump not only what is a vessel for honor, but also what is for dishonor?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
1684	9:21	falq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἢ οὐκ ἔχει ἐξουσίαν ὁ κεραμεὺς τοῦ πηλοῦ, ἐκ τοῦ αὐτοῦ φυράματος ποιῆσαι ὃ μὲν εἰς τιμὴν σκεῦος, ὃ δὲ εἰς ἀτιμίαν?	1	A potter is a person who makes containers out of a type of soil called clay that becomes hard after it is heated. The potter takes a lump of clay and forms it into different kinds of containers that are used for various purposes. If your readers would not be familiar with clay containers, you could use the name of a different type of material that is used in your area to make containers, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “Or does the person who makes something not have authority over his materials to make from those materials not only what is a vessel for honor, but also what is for dishonor?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1685	9:21	lm6k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς τιμὴν σκεῦος & εἰς ἀτιμίαν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of honor and dishonor, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “a vessel for what is honorable … for what is dishonorable” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1686	9:21	pe9t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰς τιμὴν σκεῦος & εἰς ἀτιμίαν	1	Here, honor and dishonor refer to how these vessels will be used. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a vessel for honorable use … for dishonorable use” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1687	9:22-24	gk5u				0	General Information: 9:22–24 are one long sentence. If you divide these verses into multiple sentences, as the UST does, then you may need to repeat some phrases in order to make the meaning clear.
1688	9:22	a9tl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	εἰ	1	Here Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context, especially the idea in 9:20 that no one can speak against God. Alternate translation: “what can you say against God if” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1689	9:22	afmb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	εἰ	1	Here, what if indicates the beginning of one long rhetorical question that extends from 9:22 to 9:24. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you cannot possibly say anything against God if” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1690	9:22	dzpq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	Here, if indicates the beginning of a conditional sentence that extends from 9:22 to 9:24. Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “you cannot possibly say anything against God since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
1691	9:22	cqto		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	θέλων & ἐνδείξασθαι τὴν ὀργὴν, καὶ γνωρίσαι τὸ δυνατὸν αὐτοῦ, ἤνεγκεν ἐν πολλῇ μακροθυμίᾳ, σκεύη ὀργῆς κατηρτισμένα εἰς ἀπώλειαν	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “endured with much patience vessels of wrath prepared for destruction, willing to demonstrate his wrath and to make his power known” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1692	9:22	bqkv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	θέλων & ἐνδείξασθαι τὴν ὀργὴν	1	This clause could indicate: (1) the reason why God endured vessels of wrath. Alternate translation: “as a result of being willing to demonstrate his wrath” (2) a contrast between God being willing to demonstrate his wrath and enduring vessels of wrath. Alternate translation: “even though he was willing to demonstrate his wrath” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1693	9:22	yyyp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ὀργὴν, καὶ γνωρίσαι τὸ δυνατὸν αὐτοῦ, ἤνεγκεν ἐν πολλῇ μακροθυμίᾳ, σκεύη ὀργῆς κατηρτισμένα εἰς ἀπώλειαν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of wrath, power, patience, and destruction, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how wrathful he is and to make known how powerful he is, being very patient, endured vessels for being wrathful against that were prepared for being destroyed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1694	9:22	cj94		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γνωρίσαι τὸ δυνατὸν αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to make people know his power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1695	9:22	we86		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σκεύη ὀργῆς	1	Paul refers to people as if they were vessels. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “people of wrath” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1696	9:22	ba9v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	σκεύη ὀργῆς	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe vessels that deserve wrath. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “vessels that deserve wrath” or “people who deserve wrath” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1697	9:22	at71		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	κατηρτισμένα εἰς ἀπώλειαν	1	This phrase gives further information about the vessels of wrath. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “who are the ones prepared for destruction” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
1698	9:22	o4ub		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κατηρτισμένα εἰς ἀπώλειαν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The one who does the action could be: (1) God, who is the main subject of this verse. Alternate translation: “God prepared for destruction” (2) the people themselves. Alternate translation: “who prepared themselves for destruction” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1699	9:22	bney		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	κατηρτισμένα εἰς ἀπώλειαν	1	The word for indicates that what follows this word connects to what came before it. Here, for indicates the purpose for which the vessels of wrath were prepared. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “prepared for purpose of being destroyed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1700	9:22	webu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰς ἀπώλειαν	1	Here, destruction refers to experiencing punishment forever in hell. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for experiencing eternal destruction” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1701	9:23	rtom		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ	1	Here, and indicates that this verse continues the sentence that Paul began in the previous verse. If you divide the sentence into shorter sentences, you will need to repeat some of the information from the previous verse here. Alternate translation: “What if God also endured vessels of wrath so that” or “God also endured vessels of wrath so that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1702	9:23	u6tn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα & εἰς	1	Here, so that and for indicate purpose clauses. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose that … for the purpose of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1703	9:23	ufj7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	γνωρίσῃ & αὐτοῦ & προητοίμασεν	1	In this verse the pronouns he and his refer to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God might make known … God’s … God prepared beforehand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1704	9:23	o1fl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γνωρίσῃ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he might make people know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1705	9:23	hgau		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸν πλοῦτον	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of riches, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the rich character” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1706	9:23	iq94		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ & ἐλέους & εἰς δόξαν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of glory and mercy, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “of how glorious he is … toward which he acts mercifully … for being glorious” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1707	9:23	ojeo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸν πλοῦτον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a glory that is characterized by wealth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “his rich glory” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1708	9:23	she3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	σκεύη ἐλέους	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe vessels that will receive God’s mercy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “vessels that will receive mercy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1709	9:23	v33r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σκεύη ἐλέους	1	See how you translated vessels in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1710	9:23	kuim		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	ἃ προητοίμασεν εἰς δόξαν	1	This clause gives further information about the vessels of mercy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “who are the ones he prepared beforehand for glory” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
1711	9:23	jcjx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς δόξαν	1	Here, for indicates the purpose for which the vessels of mercy were prepared. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “prepared for the purpose of being glorified” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1712	9:23	t41s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰς δόξαν	1	Here, glory refers to experiencing glory forever with God in heaven. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for experiencing eternal glory” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1713	9:24	yowi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ & ἡμᾶς	1	Here, even indicates that this verse continues the sentence that Paul began in 9:22. If you divide the sentence into shorter sentences, you will need to repeat some of the information from the previous verses here. Alternate translation: “What if even we are vessels of mercy” or “Even we are vessels of mercy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1714	9:24	y6vp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς	1	Here, us refers to Paul and his Christian readers, so us would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1715	9:24	t8rn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐκάλεσεν	1	Here, he refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God called” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1716	9:24	zp1t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	οὐ μόνον ἐξ Ἰουδαίων, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐξ ἐθνῶν	1	This phrase gives further information about the people whom God called. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “who are those people not only from the Jews, but also from the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
1717	9:25	eqc2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	ὡς καὶ ἐν τῷ Ὡσηὲ λέγει	1	This phrase indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse are quotations from an Old Testament book (Hosea 2:23; 1:10). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “As he says also in the scripture written by Hosea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
1718	9:25	ewb4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	λέγει & καλέσω & μου & μου	1	Here, he, I, and my refer to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God says … I, God, will call … my … my” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1719	9:25	is9f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1	Here Paul uses the present tense verb says to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
1720	9:25	f0rx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	καλέσω τὸν οὐ λαόν μου, λαόν μου, καὶ τὴν οὐκ ἠγαπημένην, ἠγαπημένην	1	This sentence is a quotation from Hosea 2:23. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1721	9:25	yy15		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὴν οὐκ ἠγαπημένην, ἠγαπημένην	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one whom I did not love, ‘One I love’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1722	9:26	t46e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	καὶ ἔσται ἐν τῷ τόπῳ οὗ ἐρρέθη αὐτοῖς, οὐ λαός μου ὑμεῖς, ἐκεῖ κληθήσονται υἱοὶ Θεοῦ ζῶντος	1	This verse is a quotation from Hosea 1:10. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1723	9:26	ciif		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐρρέθη	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The context indicates that God said this in first person. Alternate translation: “I said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1724	9:26	yh4w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κληθήσονται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The one doing the action could be: (1) God. Alternate translation: “I will call them” (2) people in general. Alternate translation: “people will call them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1725	9:26	wpuw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	υἱοὶ Θεοῦ ζῶντος	1	See how you translated sons in 8:14. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1726	9:26	brl6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	Θεοῦ ζῶντος	1	Here, the living God could refer to: (1) God being the one who lives. Alternate translation: “the God who is alive” (2) God being the one who makes living things become alive. Alternate translation: “the God who gives life” or “the God who makes alive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1727	9:27	oej1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	Ἠσαΐας δὲ κράζει ὑπὲρ τοῦ Ἰσραήλ	1	This phrase indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse is a quotation from an Old Testament book (Isaiah 10:22–23). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “But, as recorded in the Scriptures, Isaiah cries out concerning Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
1728	9:27	zqi1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture	κράζει	1	Here Paul uses the present tense verb cries out to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “cried out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
1729	9:27	xjca		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	Ἰσραήλ	1	Here, Israel refers to the Israelites. They are the descendants of Jacob, whom God also called Israel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Israelites” or “the descendants of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1730	9:27	kgza		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ἐὰν ᾖ ὁ ἀριθμὸς τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραὴλ, ὡς ἡ ἄμμος τῆς θαλάσσης, τὸ ὑπόλειμμα σωθήσεται.	1	This sentence is the beginning of a quotation from Isaiah 10:22–23. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1731	9:27	b0is		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραὴλ	1	Here, the word sons means refers to descendants. Paul quotes Isaiah identifying the Israelites as descendants of their ancestor Jacob, who was also known as Israel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1732	9:27	qr8l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὡς ἡ ἄμμος τῆς θαλάσσης,	1	Paul quotes Isaiah leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “as the number of the grains of sand of the sea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1733	9:27	k9j8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile	ὡς ἡ ἄμμος τῆς θαλάσσης	1	Here Paul quotes Isaiah comparing the number of Israelites to the number of grains of sand beside the sea in order to emphasize how numerous they are. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “too many to count” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
1734	9:27	nstd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἡ ἄμμος τῆς θαλάσσης	1	Paul quotes Isaiah using the possessive form to describe the sand that is next to the sea. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the sand by the sea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1735	9:27	wek9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ ὑπόλειμμα	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of remnant, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “those who remain” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1736	9:27	wig1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σωθήσεται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will save” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1737	9:28	rupx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, for indicates that what follows is the reason why the statement in the previous verse is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is true since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1738	9:28	cm32		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	λόγον	1	Here, word refers to God’s promise to both punish the Israelites and save a remnant from among them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his promise to punish and save” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1739	9:28	pqri		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	συντελῶν	1	Here, finishing refers to successfully completing something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “successfully completing it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1740	9:28	md3o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	συντέμνων	1	Here, cutting it short refers to finish doing something quickly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “ending it quickly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1741	9:28	x832		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	συντελῶν καὶ συντέμνων	1	The end of this verse is the end of a quotation from Isaiah 10:22–23. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1742	9:29	gq8u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	καὶ καθὼς προείρηκεν Ἠσαΐας	1	This phrase indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse is a quotation from an Old Testament book (Isaiah 1:9). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “And just as Isaiah has said beforehand in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
1743	9:29	xem9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	εἰ μὴ Κύριος Σαβαὼθ ἐνκατέλιπεν ἡμῖν σπέρμα, ὡς Σόδομα ἂν ἐγενήθημεν, καὶ ὡς Γόμορρα ἂν ὡμοιώθημεν	1	This sentence is a quotation from Isaiah 1:9. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1744	9:29	dl9x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν & ἂν ἐγενήθημεν & ὡμοιώθημεν	1	In this verse us and we refer to Isaiah and those to whom he spoke, so us and we would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1745	9:29	iqy3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σπέρμα	1	Here, seed is singular but refers to a group of people. See how you translated seed in 4:13. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1746	9:29	yicp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὡς Σόδομα ἂν ἐγενήθημεν, καὶ ὡς Γόμορρα ἂν ὡμοιώθημεν	1	Paul’s readers would have known that Sodom and Gomorrah were cities that God completely destroyed because the people who lived in them were very wicked (Genesis 19). If your readers might not be familiar with this story, you could state this explicitly or indicate this in a note. Alternate translation: “we would have been destroyed like the people of Sodom, and we would have been destroyed like the people of Sodom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1747	9:29	mkmt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	ὡς Σόδομα ἂν ἐγενήθημεν, καὶ ὡς Γόμορρα ἂν ὡμοιώθημεν	1	These two phrases mean the same thing. Isaiah says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that Israel could have been completely destroyed by God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “we would have become just like Sodom and Gomorrah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1748	9:29	obdz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὡς Γόμορρα ἂν ὡμοιώθημεν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God would have made us like Gomorrah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1749	9:30	xv7y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	The word then indicates that what follows is a response. Here, then is a response to what Paul said in 9:20–29. See how you translated this phrase in 6:1. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1750	9:30	m5l2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form in this sentence to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then we will say this:” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1751	9:30	ki4k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὅτι ἔθνη	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “We will say that the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1752	9:30	bnl6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	τὰ μὴ διώκοντα δικαιοσύνην	1	This clause gives further information about the Gentiles. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “who are those people not pursuing righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
1753	9:30	x51u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δικαιοσύνην & δικαιοσύνην & δικαιοσύνην	1	See how you translated this word in 6:13. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1754	9:30	gl4m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐκ πίστεως	1	See how you translated this phrase in 4:16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1755	9:31	z133		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰσραὴλ	1	See how you translated this name in 9:27. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1756	9:31	f18n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	νόμον & νόμον	1	In this verse law refers to the laws that God gave the Jews by dictating them to Moses. See how you translated this use of law in 2:12. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
1757	9:31	x1o0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	νόμον δικαιοσύνης	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a law that was for the purpose of righteousness. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a law for righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1758	9:31	gjmu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δικαιοσύνης	1	See how you translated this word in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1759	9:32	y4pf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	διὰ τί?	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Why could they not attain righteousness?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1760	9:32	e7p7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	διὰ τί?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This is why:” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1761	9:32	fty2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὅτι οὐκ ἐκ πίστεως	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “They did not attain righteousness because it was not by faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1762	9:32	scnv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐκ πίστεως	1	See how you translated this phrase in 9:30. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1763	9:32	j5jp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐξ ἔργων	1	Paul assumes that his readers would understand that works means “works of the law.” See how you translated the same use of works in 4:2. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1764	9:32	s0r6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	προσέκοψαν	1	They stumbled over introduces a sentence that states the result of what Paul described in the previous sentence. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “As a result, they stumbled over” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1765	9:32	hzww		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	προσέκοψαν τῷ λίθῳ τοῦ προσκόμματος	1	Here Paul speaks of Christ as if he were a stone that the Jews stumbled over. He means that the Jews were offended by Christ because they tried to become righteous by works. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “They were offended by Jesus, like people who stumbled over a stone of stumbling” or “They were offended by Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1766	9:32	r14f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῷ λίθῳ τοῦ προσκόμματος	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a stone that causes stumbling. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the stone that causes stumbling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1767	9:33	kx9c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	See how you translated this phrase in [1:17]. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
1768	9:33	ivt3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation was written by the prophet Isaiah and God is the person speaking. Alternate translation: “just as Isaiah wrote” or “just as God said through Isaiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1769	9:33	uo7d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ἰδοὺ, τίθημι ἐν Σιὼν λίθον προσκόμματος, καὶ πέτραν σκανδάλου; καὶ ὁ πιστεύων ἐπ’ αὐτῷ, οὐ καταισχυνθήσεται.	1	This sentence is Paul’s paraphrase of parts of Isaiah 8:14 and 28:16. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1770	9:33	m6ll		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1	Paul quotes Isaiah using the term Behold to focus his listeners’ attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1771	9:33	hmmn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τίθημι	1	In this quotation from the Old Testament, I refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, place” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1772	9:33	dy6x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν Σιὼν	1	Here, Zion refers to the city of Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1773	9:33	mf6h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	λίθον προσκόμματος, καὶ πέτραν σκανδάλου & αὐτῷ	1	Here, stone of stumbling, rock of offense, and it refer to Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a person who will be like a stone of stumbling and a rock of offense” or “a person who will cause people to stumble and will offend them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1774	9:33	u3dj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	λίθον προσκόμματος, καὶ πέτραν σκανδάλου	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how offensive the Messiah would be to the Jews. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “a stone that causes great offense” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1775	9:33	h3tw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	λίθον προσκόμματος	1	See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1776	9:33	c8t8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	πέτραν σκανδάλου	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a rock that causes offense. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the rock that causes offense” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1777	9:33	knfh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	σκανδάλου	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of offense, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that offends” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1778	9:33	tu4i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ πιστεύων ἐπ’ αὐτῷ, οὐ καταισχυνθήσεται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will not shame the one who believes on it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1779	10:intro	c2li				0	Romans 10 General Notes Structure and Formatting God’s plan for Israel (9:1–11:36) Paul’s sorrow for Israel’s unbelief (9:1–5) God chooses whom he wants to choose (9:6–13) God shows mercy to whom he wants to show mercy (9:14–18) No one can question God’s choice (9:19–33) Israel’s false righteousness (10:1–4) Salvation is available to everyone (10:5–21) Some translations set prose quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words in 10:8. Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with 10:18-20 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament. Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter Rhetorical questions Paul uses many rhetorical questions in this chapter. He does this to convince his readers that God does not save only the Jewish people, so Christians must be ready to go and share the gospel with the whole world. (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/save]]) Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter Different uses of “they,” “them,” and “their” In 10:1–4, the pronouns “they,” “them,” and “their” always refer to the people of Israel. However, those pronouns refer to various things and people in 10:5–21, which will be addressed in the notes. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1780	10:1	hj4b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	See how you translated this word in 1:13. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1781	10:1	v3jp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ & εὐδοκία & ἡ δέησις & σωτηρίαν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of good pleasure, prayer, and salvation, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the very pleasing thing … what I pray … them to be saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1782	10:1	tq7k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῆς ἐμῆς καρδίας	1	Here, heart refers to a person’s inner being or mind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of my inner being” or “of my mind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1783	10:1	tmf2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτῶν	1	The pronoun them in 10:1–4 refers to Jewish people who do not believe in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1784	10:2	y7qg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, For indicates that what follows is the reason for what Paul said in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “I feel this way because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1785	10:2	adka		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ζῆλον & ἔχουσιν & οὐ κατ’ ἐπίγνωσιν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of zeal and full knowledge, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “they are zealous … not by fully knowing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1786	10:2	rjqd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ζῆλον Θεοῦ ἔχουσιν	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a zeal that is directed toward God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “they have a zeal for God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1787	10:2	pxyj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	οὐ κατ’ ἐπίγνωσιν	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “they have zeal of God that is not according to full knowledge” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1788	10:3	e7p2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, For indicates that what follows is the reason for what Paul said in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1789	10:3	bw97		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ δικαιοσύνην & τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	See how you translated the righteousness of God in 1:17. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1790	10:3	dgjn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἰδίαν δικαιοσύνην	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of righteousness, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “being righteous on their own” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1791	10:3	a6r4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ τοῦ Θεοῦ οὐχ ὑπετάγησαν	1	Here Paul speaks of the righteousness of God as if it were a person to whom someone could submit. He means that they refused to attain righteousness in the way God requires, which is by faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they refuse to receive the righteousness of God attained according to his way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1792	10:4	x1w8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, For indicates that what follows is the reason why the Jews were wrong to try to make themselves righteous, as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “They were wrong to seek to establish their own righteousness because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1793	10:4	y30a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τέλος & νόμου	1	Here, the completion of the law could mean: (1) the end of the law of Moses. Alternate translation: “is the end of the law” (2) the goal of the law of Moses. Alternate translation: “is the goal of the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1794	10:4	a9up		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τέλος	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of completion, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “is what completes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1795	10:4	y3sx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	νόμου	1	See how you translated the law in 2:12. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
1796	10:4	nprh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1	Here, for could indicate that: (1) righteousness was the purpose for the completion of the law. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of becoming righteous” (2) righteousness was the result of the completion of the law. Alternate translation: “resulting in righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1797	10:4	f6pu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δικαιοσύνην	1	See how you translated righteousness in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1798	10:4	z3z9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	παντὶ τῷ πιστεύοντι	1	See how you translated everyone who believes in 1:16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1799	10:5	vsyn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it indicates that this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1800	10:5	ozvf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	Μωϋσῆς & γράφει τὴν δικαιοσύνην τὴν ἐκ νόμου	1	Here Paul uses this clause to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book (Leviticus 18:5). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “Moses writes in the Scriptures about the righteousness that is from the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
1801	10:5	m8my		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture	γράφει	1	Here Paul uses the present tense verb writes to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
1802	10:5	qby2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν δικαιοσύνην τὴν ἐκ νόμου	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of righteousness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “about being righteous based on the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1803	10:5	dufv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	νόμου	1	See how you translated the law in 2:12 and in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
1804	10:5	jyjx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ὁ ποιήσας αὐτὰ ἄνθρωπος, ζήσεται ἐν αὐτῇ	1	In this sentence Paul quotes Leviticus 18:5. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1805	10:5	bh04		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπος	1	Although the term man is masculine, Paul quotes Moses using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “man or woman” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1806	10:5	kt66		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	αὐτὰ	1	Here, these things refers to everything that God commanded the Jews in the law of Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these things written in the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1807	10:5	e3po		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	αὐτὰ	1	Paul quotes Moses implying that the person must do all of these things perfectly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “all these things perfectly” or “every single one of these things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1808	10:5	qkz4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ζήσεται	1	Here, will live could refer to: (1) eternal life. Alternate translation: “will live forever” (2) a mortal life that God blesses. Alternate translation: “will stay alive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1809	10:5	gsls		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτῇ	1	Here, it refers to the law of Moses, which was called these things earlier in the verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1810	10:6	r3ey		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	ἡ & ἐκ πίστεως δικαιοσύνη οὕτως λέγει	1	Here Paul uses this clause to introduce quotations from an Old Testament book (Deuteronomy 9:4; 30:12–14). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “the righteousness by faith says thus in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
1811	10:6	sr9z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἡ & ἐκ πίστεως δικαιοσύνη & λέγει	1	Here, righteousness is described as if it were a person who could speak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the real meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “about the righteousness by faith, Moses says” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1812	10:6	cgv8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐκ πίστεως δικαιοσύνη	1	See how you translated righteousness in 6:13 and by faith in 4:16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1813	10:6	ksbr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1	Here Paul uses the present tense verb says to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
1814	10:6	ezma		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	μὴ εἴπῃς ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου, τίς ἀναβήσεται εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν?	1	In this sentence Paul quotes Deuteronomy 9:4 and Deuteronomy 30:12. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1815	10:6	x7h4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd	σου	1	Here Paul quotes Moses addressing the people of Israel as if he were speaking to only one person. The pronoun your is singular. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural form of your in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
1816	10:6	nwlw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῇ καρδίᾳ	1	See how you translated heart in 10:1. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1817	10:6	tf9r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίς ἀναβήσεται εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν?	1	Paul quotes Moses using a question to teach his audience. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely no one can ascend into heaven!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1818	10:6	gi7s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦτ’ ἔστιν Χριστὸν καταγαγεῖν	1	In this clause Paul explains the meaning of the previous sentence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “meaning, to make Christ come down to earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1819	10:6	y5c3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	Χριστὸν καταγαγεῖν	1	Here, to indicates that this is a purpose clause. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of bringing Christ down” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1820	10:7	g827		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	ἤ	1	Paul uses or here to connect a quotation from Deuteronomy 30:12 with a paraphrase of Deuteronomy 30:13. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that shows this explicitly. Alternate translation: “or do not to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
1821	10:7	j2t4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	τίς καταβήσεται εἰς τὴν Ἄβυσσον	1	In this sentence Paul paraphrases Deuteronomy 30:13. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1822	10:7	w8xe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίς καταβήσεται εἰς τὴν Ἄβυσσον?	1	Paul quotes Moses using a question to teach his audience. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely no one can descend into the abyss!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1823	10:7	gw0r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦτ’ ἔστιν Χριστὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναγαγεῖν	1	In this clause Paul explains the meaning of the previous sentence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “That means to make Christ come up from dead ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1824	10:7	iw13		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναγαγεῖν	1	See how you translated a similar phrase in 4:24. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1825	10:8	ian2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	τί λέγει?	1	Here Paul uses this clause to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book (Deuteronomy 30:14). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “what does it say in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
1826	10:8	sen1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί λέγει?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “it surely says,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1827	10:8	gz7t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	τί λέγει?	1	The word it refers to “the righteousness” referred to in 10:6. Here Paul continues to describe righteousness as if it were a person who could speak. See how you translated “the righteousness by faith says” in 10:6. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1828	10:8	n63g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1	Here Paul uses the present tense verb say to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “did it say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
1829	10:8	hybn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ἐγγύς σου τὸ ῥῆμά ἐστιν, ἐν τῷ στόματί σου, καὶ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου	1	In this sentence Paul quotes Deuteronomy 30:14. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1830	10:8	kzb2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐγγύς σου τὸ ῥῆμά ἐστιν, ἐν τῷ στόματί σου, καὶ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου	1	Paul quotes Moses speaking of the word as if it were an object that could be near or in someone. He means that God’s message could be easily known and spoken by Moses’ audience. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You can easily know and speak the word” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1831	10:8	sx8r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ ῥῆμά	1	Paul quotes Moses using word to describe what God has spoken by using words. This general reference to God’s word would include what God had said about the Messiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1832	10:8	wpvg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd	σου & σου & σου	1
1833	10:8	y6mq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ στόματί σου	1
1834	10:8	zvx4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου	1	See how you translated heart in 10:1. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1835	10:8	lh5d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ ῥῆμα τῆς πίστεως	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a word that is about faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the word about faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1836	10:8	v7ho		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς πίστεως	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “about believing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1837	10:8	o4oy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	κηρύσσομεν	1	Here, we refers to Paul and other Christians who proclaim the gospel, so we would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1838	10:9	q5un		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὅτι	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it indicates that what follows is an explanation of what “the word of faith” is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This word we proclaim is that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1839	10:9	pawz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd	ὁμολογήσῃς & σου & σου & σωθήσῃ	1	Paul addresses his readers as if he were speaking to only one person. The pronouns you and your are singular. See how you translated you and your in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
1840	10:9	tz7r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ στόματί σου	1	This phrase indicates the means by which a person confesses Jesus is Lord. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by using your mouth you confess, ‘Jesus is Lord’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1841	10:9	ie71		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου	1	See how you translated this phrase in 10:6 and 10:8. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1842	10:9	zdf5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	αὐτὸν ἤγειρεν ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	See how you translated a similar phrase in 4:24. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1843	10:9	c3cq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σωθήσῃ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will save you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1844	10:10	iv0v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here introduces the reason why what Paul said in the previous verse is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1845	10:10	g7i1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	καρδίᾳ & πιστεύεται	1	See how you translated the similar phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1846	10:10	g3nf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πιστεύεται & ὁμολογεῖται	1	The subjects of these phrases are implied from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “one believes that God raised Jesus from the dead … one confesses that Jesus is Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1847	10:10	o3a7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς δικαιοσύνην & εἰς σωτηρίαν	1	Both occurrences of to in this verse indicate that what follows them are results. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation (with a comma preceding both phrases): “resulting in righteousness … resulting in salvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1848	10:10	h20k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δικαιοσύνην	1	See how you translated this abstract noun in 10:6. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1849	10:10	xs8c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	στόματι & ὁμολογεῖται	1	See how you translated the similar phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1850	10:10	uroy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	σωτηρίαν	1	See how you translated this abstract noun in 10:1. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1851	10:11	rlqi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1852	10:11	r6tf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	λέγει & ἡ Γραφή	1	This phrase indicates that what follows is a quotation from an Old Testament book (Isaiah 28:16). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “God says in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
1853	10:11	gu99		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	λέγει & ἡ Γραφή	1	Here Paul uses the scripture as if it were a person who could speak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God says in the scripture” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1854	10:11	whdz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1	Here Paul uses the present tense verb says to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
1855	10:11	nv71		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πᾶς ὁ πιστεύων ἐπ’ αὐτῷ οὐ καταισχυνθήσεται	1	See how you translated this sentence in 9:33. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1856	10:12	ygv8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γάρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces another explanation for what Paul said in 10:10. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1857	10:12	fvlg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	οὐ & ἐστιν διαστολὴ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of distinction, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “God does not distinguish” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1858	10:12	z8p4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, for indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul said in the previous clause is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. You may need to start a new sentence, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1859	10:12	j7vw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	Κύριος πάντων	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the Lord who rules over all. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Lord is ruling over all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1860	10:12	r2jx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πάντων & πάντας	1	Paul is using the adjective all as a noun in order to describe a group of people. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “is of all people … all people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1861	10:12	p9py		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πλουτῶν	1	Here, being rich means to bless others generously. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “generously giving blessing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1862	10:12	oe6l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπικαλουμένους αὐτόν	1	Here, call on implies calling out to be saved. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “who call upon him to be saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1863	10:13	cxph		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, For indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1864	10:13	t4j7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	γὰρ	1	For here introduces a quotation from an Old Testament book (Joel 2:32). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “For Joel wrote in the Scriptures,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
1865	10:13	gpyj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	πᾶς & ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου, σωθήσεται	1	In this sentence Paul quotes Joel 2:32. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1866	10:13	qvbd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πᾶς	1	See how you translated all in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1867	10:13	n4yp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου	1	See how you translated “call on” in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1868	10:13	pe96		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου	1	Here, the name of the Lord represents the Lord himself. If it might be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1869	10:13	rht3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πᾶς & ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου, σωθήσεται	1	Here Paul implies that the Lord refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. However, since this sentence is a quotation from the Old Testament, you will need to state this outside of the quotation. Alternate translation: “all, whoever calls on the name of the Lord will be saved. This Lord is Jesus.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1870	10:13	js1b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πᾶς & ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου, σωθήσεται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will save all, whoever calls on the name of the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1871	10:14	utr4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	πῶς οὖν ἐπικαλέσωνται εἰς ὃν οὐκ ἐπίστευσαν? πῶς δὲ πιστεύσωσιν οὗ οὐκ ἤκουσαν? πῶς δὲ ἀκούσωσιν χωρὶς κηρύσσοντος?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using three rhetorical questions here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as statements or exclamations and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then surely they would not call on whom they have not believed! And surely they would not believe in whom they have not heard! And surely they would not hear without someone preaching!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1872	10:14	syzi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	πῶς οὖν	1	Here, then indicates that what follows in 10:14–15 is the logical conclusion to what Paul has stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “As a result, how” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1873	10:14	zqzi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐπικαλέσωνται & οὐκ ἐπίστευσαν & πιστεύσωσιν & οὐκ ἤκουσαν & ἀκούσωσιν	1	In this verse they refers to all people, both Jews and Gentiles, as stated in the previous two verses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “would all people call … they have not believed … would all people believe in … they have not heard … would all people hear” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1874	10:14	vww6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπικαλέσωνται εἰς ὃν οὐκ ἐπίστευσαν	1	See how you translated call on in 10:12. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1875	10:14	n02w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὃν οὐκ ἐπίστευσαν & οὗ οὐκ ἤκουσαν	1	These clauses refer to Jesus, whom Paul called the Lord in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus, whom they have not believed … Jesus, whom they have not heard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1876	10:14	mrl8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	οὗ οὐκ ἤκουσαν & ἀκούσωσιν & κηρύσσοντος	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that these sentences would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “whom they have not heard about … would they hear about him … someone preaching about him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1877	10:15	hcz3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	πῶς δὲ κηρύξωσιν ἐὰν μὴ ἀποσταλῶσιν	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “And surely they would not preach unless they would be sent!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1878	10:15	nqwf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	κηρύξωσιν & ἀποσταλῶσιν	1	In this verse they refers to the people who preach, as mentioned at the end of the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “would those who preach be able to preach … those preachers would be sent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1879	10:15	l0xu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀποσταλῶσιν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone sent them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1880	10:15	atg0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	See how you translated this phrase in 1:17. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
1881	10:15	ylan		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Isaiah wrote this quotation. Alternate translation: “Just as Isaiah wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1882	10:15	bb0k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ὡς ὡραῖοι οἱ πόδες τῶν εὐαγγελιζομένων τὰ ἀγαθά!	1	This sentence is a quotation of Isaiah 52:7. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1883	10:15	e8rt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὡς ὡραῖοι οἱ πόδες	1	Here, feet refers to the action of going to other people and telling them the good news. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “How beautiful is the going and preaching” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1884	10:16	gxqu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλ’	1	The word But introduces a contrast. Here, But indicates that what follows is in contrast to what Paul said in the previous two verses. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “By contrast,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
1885	10:16	hku8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὐ πάντες	1	Here, them could refer to (1) the Jews, who are the main topic of chapters 9–11. Alternate translation: “not all of the Jews” (2) all people, as in 10:13–15. Alternate translation: “not everyone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1886	10:16	dqe6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὑπήκουσαν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ	1	Here Paul speaks of the gospel as if it were a person who could be obeyed. Paul is referring to obeying the command to repent and believe the gospel, which is part of the gospel message. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “obeyed what God commanded in the gospel” or “believed the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1887	10:16	eze8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that this sentence explains what Paul said in the previous sentence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1888	10:16	o91x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	Ἠσαΐας & λέγει	1	Here Paul uses this clause to introduce quotations from an Old Testament book (Isaiah 53:1). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “Isaiah says in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
1889	10:16	e25r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1	Here Paul uses the present tense verb says to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
1890	10:16	jvah		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	Κύριε, τίς ἐπίστευσεν τῇ ἀκοῇ ἡμῶν?	1	This verse is a quotation from Isaiah 53:1. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1891	10:16	j3se		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	Κύριε, τίς ἐπίστευσεν τῇ ἀκοῇ ἡμῶν?	1	Isaiah is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Lord, surely no one has believed our report!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1892	10:16	z4s9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	τῇ ἀκοῇ ἡμῶν	1	Here, our refers to God and Isaiah, which would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1893	10:16	yore		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ἀκοῇ ἡμῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of report, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what we report” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1894	10:17	hqcv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἄρα	1	Here, So indicates that what follows in this verse summarizes the ideas of 10:14–16. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a clearer expression. Alternate translation: “Finally” or “In summary” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1895	10:17	qdug		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ πίστις	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what someone believes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1896	10:17	wu5a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἡ πίστις	1	Here, this faith refers to believing in Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “believing in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1897	10:17	xab6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἐξ ἀκοῆς	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “is received by hearing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1898	10:17	x765		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἀκοῆς & ἀκοὴ	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that these sentences would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “hearing about Jesus … hearing about him is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1899	10:17	nq87		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ῥήματος Χριστοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the word that is about Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the word about Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1900	10:17	aunq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ῥήματος	1	See how you translated this word in 10:8. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1901	10:18	a8bk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	The word But introduces a contrast. Here, But indicates that what follows is in contrast to what Paul said in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “By contrast” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
1902	10:18	teco		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	λέγω	1	The pronoun I here refers to Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1903	10:18	vkvg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	μὴ οὐκ ἤκουσαν	1	Here Paul is quoting himself. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1904	10:18	f6jy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	μὴ οὐκ ἤκουσαν?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “They most surely heard!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1905	10:18	djbd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἤκουσαν	1	See how you translated they in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1906	10:18	wxxj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	μὴ οὐκ	1	The phrase certainly not translates two negative words in Greek. Paul uses them together to emphasize what he is saying. If your language can use two negatives together for emphasis without them canceling each other to create a positive meaning, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1907	10:18	zux3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μὴ οὐκ ἤκουσαν	1	See how you translated hear in 10:14. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1908	10:18	lz77		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	εἰς πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ φθόγγος αὐτῶν; καὶ εἰς τὰ πέρατα τῆς οἰκουμένης, τὰ ῥήματα αὐτῶν	1	This sentence is a quotation from an Old Testament book (Psalm 19:4). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “David says in the Scriptures,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
1909	10:18	tnzy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	εἰς πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ φθόγγος αὐτῶν; καὶ εἰς τὰ πέρατα τῆς οἰκουμένης, τὰ ῥήματα αὐτῶν	1	In this sentence Paul quotes Psalm 19:4. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1910	10:18	s5zh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	εἰς πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ φθόγγος αὐτῶν; καὶ εἰς τὰ πέρατα τῆς οἰκουμένης, τὰ ῥήματα αὐτῶν	1	These two clauses mean the same thing. Paul quotes David saying the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “What they said went everywhere in the whole world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1911	10:18	g4vd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	εἰς πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ φθόγγος αὐτῶν; καὶ εἰς τὰ πέρατα τῆς οἰκουμένης, τὰ ῥήματα αὐτῶν	1	In this sentence, both Their and their refer to the sun, moon, and stars as if they were people who could make a sound or speak words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “The sun, moon, and the stars are proof that went out into all the earth, and they are proof to the ends of the world.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1912	10:18	e2nx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τὰ πέρατα τῆς οἰκουμένης	1	The phrase the ends of the world is an idiom that refers to every place on the earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everywhere on the earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1913	10:19	n3q8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἀλλὰ	1	Here, But indicates that what follows is in contrast to what Paul said in 10:17, in the same way that the statement in the previous verse contrasted 10:17. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use an expression that shows the agreement between this verse and the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Furthermore,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1914	10:19	uu9g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	λέγω	1	The pronoun I here refers to Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1915	10:19	imik		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	μὴ Ἰσραὴλ οὐκ ἔγνω & ἐγὼ παραζηλώσω ὑμᾶς, ἐπ’ οὐκ ἔθνει, ἐπ’ ἔθνει ἀσυνέτῳ, παροργιῶ ὑμᾶς	1	In these two sentences Paul is quoting himself and then the Old Testament. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1916	10:19	ib4m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	μὴ Ἰσραὴλ οὐκ ἔγνω?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Israel most surely knew!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1917	10:19	zyw0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	Ἰσραὴλ	1	Here Paul uses the word Israel to refer to the physical descendants of Jacob, whom God also called Israel. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1918	10:19	dkcp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	μὴ & οὐκ	1	The phrase certainly not translates two negative words in Greek. Paul uses them together to emphasize what he is saying. If your language can use two negatives together for emphasis without them canceling each other to create a positive meaning, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1919	10:19	k4gk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	Μωϋσῆς λέγει	1	Here Paul uses this phrase to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book (Deuteronomy 32:21). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “Moses says in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
1920	10:19	jjt3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Μωϋσῆς λέγει	1	This phrase means that Moses wrote down what God said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Moses wrote down that God said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1921	10:19	yt4r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1	Here Paul uses the present tense verb says to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
1922	10:19	qvfa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	ἐγὼ παραζηλώσω ὑμᾶς, ἐπ’ οὐκ ἔθνει, ἐπ’ ἔθνει ἀσυνέτῳ, παροργιῶ ὑμᾶς	1	These two clauses mean the same thing. Paul quotes God saying the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “I myself will make you jealous and angry by using a non-nation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1923	10:19	u7p4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐγὼ παραζηλώσω ὑμᾶς, & παροργιῶ ὑμᾶς	1	In this sentence the pronoun I here refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, myself will provoke you to jealousy … I will provoke you to anger” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1924	10:19	fklp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	ἐγὼ παραζηλώσω ὑμᾶς	1	God uses the word myself to emphasize who is provoking Israel to be jealous. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I am indeed the one who will provoke you to jealousy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
1925	10:19	vxzz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐγὼ παραζηλώσω ὑμᾶς & παροργιῶ ὑμᾶς	1	In this verse you refers to the Israelites. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I myself will provoke you Israelites to jealousy … I will provoke you Israelites to anger.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1926	10:19	o0gr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐγὼ παραζηλώσω ὑμᾶς & παροργιῶ ὑμᾶς	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of jealousy and anger, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “I myself will cause you to become jealous … I will cause you to become angry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1927	10:19	ve6t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπ’ οὐκ ἔθνει	1	The phrase a non-nation refers to a group of people with whom God did not previously have a relationship. The meaning of non-nation is similar to “not my people” used in 9:25–26. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by those people who did not belong to me” or “by those people whom I did not consider to be a nation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1928	10:19	s3nz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔθνει ἀσυνέτῳ	1	Here, senseless means that these people do not know God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by a nation with people who do not know me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1929	10:20	mrwz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	Ἠσαΐας δὲ ἀποτολμᾷ καὶ λέγει	1	Here Paul uses this phrase to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book (Isaiah 65:1). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “Isaiah is very bold, and he says in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
1930	10:20	kig6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture	ἀποτολμᾷ καὶ λέγει	1	Here Paul uses the present tense verbs is and says to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “was very bold, and he said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
1931	10:20	cv1x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ἠσαΐας & ἀποτολμᾷ καὶ λέγει	1	This phrase means that Isaiah wrote down what God said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Isaiah is very bold, and he wrote down that God said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1932	10:20	pp4f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	εὑρέθην ἐν τοῖς ἐμὲ μὴ ζητοῦσιν; ἐμφανὴς ἐγενόμην τοῖς ἐμὲ μὴ ἐπερωτῶσιν	1	In these two sentences Paul is quoting Isaiah 65:1 from the Old Testament. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1933	10:20	yoxf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	εὑρέθην & ἐμὲ & ἐμφανὴς & ἐμὲ	1	In this verse the pronoun I refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, was found … me; I, God, appeared … for me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1934	10:20	wona		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	εὑρέθην ἐν τοῖς ἐμὲ μὴ ζητοῦσιν; ἐμφανὴς ἐγενόμην τοῖς ἐμὲ μὴ ἐπερωτῶσιν	1	These two clauses mean the same thing. Paul quotes God saying the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “I was revealed to those people who did not even want to know me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1935	10:20	fc4b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture	εὑρέθην & ἐμφανὴς	1	Paul quotes God using the past tense in order to refer to something that will certainly happen in the future. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “I will be found … I will appear” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
1936	10:20	u60f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	εὑρέθην ἐν τοῖς ἐμὲ μὴ ζητοῦσιν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Those who were not seeking me found me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1937	10:20	t78j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῖς ἐμὲ μὴ ζητοῦσιν; ἐμφανὴς ἐγενόμην τοῖς ἐμὲ μὴ ἐπερωτῶσιν	1	These two clauses refer to non-Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the non-Jews, who were not seeking me; I appeared to the non-Jews, who were not asking for me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1938	10:21	pziq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	The word But introduces a contrast. Here, But indicates that what follows is in contrast to what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an expression that makes this contrast clearer. Alternate translation: “By contrast,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
1939	10:21	afo5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	πρὸς & τὸν Ἰσραὴλ λέγει	1	Here Paul uses this phrase to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book (Isaiah 65:2). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “to Israel God says in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
1940	10:21	ksjg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	Ἰσραὴλ	1	See how you translated Israel in 10:19. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1941	10:21	tp8d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1	Here Paul uses the present tense verb says to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
1942	10:21	gtwp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν, ἐξεπέτασα τὰς χεῖράς μου πρὸς λαὸν ἀπειθοῦντα καὶ ἀντιλέγοντα	1	In these two sentences Paul is quoting Isaiah 65:2 from the Old Testament. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1943	10:21	hw4w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν	1	The whole day here refers to doing something constantly or continually. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Continually” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1944	10:21	il8s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐξεπέτασα τὰς χεῖράς μου πρὸς λαὸν ἀπειθοῦντα καὶ ἀντιλέγοντα	1	The action of stretching out hands toward someone represents welcoming or inviting someone to be a friend. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I welcomed a disobedient and contrary people to be my friends” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1945	10:21	g03t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	λαὸν ἀπειθοῦντα καὶ ἀντιλέγοντα	1	This phrase refers to Israel, to whom God was speaking in this quotation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you disobedient and contradictory people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1946	11:intro	e9qz				0	Romans 11 General Notes Structure and Formatting God’s plan for Israel (9:1–11:36) Paul’s sorrow for Israel’s unbelief (9:1–5) God chooses whom he wants to choose (9:6–13) God shows mercy on whom he wants to show mercy (9:14–18) No one can question God’s choice (9:19–33) Israel’s false righteousness (10:1–4) Salvation is available to everyone (10:5–21) Israel has a faithful remnant (11:1–10) Israel’s unbelief resulted in non-Jews’ belief (11:11–24) God will save Israel (11:15–32) Praise for God’s wisdom (11:33–11:36) Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with 11:9–10, 26–27, and 34–35, which are words from the Old Testament. Special Concepts in this Chapter Grafting In 11:17–24 Paul uses the image of “grafting” to refer to the place of the Gentiles and Jews in the plans of God. Permanently attaching a branch from one plant onto another plant is called “grafting.” Paul uses the picture of God grafting the Gentiles into his people as a wild branch is grafted into a cultivated olive tree. But God has not forgotten about the Jews, who are spoken of as a natural part of the tree. God will also save Jews who believe in Jesus and they will rejoin God’s people.
1947	11:1	wp35		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	λέγω	1	The pronoun I here refers to Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1948	11:1	yiki		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	λέγω οὖν	1	Here, then indicates that what follows in this verse is the logical conclusion to what Paul has stated in 9:30–10:21. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “As a result, I say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1949	11:1	p4zd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	μὴ ἀπώσατο ὁ Θεὸς τὸν λαὸν αὐτοῦ?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as statements or exclamations and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely God did not reject his people!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1950	11:1	b8tg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν λαὸν αὐτοῦ	1	Here, his people refers to the Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “his people, the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1951	11:1	wqu2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	μὴ γένοιτο	1	See how you translated this phrase in 3:4 and 6:2. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
1952	11:1	mls4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, For introduces the reason why what Paul said earlier in the verse is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1953	11:1	ra9c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	καὶ & ἐγὼ & εἰμί	1	Paul uses the word myself to emphasize that he is proof that God has not rejected the Israelites. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I, indeed, also am” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
1954	11:1	ewxc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σπέρματος	1	Here, seed is singular but refers to a group of people. See how you translated seed in 4:13. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1955	11:2	wzs6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν λαὸν αὐτο	1	See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1956	11:2	h4qe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	ὃν προέγνω	1	This phrase gives further information about God’s people. If it might be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “the people whom he foreknew” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
1957	11:2	k2al		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	προέγνω	1	See how you translated this phrase in 8:29. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1958	11:2	cjp6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἢ οὐκ οἴδατε ἐν Ἠλείᾳ τί λέγει ἡ Γραφή, ὡς ἐντυγχάνει τῷ Θεῷ κατὰ τοῦ Ἰσραήλ?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “And surely you know what the scripture says about Elijah, how he pleads with God against Israel!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1959	11:2	q3lx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	ἢ οὐκ οἴδατε ἐν Ἠλείᾳ τί λέγει ἡ Γραφή, ὡς ἐντυγχάνει τῷ Θεῷ κατὰ τοῦ Ἰσραήλ?	1	This sentence indicates that what follows in the next verse is a quotation from an Old Testament book (1 Kings 19:10, 14). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “Or do you not know what the scripture says about Elijah, how he pleads with God against Israel? He says in the scriptures,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
1960	11:2	dd1e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	τί λέγει ἡ Γραφή	1	See how you translated the scripture says in 10:11. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1961	11:2	z5lk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture	λέγει & ἐντυγχάνει	1	Here Paul uses the present tense verbs says and pleads to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said … he pleaded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
1962	11:2	ki3n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	Ἰσραήλ	1	See how you translated Israel in 10:19. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1963	11:3	rnut		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	τοὺς προφήτας σου ἀπέκτειναν	1	This sentence is a quotation from 1 Kings 19:10, 14. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1964	11:3	fh9i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἀπέκτειναν & κατέσκαψαν & ζητοῦσιν	1	In this verse they refers to the people of Israel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel killed … they tore down … those people of Israel seek” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1965	11:3	fd5k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	κἀγὼ ὑπελείφθην μόνος & μου	1	In this verse I and my refer to Elijah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and only I, Elijah, was left behind … my life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1966	11:3	ut1s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κἀγὼ ὑπελείφθην μόνος	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and I alone am remaining” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1967	11:3	dhg7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κἀγὼ ὑπελείφθην μόνος	1	Here, left behind means that Elijah thought he remained alive and all the other prophets had been killed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and I alone remained alive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1968	11:3	dv5u			ζητοῦσιν τὴν ψυχήν μου	1	The phrase seek my life refers to people trying to kill Elijah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they want to kill me”
1969	11:4	rj4e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἀλλὰ τί λέγει αὐτῷ ὁ χρηματισμός?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to get his audience to pay attention to what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “But pay attention to what the divine response says to him!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1970	11:4	ougb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	τί λέγει αὐτῷ ὁ χρηματισμός	1	Here Paul uses this question to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book (Isaiah 65:1). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “what does the divine response say to him in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
1971	11:4	w8cl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τί λέγει & ὁ χρηματισμός?	1	Paul speaks of the divine response as if it were a person who would say something. Paul is referring to God responding. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what does God say in response” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1972	11:4	rvmy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1	Here Paul uses the present tense verbs says to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “did … say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
1973	11:4	x6e9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτῷ	1	Here, him refers to Elijah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1974	11:4	w03b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	οὐκ ἔκαμψαν γόνυ τῇ Βάαλ	1	This action was an expression of worship in this culture. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation, or you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “have not worshiped Baal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1975	11:5	ce2r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὕτως οὖν	1	The word then indicates that what follows is a result. Here, then introduces the logical conclusion to what Paul has stated about Elijah in the previous two verses. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “As a result, in the same way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1976	11:5	l6yu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	λῖμμα & ἐκλογὴν χάριτος	1	See how you translated remnant in 9:27, election in 9:11, and grace in 4:16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1977	11:5	whv0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐκλογὴν χάριτος	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe election that is characterized by grace. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the gracious election” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1978	11:6	qkgx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
1979	11:6	q6es		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	χάριτι	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “election is by grace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1980	11:6	b4tx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	χάριτι & ἔργων & χάρις & χάρις	1	See how you translated grace in 4:16 and works in 9:12. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1981	11:6	rm7g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὐκέτι	1	Here, it refers to “the election of grace” mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the election of grace is no longer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1982	11:6	a9l4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐκέτι	1	Here, no longer indicates the logical conclusion of the preceding clause. It does not imply that election used to be by works. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “it is logically not” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1983	11:7	cksi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	τί οὖν	1	Here, then indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in 9:30–11:6. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “If these things are true, then what” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1984	11:7	c69z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	τί οὖν	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “What should we conclude” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1985	11:7	k94b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί οὖν?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This is what we should conclude:” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1986	11:7	crpn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὃ & τοῦτο	1	The thing and this here refer to righteousness, as indicated in 9:30–31. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The righteousness … this righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1987	11:7	ctkj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	Ἰσραήλ	1	See how you translated this name in 10:19. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1988	11:7	xbkh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὐκ ἐπέτυχεν & οἱ & λοιποὶ	1	Here, it and them refer to the people of Israel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel did not obtain … the rest of the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1989	11:7	rzet		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ & ἐκλογὴ & οἱ & λοιποὶ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of elect and rest, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the ones who have been elected … the ones of them who remain” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1990	11:7	jib7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐπωρώθησαν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The next verse indicates that God is the one who did the action. Alternate translation: “God hardened” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1991	11:7	bp19		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπωρώθησαν	1	Here, hardened refers to being made stubborn. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “were made stubborn” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1992	11:8	cv7s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	See how you translated this phrase in 1:17. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
1993	11:8	u829		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation is a paraphrase of Isaiah 29:10 and Deuteronomy 29:4. Alternate translation: “just as God stated” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1994	11:8	o53g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς ὁ Θεὸς πνεῦμα κατανύξεως, ὀφθαλμοὺς τοῦ μὴ βλέπειν, καὶ ὦτα τοῦ μὴ ἀκούειν, ἕως τῆς σήμερον ἡμέρας	1	In these clauses Paul paraphrases Isaiah 29:10 and Deuteronomy 29:4. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1995	11:8	kaqc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	πνεῦμα κατανύξεως	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a spirit that is characterized by dullness. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a dull spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1996	11:8	z47a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πνεῦμα κατανύξεως	1	Here, spirit refers to a person’s attitude or manner of thinking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “an attitude of dullness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1997	11:8	zyk1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὀφθαλμοὺς τοῦ μὴ βλέπειν, καὶ ὦτα τοῦ μὴ ἀκούειν	1	Paul quotes Moses using eyes not to see and ears not to hear to refer to being unable to understand something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “being unable to perceive and unable to comprehend” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1998	11:8	ny8w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ὀφθαλμοὺς τοῦ μὴ βλέπειν, καὶ ὦτα τοῦ μὴ ἀκούειν	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that the people of Israel were completely unable to understand how to become righteous. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “being completely unable to comprehend” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1999	11:9	kr0g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	Δαυεὶδ λέγει	1	Here Paul uses this clause to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book (Psalm 69:22–23). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “David says in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
2000	11:9	zobm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture	Δαυεὶδ λέγει	1	Here Paul uses the present tense verb says to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
2001	11:9	b507		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	γενηθήτω ἡ τράπεζα αὐτῶν	1	This phrase begins a quotation of Psalm 69:22–23 that continues into the next verse. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
2002	11:9	x0wl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γενηθήτω ἡ τράπεζα αὐτῶν εἰς παγίδα, καὶ εἰς θήραν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God, cause their table to become a net and a trap” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2003	11:9	kpg8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	γενηθήτω ἡ τράπεζα αὐτῶν εἰς παγίδα, καὶ εἰς θήραν	1	This clause is an idiom. The word table represents feasting, which is a situation in which a person feels safe, and net and trap represent punishment. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Let them be punished while they are feeling safe” or “Punish them while they are comfortable”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2004	11:9	l6re		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	εἰς παγίδα, καὶ εἰς θήραν	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize David’s plea for judgment. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “for thorough punishment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2005	11:9	lbs2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰς σκάνδαλον	1	Here, stumbling block refers to something that tempts people to sin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “for tempting them to sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2006	11:9	xex5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀνταπόδομα αὐτοῖς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of retribution, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “paying them back” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2007	11:10	c1nj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σκοτισθήτωσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ αὐτῶν, τοῦ μὴ βλέπειν	1	This clause refers to being unable to understand something. See how you translated “eyes not to see” in 11:8. Alternate translation: “Let them be unable to understand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2008	11:10	j9ag		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σκοτισθήτωσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ αὐτῶν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Blind their eyes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2009	11:10	biqg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸν νῶτον αὐτῶν διὰ παντὸς σύνκαμψον	1	This clause refers to making people suffer like how slaves suffer by carrying heavy burdens on their backs. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “make them suffer continually” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2010	11:10	p4s5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	παντὸς	1	The end of this verse is the end of a quotation from Psalm 69:22–23. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
2011	11:11	z8tw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	λέγω οὖν	1	See how you translated this phrase in 11:1. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2012	11:11	dysl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	μὴ ἔπταισαν & πέσωσιν & αὐτῶν & αὐτούς	1	In this verse the pronouns they, their, and them refer to the Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The Jewish people did not stumble … they might fall, did they … the Jewish people’s … the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2013	11:11	r9hg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	μὴ ἔπταισαν ἵνα πέσωσιν?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as statements or exclamations and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely they did not stumble so that they might fall!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2014	11:11	y9x7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μὴ ἔπταισαν	1	See how you translated “stumbled” in 9:32. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2015	11:11	ai6y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πέσωσιν	1	Here, fall refers to being completely rejected by God forever. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they might be eternally rejected” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2016	11:11	qbx4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	μὴ γένοιτο!	1	See how you translated this expression in 3:4 and 6:2. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
2017	11:11	a4kf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῷ αὐτῶν παραπτώματι, ἡ σωτηρία & τὸ παραζηλῶσαι αὐτούς	1	See how you translated transgression in 4:15, salvation in 1:16, and jealousy in 10:19. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2018	11:11	f1jw			παραζηλῶσαι αὐτούς	1	See how you translated the similar phrase in 10:19.
2019	11:12	ew4i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	εἰ & τὸ παράπτωμα αὐτῶν, πλοῦτος κόσμου, καὶ τὸ ἥττημα αὐτῶν, πλοῦτος ἐθνῶν	1	Both of these clauses mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize what he is saying. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “if their transgression certainly resulted in wealth for the nations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2020	11:12	v024		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
2021	11:12	zibw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ παράπτωμα αὐτῶν	1	See how you translated transgression in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2022	11:12	rnsk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	πλοῦτος κόσμου	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe wealth that is for the world. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “is wealth for the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2023	11:12	it9k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	κόσμου	1	Here, world refers to the people living in the world, especially the Gentiles. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of the people living in the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2024	11:12	hqch		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ ἥττημα αὐτῶν & τὸ πλήρωμα αὐτῶν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of loss and fullness, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what they lost … how full they are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2025	11:12	fxoo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸ ἥττημα αὐτῶν & τὸ πλήρωμα αὐτῶν	1	Here, loss refers to Israel’s failure to make themselves righteous, and fullness refers to the complete number of Israelites who will become righteous by trusting in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “their failure … their full number of believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2026	11:12	dh1g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	πλοῦτος ἐθνῶν	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe wealth that is for the Gentiles. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “is wealth for the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2027	11:12	hsbv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	πόσῳ μᾶλλον τὸ πλήρωμα αὐτῶν?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “so much more will be their fullness!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2028	11:12	b9fi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πόσῳ μᾶλλον τὸ πλήρωμα αὐτῶν?	1	Paul implies that there will be much more wealth when the full amount of Israelites believe in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in how much more wealth will their fullness result” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2029	11:13	r0jt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ὑμῖν	1	Here, you is plural and refers to Paul’s non-Jewish Christian readers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
2030	11:13	z6p4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	εἰμι ἐγὼ	1	Paul uses the word myself to emphasize that he was apostle to the Gentiles. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I indeed am the one who is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2031	11:13	ngfl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν διακονίαν μου	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of ministry, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how I minister” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2032	11:14	ua2k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	παραζηλώσω	1	See how you translated this phrase in 10:19. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2033	11:14	h1qe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μου τὴν σάρκα & αὐτῶν	1	These phrases refer to Paul’s Jewish kinsmen who do not believe in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “those unbelieving Jews, who are of my own flesh … my fellow Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2034	11:14	oxqg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	μου τὴν σάρκα	1	See how you translated flesh in 1:3. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2035	11:15	q99e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, For indicates that what follows explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2036	11:15	es22		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	See how you translated if in 11:12. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
2037	11:15	ui3i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτῶν & ἡ πρόσλημψις	1	In this verse their refers to Jews who do not believe in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the unbelieving Jews’ … the Jewish people’s acceptance” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2038	11:15	sy8u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἀποβολὴ αὐτῶν & ἡ πρόσλημψις & ζωὴ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of rejection, acceptance, and life, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “them rejecting … them being accepted … to become alive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2039	11:15	teab		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καταλλαγὴ κόσμου	1	Here, is indicates that the phrase that follows is the result of their rejection. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “led to reconciliation of the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2040	11:15	sdhl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	καταλλαγὴ	1	See how you translated reconciliation in 5:11. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2041	11:15	m3fs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	κόσμου	1	See how you translated world in 11:12. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2042	11:15	em8m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίς ἡ πρόσλημψις εἰ μὴ ζωὴ ἐκ νεκρῶν?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize how wonderful it will be when God accepts the Jews. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “their acceptance is certainly life from dead ones!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2043	11:15	ic9z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	τίς ἡ πρόσλημψις	1	Here, is indicates that the phrase that follows is the result of their acceptance. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “what would their acceptance lead to if not life from the dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2044	11:15	po4h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ζωὴ ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	This phrase could refer to: (1) the final resurrection of all Christians that will take place after the whole Jewish remnant has believed in Jesus. Elsewhere in this letter, Paul uses a similar phrase to refer to Jesus’ resurrection. Alternate translation: “bringing the dead back to life” (2) the Jewish remnant changing from being spiritually dead to being spiritually alive. Alternate translation: “eternally alive from being eternally dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2045	11:15	jn4l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	See how you translated a similar phrase in 4:24. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2046	11:16	ao3u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ & εἰ	1	See how you translated if in 11:12. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
2047	11:16	bi5b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ τὸ φύραμα & καὶ οἱ κλάδοι	1	In these clauses Paul implies that the lump of dough and the branches are also holy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the lump of dough is also holy … the branches are also holy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2048	11:16	b2s5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰ & ἡ ἀπαρχὴ ἁγία, καὶ τὸ φύραμα;	1	Paul is speaking of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob, the Israelites’ ancestors, as if they were the firstfruits to be harvested. He is also speaking of the Israelites who descended from those men, as if they were a lump of dough that was made from the firstfruits that had been harvested. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this idea with a simile. Alternate translation: “if Abraham is like the first of what has been offered to God, all of his descendants should also be considered an offering” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2049	11:16	dci1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰ ἡ ῥίζα ἁγία, καὶ οἱ κλάδοι	1	Paul is speaking of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob, the Israelites’ ancestors, as if they were the root of a tree. He is also speaking of the Israelites who descended from those men as if they were the branches of that same tree. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this idea with a simile. Alternate translation: “if Abraham is like the root of a tree, all of his descendants should also be considered branches of that tree” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2050	11:17	qkc0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	εἰ	1	Here, if indicates that this verse and the next verse are one conditional sentence. You may need to adjust the words to divide these verses into separate sentences. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2051	11:17	imrh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
2052	11:17	slf6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor	εἰ & τινες τῶν κλάδων ἐξεκλάσθησαν, σὺ δὲ ἀγριέλαιος ὢν ἐνεκεντρίσθης ἐν αὐτοῖς, καὶ συνκοινωνὸς τῆς ῥίζης τῆς πιότητος τῆς ἐλαίας ἐγένου	1	Paul continues using the metaphor of a tree to speak about how God rejected unbelieving Jews and accepted non-Jews to be part of his people instead. The olive tree represents God’s people. The branches that were broken off represent Jews who don’t believe in Jesus. The wild olive branch represents non-Jewish people who believe in Jesus. The richness represents the blessings God gives his people. The root represents either the ancestors of the Israelites (as in the previous verse) or the Jewish people in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor as a simile. See also the discussion of this metaphor in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “if some of the Jews were rejected, like branches are broken off of a tree, and you, being foreigners were joined to God’s people as wild olive branches are grafted onto a tree, and you received the blessings of the first Israelites as part of God’s people, as branches receive the nutrients of the root of the olive tree” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
2053	11:17	b8ic		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τινες τῶν κλάδων ἐξεκλάσθησαν & ἐνεκεντρίσθης & συνκοινωνὸς & ἐγένου	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The context of chapters 9–11 indicates that God did the action. Alternate translation: “God broke off some of the branches … God grafted … God made to be partakers with them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2054	11:17	qv65		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd	σὺ	1	Even though Paul is writing to a group of people, non-Jewish Christians, you is singular throughout this verse. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural forms of you in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
2055	11:17	z6hr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς & συνκοινωνὸς	1	In this verse them refers to the Jewish people who believe in Jesus. It does not refer to the branches that were broken off. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the believing Jewish people … partakers with those Jews who believe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2056	11:18	d81u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	μὴ κατακαυχῶ τῶν κλάδων	1	This is the end of a factual conditional sentence that began in the previous verse. You may need to adjust the words if you make this clause into a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “Since this is true, do not boast over the branches” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2057	11:18	gqd6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor	μὴ κατακαυχῶ τῶν κλάδων. εἰ δὲ κατακαυχᾶσαι, οὐ σὺ τὴν ῥίζαν βαστάζεις, ἀλλὰ ἡ ῥίζα σέ	1	Paul continues using the metaphor of a tree from the previous two verses. Here, branches represents those Jews whom God rejected because they did not believe in Jesus. The root represents either the ancestors of the Israelites (like in 11:16) or the Jewish people in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor as a simile. See also the discussion of this metaphor in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “do not boast over the unbelieving Jews whom God rejected, like branches were broken off of a tree. But if you boast, you yourself do not sustain Gods people, like branches cannot sustain the root, but the first Israelites sustain you, like the root sustains the branches” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
2058	11:18	kd87		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd	κατακαυχᾶσαι & σὺ & βαστάζεις & σέ	1	See how you translated you in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
2059	11:18	llz1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐ σὺ τὴν ῥίζαν βαστάζεις, ἀλλὰ ἡ ῥίζα σέ	1	Paul implies that Gentile believers who boast should remember that they are supported by the root of the faith of Abraham and the first Israelites. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “remember that you yourself do not support the root, but the root supports you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2060	11:19	w28y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd	ἐρεῖς	1	See how you translated you in the previous two verses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
2061	11:19	uqji		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Here, then indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “as a result” or “in response to this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2062	11:19	d21e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ἐξεκλάσθησαν κλάδοι, ἵνα ἐγὼ ἐνκεντρισθῶ	1	In this sentence Paul is speaking as if he were a non-Jewish Christian arguing against Paul. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
2063	11:19	mm6w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor	ἐξεκλάσθησαν κλάδοι & ἐγὼ ἐνκεντρισθῶ	1	See how you translated branches, broken off, and grafted in in 11:17. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
2064	11:19	qk8c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐξεκλάσθησαν κλάδοι & ἐγὼ ἐνκεντρισθῶ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. See how you translated similar phrases in 11:17. Alternate translation: “God broke branches off … God might graft me in” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2065	11:19	p9ti		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	Here, so that introduces a purpose clause. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
2066	11:20	r80y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καλῶς	1	This sentence introduces Paul’s response to the statement in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying that what you said is true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2067	11:20	puj9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ ἐξεκλάσθησαν	1	They and their in this verse refer to the Jewish people who do not believe in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The unbelieving Jews were broken off in unbelief” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2068	11:20	lce6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor	ἐξεκλάσθησαν	1	See how you translated were broken off in 11:17. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
2069	11:20	cvr0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ	1	This phrase indicates the reason why the unbelieving Jews were broken off. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “due to unbelief” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2070	11:20	pw92		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd	σὺ & ἕστηκας &	1	See how you translated you in the previous three verses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
2071	11:20	v2ua		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σὺ & ἕστηκας	1	Paul speaks of Gentile believers remaining part of God’s people as if they were standing firm. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you yourself remain among God’s people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2072	11:20	xtnu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῇ πίστει	1	The phrase in faith could indicate: (1) the means by which Gentile believers should stand firm. Alternate translation: “by means of faith” (2) the reason why Gentile believers should stand firm. Alternate translation: “because of faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2073	11:20	qlmq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ πίστει	1	See how you translated faith in 1:5. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2074	11:20	rx22		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὑψηλὰ	1	Here, arrogant things refers to the arrogant thoughts that a Gentile Christian might have against the Jews. Specifically, they might think that they are better than Jews who are not Christian, as indicated by the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “arrogantly against unbelieving Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2075	11:20	k4l5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	φοβοῦ	1	Paul is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this word from the next verse, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2076	11:21	nsq3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, For introduces the reason why Paul wants his Gentile Christian readers to “fear,” as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “You must fear because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2077	11:21	xy3h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	See how you translated if in 11:12. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
2078	11:21	f6i7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῶν κατὰ φύσιν κλάδων	1	Here,natural branches refers to the Jewish people who rejected Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “of the unbelieving Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2079	11:21	ywgs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐδὲ σοῦ φείσεται	1	Paul implies that God will not spare anyone who stops trusting in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “neither will he spare you if you do not keep trusting in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2080	11:21	m59a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd	σοῦ	1	See how you translated you in 11:17–20. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
2081	11:22	bfsu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἴδε	1	Paul uses the term See to focus his audiences’ attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2082	11:22	i0r3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Here, then indicates that what follows in this verse is the logical conclusion to what Paul has stated in the 11:17–21. Use a natural way in your language for expressing result. Alternate translation: “as a result” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2083	11:22	xdm3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	χρηστότητα & ἀποτομίαν Θεοῦ & ἀποτομία & χρηστότης Θεοῦ & τῇ χρηστότητι	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of kindness and severity, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the kind character … the severe character of God … his severe character … the kind character of God … his kind character” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2084	11:22	i3ok		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπὶ μὲν τοὺς πεσόντας, ἀποτομία	1	Here Paul speaks of God’s severity as if it were an object that could be on someone. He means that God punishes them severely. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he severely punishes those who fell” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2085	11:22	scf8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοὺς πεσόντας	1	Paul refers to the Jews who failed to trust God as if they were people who fell. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “those Jews who failed to trust in God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2086	11:22	fy84		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπὶ δὲ σὲ, χρηστότης Θεοῦ	1	Here Paul speaks of God’s kindness as if it were an object that could be on someone. He means that God acts kindly toward those who trust in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he is kind to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2087	11:22	i4ue		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd	σὲ & ἐπιμένῃς & σὺ ἐκκοπήσῃ	1	See how you translated you in 11:17–21. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
2088	11:22	rw2i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπιμένῃς τῇ χρηστότητι	1	Here Paul speaks of God’s kindness as if it were a place in which someone could continue staying. He means that his readers should continue trusting in God’s kindness. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you continue trusting in his kindness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2089	11:22	t4mk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καὶ σὺ ἐκκοπήσῃ	1	Here Paul refers to his Gentile Christian audience as if they were branches that God could cut off. He means that God would reject them if they do not remain faithful. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “you yourself also will be rejected” or “you yourself also will be rejected like a branch that is cut off” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2090	11:22	l17i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καὶ σὺ ἐκκοπήσῃ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will cut off you yourself also” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2091	11:23	osvn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	κἀκεῖνοι & μὴ ἐπιμένωσι τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ & αὐτούς	1	In this verse those, they, their, and them refer to the Jewish people who do not believe in Jesus at first but become believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “those unbelieving Jewish people … those Jews do not continue in their unbelief … those Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2092	11:23	k0i0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μὴ ἐπιμένωσι τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ	1	See how you translated continue in in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2093	11:23	lvk7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	ἐὰν μὴ ἐπιμένωσι τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ	1	If your readers would misunderstand this double negative, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “if they start believing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
2094	11:23	e68i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ	1	See how you translated unbelief in 4:20. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2095	11:23	zu7k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐνκεντρισθήσονται & ἐνκεντρίσαι αὐτούς	1	Paul speaks of the Jews becoming part of God’s people as if they were branches that could be grafted in to a tree. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “will be joined to God’s people … to join them to his people” or “will be joined to God’s people, like a branch is grafted into a tree … to join them to his people, like a farmer grafts a branch into a tree” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2096	11:23	lx11		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐνκεντρισθήσονται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will graft in” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2097	11:23	yxtp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, For indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul said in the previous sentence is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2098	11:24	onko		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse is an explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2099	11:24	q1vp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	See how you translated if in 11:12. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
2100	11:24	s1a4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor	σὺ ἐκ τῆς κατὰ φύσιν ἐξεκόπης ἀγριελαίου, καὶ παρὰ φύσιν ἐνεκεντρίσθης εἰς καλλιέλαιον, πόσῳ μᾶλλον οὗτοι, οἱ κατὰ φύσιν ἐνκεντρισθήσονται τῇ ἰδίᾳ ἐλαίᾳ	1	Paul continues speaking of the Gentile believers and Jews as if they were branches of a tree, as he did in 11:17–22. Here, a wild olive tree represents all non-Jewish people who do not believe in Jesus, cut off represents being separated from unbelieving non-Jewish people, and good olive tree and their own olive tree represents God’s people. See how you translated grafted into in 11:17. Alternate translation: “you were separated from the nations, as a branch is cut off from what is by nature a wild olive tree, and contrary to nature were joined to God’s people, as a branch is grafted into a good olive tree, how much more will these, who are according to nature like olive branches, be joined to their own people, like a branch is grafted back into its own olive tree” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
2101	11:24	hl07		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd	σὺ	1	See how you translated you in 11:17–22. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
2102	11:24	dem3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σὺ ἐκ τῆς κατὰ φύσιν ἐξεκόπης ἀγριελαίου & ἐνεκεντρίσθης & οὗτοι, οἱ κατὰ φύσιν ἐνκεντρισθήσονται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God cut you off from what is by nature a wild olive tree … God grafted … will God graft these, who are according to nature, back into” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2103	11:24	ko5o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	πόσῳ μᾶλλον οὗτοι, οἱ κατὰ φύσιν ἐνκεντρισθήσονται τῇ ἰδίᾳ ἐλαίᾳ?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “so much more will these, who are according to nature, be grafted back into their own olive tree!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2104	11:24	ncwk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὗτοι & τῇ ἰδίᾳ	1	Here, they and their refer to Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these Jews … the Jews’ own” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2105	11:24	yn21		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	οἱ κατὰ φύσιν	1	This phrase gives further information about the Jewish people whom God will rejoin to his people. If it might be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “they who are the people who are according to nature” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
2106	11:25	jb0b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, For indicates that what Paul says in 11:25–32 is the reason why he said what he did in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “I am telling you these things because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2107	11:25	ye5w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐ & θέλω ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν	1	If your readers would misunderstand this double negative, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “I very much want you to be aware” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
2108	11:25	q3i2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὐ & θέλω	1	The pronoun I here refers to Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, do not want” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2109	11:25	ykop		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ὑμᾶς & μὴ ἦτε παρ’ ἑαυτοῖς φρόνιμοι	1	Here, you and yourselves are plural and could refer to: (1) non-Jewish Christians, as in verses 11:17–24. Alternate translation: “you non-Jewish believers in Christ … you non-Jews might be wise not in yourselves” (2) all the unbelievers to whom Paul was writing this letter. Alternate translation: “you believers in Jesus … you believers might not be wise in yourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
2110	11:25	evc9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	οὐ & θέλω ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν, ἀδελφοί, τὸ μυστήριον τοῦτο, ἵνα μὴ ἦτε παρ’ ἑαυτοῖς φρόνιμοι, ὅτι πώρωσις ἀπὸ μέρους τῷ Ἰσραὴλ γέγονεν	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “in order that you, brothers, might not be wise in yourselves, I do not want you to be ignorant of this mystery, that a partial hardening has occurred in Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2111	11:25	aj7j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τὸ μυστήριον τοῦτο	1	Here Paul uses the word mystery to refer to God saving a remnant of Jews after he saves a certain amount of Gentiles. This does not mean that the idea is hard to understand, but rather, God had not yet revealed it to people. If your language would not use mystery to refer to something that was concealed but has now been revealed, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “of this concealed message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2112	11:25	w7lx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	Although the term brothers is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Paul could be referring to: (1) non-Jewish Christians, as in verses 11:17–24. Alternate translation: “my fellow non-Jewish believers in Christ” (2) all the believers to whom Paul was writing this letter. Alternate translation: “my fellow believers in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2113	11:25	me1g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	μὴ ἦτε παρ’ ἑαυτοῖς φρόνιμοι	1	Here, wise in yourselves refers to someone arrogantly thinking that he is wiser than he really is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you might not arrogantly think that you are wiser than you really are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2114	11:25	ec4j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πώρωσις ἀπὸ μέρους	1	Here, hardening refers to being stubborn and unwilling to believe in Jesus. This hardening is only partial because some Jews believe in Jesus. See how you translated similar words in 11:7 and 9:18. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2115	11:25	dry1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῷ Ἰσραὴλ	1	See how you translated Israel in 10:19. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2116	11:25	db1x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸ πλήρωμα τῶν ἐθνῶν	1	Here, fullness refers to the full amount of non-Jewish people whom God will save. See how you translated fullness in 11:12. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2117	11:25	px38		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰσέλθῃ	1	Here Paul uses come in to speak about people joining God’s people as if they were entering a place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “has become his people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2118	11:26	jo0j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ οὕτως	1	Here, thus indicates that all Israel will be saved in the same manner as “the fullness of the Gentiles,” as mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and in the same manner” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2119	11:26	vu7t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πᾶς Ἰσραὴλ σωθήσεται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will save all Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2120	11:26	xjq4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	Ἰσραὴλ	1	See how you translated Israel in 10:19. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2121	11:26	wuyz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	See how you translated this phrase in 1:17. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
2122	11:26	n7yf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Since Paul is referring to something Isaiah wrote (Isaiah 59:20–21 and 27:9), you could indicate Isaiah as the subject. Alternate translation: “just as Isaiah wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2123	11:26	eb3j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ἥξει ἐκ Σιὼν ὁ ῥυόμενος, ἀποστρέψει ἀσεβείας ἀπὸ Ἰακώβ	1	This sentence is a quotation of Isaiah 59:20–21. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
2124	11:26	dm4e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	Σιὼν	1	See how you translated Zion in 9:33. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2125	11:26	at55		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀποστρέψει ἀσεβείας	1	Paul quotes Isaiah speaking of ungodly things as if they were an object that someone could turn away. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “He will cause ungodly activity to stop” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2126	11:26	bkr2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	Ἰακώβ	1	Here, Jacob refers to the descendants of Jacob, who are also called Israelites. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” or “the descendants of Jacob” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2127	11:27	cie8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	καὶ αὕτη αὐτοῖς, ἡ παρ’ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, ὅταν ἀφέλωμαι τὰς ἁμαρτίας αὐτῶν	1	This verse is a quotation of Isaiah 59:20–21 and 27:9 in which God is speaking. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
2128	11:27	q7e3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς & παρ’ ἐμοῦ & ἀφέλωμαι & αὐτῶν	1	The pronouns I and me here refer to God, and them and their refer to the people of Israel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the people of Israel … with me, God, … I take away Israel’s” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2129	11:27	ll39		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀφέλωμαι τὰς ἁμαρτίας αὐτῶν	1	Paul quotes God speaking of sins as if they were objects that someone could take away. He means that people are forgiven for the sins they have done. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will remove the guilt of their sins” or “I will forgive them for their sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2130	11:28	ctn9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατὰ & τὸ εὐαγγέλιον	1	Here Paul implies that the Jewish people are rejecting the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “according to the Jews rejecting the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2131	11:28	girf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐχθροὶ & ὑμᾶς & ἀγαπητοὶ & τοὺς πατέρας	1	The pronouns they and their refer to the people of Israel, and your refers to Gentile Christians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel are enemies … you non-Jews' … the people of Israel are beloved … their forefathers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2132	11:28	x6aa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐχθροὶ	1	Paul implies that the Jewish people are enemies of God because they rejected the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “they are God’s enemies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2133	11:28	dr2q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	κατὰ & τὴν ἐκλογὴν	2	See how you translated this phrase in 9:11. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2134	11:28	d82k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀγαπητοὶ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God loves them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2135	11:28	jas2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ τοὺς πατέρας	1	Here, for the sake of their forefathers refers to the promises that God made to their forefathers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of what he promised to do for their ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2136	11:29	nr47		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, For indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul said in the previous verse is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “You can be sure this is true because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2137	11:29	p2sf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὰ χαρίσματα & ἡ κλῆσις τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of gifts and calling, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what is graciously given … what has been called by God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2138	11:29	mnqs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἡ κλῆσις τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here, the calling of God refers to the fact that God called the Jews to be his people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the fact that God called them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2139	11:30	gmrm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, For indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse explains what Paul said about the Jews in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2140	11:30	bj8g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ὑμεῖς ποτε ἠπειθήσατε	1	Here, you and yourselves are plural and refer to non-Jewish Christians, as in verses 11:17–24. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you non-Jewish believers in Christ yourselves were formerly disobedient” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
2141	11:30	df91		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἠλεήθητε	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has shown mercy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2142	11:30	zk91		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἠλεήθητε τῇ τούτων ἀπειθείᾳ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of mercy and disobedience, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “were shown how merciful God is in how disobedient these were” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2143	11:30	iufr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	τῇ τούτων ἀπειθείᾳ	1	Here, in indicates that what follows is one reason why God showed mercy to non-Jewish people. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “due to the disobedience of these” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2144	11:30	g3cn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τούτων	1	Here, these refers to Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of these Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2145	11:31	wmub		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὗτοι & αὐτοὶ	1	Here, these and they refer to Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these Jews … the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2146	11:31	enhi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ἠπείθησαν τῷ ὑμετέρῳ ἐλέει, ἵνα καὶ αὐτοὶ νῦν ἐλεηθῶσιν	1	The phrase in your mercy could be connected to: (1) the verb translated as were disobedient, as in the ULT. (2) the verb translated as be shown mercy. Alternate translation: “were disobedient so that, in your mercy, they might also now be shown mercy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2147	11:31	mwhx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	τῷ ὑμετέρῳ ἐλέει	1	Here, in could indicate that what follows: (1) is one reason for the Jews being disobedient. Alternate translation: “because of your mercy” (2) is one purpose for the Jews being disobedient. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of your mercy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2148	11:31	qh7s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῷ ὑμετέρῳ ἐλέει	1	Here, your mercy refers to the mercy that God has shown to non-Jewish people whom he saves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the mercy that God has shown you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2149	11:31	kzgo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	τῷ ὑμετέρῳ ἐλέει	1	Here, your is plural and refers to non-Jewish believers in Jesus. See how you translated you in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
2150	11:31	dtmn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῷ ὑμετέρῳ ἐλέει & καὶ αὐτοὶ νῦν ἐλεηθῶσιν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of mercy, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in God acting mercifully to you … God might also now act mercifully to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2151	11:31	cfgv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	The phrase so that indicates that what follows is a purpose. Here, so that indicates that what follows is one purpose for the disobedience of the Jews. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
2152	11:31	onqo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καὶ αὐτοὶ νῦν ἐλεηθῶσιν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God might also now show them mercy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2153	11:32	wxjl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, For indicates that what follows in this verse is the conclusion to what Paul said in the previous two verses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In conclusion,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2154	11:32	t6cb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	συνέκλεισεν & ὁ Θεὸς τοὺς πάντας εἰς ἀπείθειαν	1	Here Paul refers to people whom God allows to disobey him as if they were prisoners shut up in a prison. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God has allowed all people to be disobedient” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2155	11:32	obi0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀπείθειαν & ἐλεήσῃ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of disobedience and mercy, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how disobedient they are … he might show how merciful he is toward” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2156	11:33	veuz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ὦ βάθος πλούτου, καὶ σοφίας καὶ γνώσεως Θεοῦ	1	Oh is an exclamation word that communicates awe. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. Alternate translation: “How amazing is the depth of the wealth and the wisdom and the knowledge of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
2157	11:33	ldc5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	βάθος πλούτου, καὶ σοφίας καὶ γνώσεως Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of depth, wealth, wisdom, and knowledge, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how deeply wealthy and wise and knowledgeable is God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2158	11:33	x3kb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	βάθος πλούτου, καὶ σοφίας καὶ γνώσεως Θεοῦ	1	Here Paul refers to God’s wealth, wisdom, and knowledge as if they were like a deep place. He means that God’s wealth, wisdom, and knowledge are truly great. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the greatness of the wealth and the wisdom and the knowledge of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2159	11:33	jbyn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ὡς ἀνεξεραύνητα τὰ κρίματα αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀνεξιχνίαστοι αἱ ὁδοὶ αὐτοῦ	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize what he is saying. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “How completely incomprehensible are the things he does” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2160	11:33	u322		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ὡς ἀνεξεραύνητα τὰ κρίματα αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀνεξιχνίαστοι αἱ ὁδοὶ αὐτοῦ	1	How here is used as an exclamation word that communicates awe. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
2161	11:33	qb5r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀνεξεραύνητα τὰ κρίματα αὐτοῦ	1	Here Paul speaks of God’s judgments as if they were objects that people cannot search for. He means that people cannot fully understand God’s judgments. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “incomprehensible are his judgments” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2162	11:33	urwo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὰ κρίματα αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of judgments, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “is how he judges” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2163	11:33	m755		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀνεξιχνίαστοι αἱ ὁδοὶ αὐτοῦ	1	Here Paul speaks of God’s ways as if they were objects that people cannot discover. He means that people cannot fully understand God’s ways. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his ways are incomprehensible” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2164	11:34	w1ck		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, For introduces a quotation from an Old Testament book (Isaiah 40:13). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “For it is written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
2165	11:34	uh2x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	τίς & ἔγνω νοῦν Κυρίου, ἢ τίς σύμβουλος αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο?	1	This sentence is a quotation from Isaiah 40:13. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
2166	11:34	r2wj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίς & ἔγνω νοῦν Κυρίου, ἢ τίς σύμβουλος αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο?	1	Paul quotes Isaiah using this question to emphasize that no one is as wise as the Lord. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No one has known the mind of the Lord or become his advisor!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2167	11:34	yy52		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	νοῦν Κυρίου	1	Here, mind refers to what a person knows and thinks. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all that the Lord knows” or “what the Lord thinks about” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2168	11:35	wonz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	ἢ	1	The word Or introduces another item. Here, Or indicates that what follows is Paul’s paraphrase of a verse in an Old Testament book (Job 41:11). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “Or, as is written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
2169	11:35	dc62		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	τίς προέδωκεν αὐτῷ, καὶ ἀνταποδοθήσεται αὐτῷ	1	This sentence is a paraphrase of part of Job 41:11. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
2170	11:35	j5cn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίς προέδωκεν αὐτῷ, καὶ ἀνταποδοθήσεται αὐτῷ?	1	Paul quotes Job using this question to emphasize what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No one has ever given anything to God, that he should be repaid by him!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2171	11:35	wm4s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	τίς προέδωκεν αὐτῷ	1	Paul quotes Job leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Who gave something to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2172	11:35	jbjk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀνταποδοθήσεται αὐτῷ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God should repay him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2173	11:36	tuup		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, For indicates that what Paul says in this verse is the reason why what he said in 11:34–35 is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “These things are true because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2174	11:36	abc1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐξ αὐτοῦ, καὶ δι’ αὐτοῦ, καὶ εἰς αὐτὸν, τὰ πάντα. αὐτῷ	1	In this verse him refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “from God and through God and to God are all things. To God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2175	11:36	p0l8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐξ αὐτοῦ	1	Here, from indicates that all things came from God because he made them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “originating from him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2176	11:36	a9gg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δι’ αὐτοῦ	1	Here, through indicates that God is the means by which all things continue to exist. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “continuing to exist through him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2177	11:36	s63u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰς αὐτὸν	1	Here, to indicates that God is the reason all things exist. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2178	11:36	rpx6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	αὐτῷ ἡ δόξα	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the idea of glory, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “May people glorify him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2179	11:36	ut8l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας	1	Here, to the ages is an idiom that means “forever.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “to eternity” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2180	12:intro	aky9				0	Romans 12 General Notes Structure and Formatting Instructions for living as Christians (12:1–15:13) How to act toward God (12:1–2) How to serve the church (12:3–8) How to act toward other Christians (12:9–13) How to act toward unbelievers (12:14–21) How to act toward government (13:1–7) How to act toward other people (13:8–10) Act as if the end is near (13:11–14) Do not judge other Christians (14:1–12) Do not tempt other Christians to sin (14:13–23) Be united with other Christians (15:1–13) Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of 12:20, which are from the Old Testament. Many scholars believe Paul uses the word therefore in Romans 12:1 to refer back to all of Chapters 1–11. After having carefully explained the Christian gospel in chapters 1–11, Paul explains in chapters 12–16 how Christians should live in response to these great truths. In these chapters, Paul gives many different commands that are practical instructions for how Christians should behave. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]]) Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter Body of Christ The body of Christ is an important metaphor used in the New Testament to refer to the church. Every Christian plays a unique and important function within the people of God. Christians need each other. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/body]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2181	12:1	wklb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	παρακαλῶ	1	The pronoun I here and throughout this chapter refers to Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, urge” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2182	12:1	fwds		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ὑμᾶς & ὑμῶν & ὑμῶν	1	The pronouns you and your here and throughout most of this chapter are plural and refer to the believers in Rome to whom Paul wrote this letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you believers … your … your” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
2183	12:1	xgcr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	παρακαλῶ οὖν ὑμᾶς	1	The word Therefore indicates that what follows is a logical conclusion. Here, therefore indicates that what follows in the rest of this letter is what Paul wants his readers to do in response to what he has written in chapters 1–11. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a fuller expression. Alternate translation: “Since everything I have said is true, I urge you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2184	12:1	kr1a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	See how you translated this word in 1:13. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2185	12:1	d50i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῶν οἰκτιρμῶν & θυσίαν ζῶσαν & τὴν λογικὴν λατρείαν ὑμῶν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of compassions, sacrifice, and service, you could express the same ideas in another way. These words indicate different ways in which people serve God. Alternate translation: “the ways that God is compassionate … a living one that is sacrificed … which is how you reasonably serve” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2186	12:1	wuyl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	παραστῆσαι τὰ σώματα ὑμῶν θυσίαν ζῶσαν	1	Here Paul refers to a believer in Christ who obeys God as if that person were one of the animals that the Jews killed and then offered to God as a sacrifice, except that this sacrifice is still living. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “to offer yourselves completely to God while you are alive, as if you were a living sacrifice on the temple altar” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2187	12:1	w1mz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τὰ σώματα ὑμῶν	1	Here, bodies refers to whole people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “your whole selves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2188	12:2	pyb6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μὴ συνσχηματίζεσθε & μεταμορφοῦσθε	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “do not conform yourselves … let God transform you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2189	12:2	clc6			μὴ συνσχηματίζεσθε	1	Alternate translation: “do not become alike”
2190	12:2	d2qq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῷ αἰῶνι τούτῳ	1	Here, this age refers to the attitudes and actions of the unbelievers who live during this period of time. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the way people think and act in this age” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2191	12:2	na8p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ἀνακαινώσει τοῦ νοός & τὸ θέλημα τοῦ Θεοῦ, τὸ ἀγαθὸν, καὶ εὐάρεστον, καὶ τέλειον	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of renewal and will, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “by renewing the mind … the good and well-pleasing and perfect thing that God wills” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2192	12:2	c6ch		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῇ ἀνακαινώσει τοῦ νοός	1	Here Paul speaks of changing the way a person thinks as if that person’s mind is being renewed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by the changing of how one thinks” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2193	12:3	cp9g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, For indicates that what follows explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2194	12:3	l6c6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διὰ τῆς χάριτος τῆς δοθείσης μοι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “through the grace God has given to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2195	12:3	nyc2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ τῆς χάριτος τῆς δοθείσης μοι	1	Here, grace refers to God graciously choosing Paul to be an apostle. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “through the grace that caused me to become an apostle” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2196	12:3	s6yg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	μὴ ὑπερφρονεῖν παρ’ ὃ δεῖ φρονεῖν	1	Here, think more highly of himself refers to someone arrogantly thinking that he is better than he really is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to not think he is a better person than he really is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2197	12:3	j20s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	μὴ ὑπερφρονεῖν παρ’ ὃ δεῖ φρονεῖν	1	Although himself and he are masculine, Paul is using the words here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “to not think more highly of oneself than what one ought to think” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2198	12:3	me4t			φρονεῖν εἰς τὸ σωφρονεῖν	1	Alternate translation: “you should be wise with regard to how you think about yourselves”
2199	12:3	m8z7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἑκάστῳ ὡς ὁ Θεὸς ἐμέρισεν μέτρον πίστεως	1	Here, faith could refer to: (1) different degrees of faith in God that God gives believers. Alternate translation: “as God has given each of you an degree of ability to trust in him” (2) the spiritual gifts that result from faith and are given to believers in different degrees. Alternate translation: “as God has given each of you a degree of faith demonstrated in spiritual gifts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2200	12:4	zm8p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, For indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul’s readers should “think with a sound mind,” as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “You must do this because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2201	12:4	v2pi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile	καθάπερ	1	Here, just as indicates that what follows in this verse is a simile. Paul uses this simile to compare all believers in Christ to the parts of a human body. Since Paul explains the comparison in the next verse, you do not need to express the meaning plainly here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
2202	12:4	v5iy			μέλη & μέλη	1	See how you translated members in 6:13.
2203	12:4	v8bo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν αὐτὴν ἔχει πρᾶξιν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of function, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “function for the same purposes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2204	12:5	sd03		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἐσμεν	1	Here, we refers to all Christians, so it is inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2205	12:5	v93h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ	1	See how you translated the similar phrase in 6:23. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2206	12:5	dhx8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸ δὲ καθ’ εἷς ἀλλήλων μέλη	1	Paul speaks of the believers as if God had physically joined them together like the parts of the human body are joined. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “and the individual believers are united to one another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2207	12:5	cutl			μέλη	1	See how you translated members in the previous verse.
2208	12:6	j3x5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἔχοντες & ἡμῖν	1	Here, we and us refer to all Christians, so they are inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2209	12:6	hrr1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἔχοντες & χαρίσματα & διάφορα	1	Paul speaks of the different abilities to serve other believers that God gives believers as being gracious gifts from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we have different spiritual abilities” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2210	12:6	y267		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κατὰ τὴν χάριν τὴν δοθεῖσαν ἡμῖν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “according to the grace that God has given to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2211	12:6	tlk4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν χάριν & προφητείαν, κατὰ τὴν ἀναλογίαν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of grace and prophecy, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what is graciously … being able to prophecy, according to what has been proportioned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2212	12:6	zs97		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	εἴτε προφητείαν, κατὰ τὴν ἀναλογίαν τῆς πίστεως	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “if God has given someone the gift of prophecy, then that person must use that gift according to the proportion of his faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2213	12:6	bnk9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατὰ τὴν ἀναλογίαν τῆς πίστεως	1	Here Paul uses faith in the same way he did in 12:3. See how you translated the clause “as God has distributed to each one a measure of faith” in that verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2214	12:7	todc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	εἴτε διακονίαν, ἐν τῇ διακονίᾳ; εἴτε ὁ διδάσκων, ἐν τῇ διδασκαλίᾳ	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “if God has given someone the gift of service, then that person must use that gift for serving; if God has given someone the gift to be the one teaching, then that person must use that gift for teaching” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2215	12:7	wmuw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	διακονίαν & τῇ διακονίᾳ & τῇ διδασκαλίᾳ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of service and teaching, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “serving others … serving others … teaching others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2216	12:8	m2as		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	εἴτε ὁ παρακαλῶν, ἐν τῇ παρακλήσει; ὁ μεταδιδοὺς, ἐν ἁπλότητι; ὁ προϊστάμενος, ἐν σπουδῇ; ὁ ἐλεῶν, ἐν ἱλαρότητι	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that clauses would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “if God has given someone the gift of encouraging, then that person must use that gift for encouraging; if God has given someone the gift of giving, then that person must use that gift for generosity; if God has given someone the gift of leading, then that person must use that gift with diligence; if God has given someone the gift of showing mercy, then that person must use that gift with cheerfulness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2217	12:8	teso		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ παρακλήσει & ἐν ἁπλότητι & ἐν σπουδῇ & ἐν ἱλαρότητι	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of encouragement, generosity, diligence, and cheerfulness, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “by encouraging others … generously … diligently … cheerfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2218	12:9	dmsa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative	ἡ ἀγάπη ἀνυπόκριτος; ἀποστυγοῦντες τὸ πονηρόν, κολλώμενοι τῷ ἀγαθῷ	1	Paul is using statements to give commands. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for commands. Alternate translation: “Love without hypocrisy, abhor the wicked, hold on to the good” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
2219	12:9	o8z9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	ἀνυπόκριτος	1	If your readers would misunderstand this double negative, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “sincere” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
2220	12:9	iv5h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ πονηρόν & τῷ ἀγαθῷ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of wicked and good, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “wicked things … good things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2221	12:10	mr8i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative	τῇ φιλαδελφίᾳ εἰς ἀλλήλους φιλόστοργοι; τῇ τιμῇ ἀλλήλους προηγούμενοι	1	Paul is using statements to give commands. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for commands. Alternate translation: “in brotherly love, be affectionate to one another; in honor, outdo one another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
2222	12:10	ng86		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ φιλαδελφίᾳ & τῇ τιμῇ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of brotherly love and honor, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in loving others as brothers … in honoring others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2223	12:10	ux2y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τῇ φιλαδελφίᾳ	1	Although the word brotherly is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “in your love for fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2224	12:11	iu2i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative	τῇ σπουδῇ μὴ ὀκνηροί, τῷ πνεύματι ζέοντες, τῷ Κυρίῳ δουλεύοντες	1	Paul is using statements to give commands. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for commands. Alternate translation: “in diligence, do not be lazy; in the spirit, be eager; serve the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
2225	12:11	jhe7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ σπουδῇ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of diligence, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in being diligent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2226	12:11	ddvz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῷ πνεύματι	1	Here, the spirit could refer to: (1) a person’s spirit, as in 1:9. Alternate translation: “in your spirit” or “wholeheartedly” (2) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “in the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2227	12:12	l3es		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative	τῇ ἐλπίδι χαίροντες, τῇ θλίψει ὑπομένοντες, τῇ προσευχῇ προσκαρτεροῦντες	1	Paul is using statements to give commands. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for commands. Alternate translation: “in hope, rejoice; in suffering, be patient; in prayer, persist” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
2228	12:12	wept		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	τῇ ἐλπίδι	1	Here, in indicates that hope is the reason for rejoicing. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “because of hope, rejoicing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2229	12:12	uv64		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	τῇ θλίψει ὑπομένοντες	1	Here, in indicates the situation in which someone should be patient. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the time of suffering, being patient” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
2230	12:12	xoy0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῇ προσευχῇ προσκαρτεροῦντες	1	Here, in indicates that prayer is what one needs to do persistently. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in regard to prayer, persisting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2231	12:13	vk5h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative	ταῖς χρείαις τῶν ἁγίων κοινωνοῦντες, τὴν φιλοξενίαν διώκοντες	1	Paul is using statements to give commands. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for commands. Alternate translation: “in the needs of the saints, share; pursue hospitality” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
2232	12:13	m53s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ταῖς χρείαις τῶν ἁγίων & τὴν φιλοξενίαν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of needs and hospitality, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in the things the saints need … hospitable actions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2233	12:13	i3nm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ταῖς χρείαις τῶν ἁγίων κοινωνοῦντες	1	Here Paul implies sharing the things that a person has with those saints who have needs. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “sharing what you have to meet the needs of the saints” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2234	12:14	exd8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	εὐλογεῖτε καὶ μὴ καταρᾶσθε	1	These two commands mean the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize what he is saying. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you must absolutely bless” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2235	12:15	szpn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative	χαίρειν μετὰ χαιρόντων, κλαίειν μετὰ κλαιόντων	1	Paul is using statements to give commands. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for commands. Alternate translation: “rejoice with those who rejoice; weep with those who weep” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
2236	12:16	agio		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative	τὸ αὐτὸ εἰς ἀλλήλους φρονοῦντες, μὴ τὰ ὑψηλὰ φρονοῦντες, ἀλλὰ τοῖς ταπεινοῖς συναπαγόμενοι	1	Paul is using statements to give commands. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for commands. Alternate translation: “think the same thing toward one another; do not think the high things, but accept the lowly ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
2237	12:16	hwd1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τὸ αὐτὸ εἰς ἀλλήλους φρονοῦντες	1	This clause is an idiom that refers to having the same concern for the wellbeing of other people as a person has for himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “caring about others the same way you care about yourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2238	12:16	ar7y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	μὴ τὰ ὑψηλὰ φρονοῦντες	1	Here, thinking the high things refers to someone arrogantly thinking that he is better than other people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “not thinking that you are better than others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2239	12:16	cc23		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῖς ταπεινοῖς συναπαγόμενοι	1	Here, the lowly ones could refer to: (1) people who are poor or are not respected by society. Alternate translation: “accepting people who do not seem important” (2) doings things that people think are humiliating or unimportant. Alternate translation: “accepting the lowly tasks” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2240	12:16	h469		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	μὴ γίνεσθε φρόνιμοι παρ’ ἑαυτοῖς	1	See how you translated this expression in 11:25. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2241	12:17	h2tz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative	μηδενὶ κακὸν ἀντὶ κακοῦ ἀποδιδόντες, προνοούμενοι καλὰ ἐνώπιον πάντων ἀνθρώπων	1	Paul is using statements to give commands. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for commands. Alternate translation: “repay no one evil for evil; give careful thought to good things in the sight of all men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
2242	12:17	ae3j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	κακὸν ἀντὶ κακοῦ & προνοούμενοι & ἐνώπιον	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of evil, thought, and sight, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “evil things for evil things; thinking carefully about … as seen by” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2243	12:17	hnte		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μηδενὶ κακὸν ἀντὶ κακοῦ ἀποδιδόντες	1	Here Paul uses paying back to refer to doing something evil to someone in response to the evil that person has done. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “doing something evil to no one for the evil that person has done to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2244	12:17	fzh8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καλὰ ἐνώπιον πάντων ἀνθρώπων	1	Here Paul uses sight to refer to what people mentally perceive. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “do things that all men perceive to be good” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2245	12:17	c8lw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	πάντων ἀνθρώπων	1	Although the term men is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “all people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2246	12:18	pgt7			τὸ ἐξ ὑμῶν	1	Alternate translation: “so far as it depends on you” or “as much as it is up to you”
2247	12:18	nzwf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative	μετὰ πάντων ἀνθρώπων εἰρηνεύοντες	1	Paul is using a statement to give a command. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for commands. Alternate translation: “live at peace with all men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
2248	12:18	fbzh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	πάντων ἀνθρώπων	1	Although the term men is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “all people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2249	12:19	e0hc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative	μὴ ἑαυτοὺς ἐκδικοῦντες	1	Paul is using a statement to give a command. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for commands. Alternate translation: “do not avenge yourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
2250	12:19	ew6x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	δότε τόπον τῇ ὀργῇ	1	Here, wrath refers to God’s punishment. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “give way to God’s punishment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2251	12:19	zre0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ὀργῇ & ἐμοὶ ἐκδίκησις	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of wrath and vengeance, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “to God being wrathful … I will avenge” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2252	12:19	tcwn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, for indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul said in the previous clause is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. You may need to start a new sentence, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2253	12:19	omjp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	γέγραπται	1	See how you translated the similar phrase in 1:17. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
2254	12:19	ns3b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γέγραπται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Moses wrote this quotation. Alternate translation: “Moses wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2255	12:19	kf44		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ἐμοὶ ἐκδίκησις; ἐγὼ ἀνταποδώσω, λέγει Κύριος	1	This sentence is a quotation of Deuteronomy 32:35. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
2256	12:19	lkpl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	ἐμοὶ ἐκδίκησις; ἐγὼ ἀνταποδώσω, λέγει Κύριος	1	If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “The Lord says that vengeance is for him; he will repay.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
2257	12:19	l2i8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	ἐμοὶ ἐκδίκησις; ἐγὼ ἀνταποδώσω	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing and emphasize that God will avenge his people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “I will certainly avenge you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
2258	12:19	xo5r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀνταποδώσω	1	Here Moses quotes God using repay to refer to appropriately punishing someone as if the punishment were reciprocal payment for that person’s deeds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will appropriately punish” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2259	12:19	mco6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἀνταποδώσω	1	Moses quotes God leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “will repay them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2260	12:20	n96q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	ἀλλὰ	1	But here indicates that what follows is a quotation from an Old Testament book (Proverbs 25:21–22). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “But, God says in the Scriptures,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
2261	12:20	q7dq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ἐὰν πεινᾷ ὁ ἐχθρός σου, ψώμιζε αὐτόν; ἐὰν διψᾷ, πότιζε αὐτόν; τοῦτο γὰρ ποιῶν, ἄνθρακας πυρὸς σωρεύσεις ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ.	1	This sentence is a quotation of Proverbs 25:21–22. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
2262	12:20	c4ig		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ὁ ἐχθρός σου & σωρεύσεις	1	Here the pronouns your and you are singular and addressed as though to one person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use plural forms here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
2263	12:20	uwbq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, For indicates that what follows is the reason why what was said in the previous sentence is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2264	12:20	wce6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνθρακας πυρὸς σωρεύσεις ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ	1	This clause is an idiom. It could refer to: (1) a person feeling shame as a result of being helped by someone whom that person had harmed. Alternate translation: “you will make the person who harmed you feel badly about how he has mistreated you” (2) God very severely punishing the person who is being helped. Alternate translation: “you will give God a reason to judge him more harshly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2265	12:21	q761		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	μὴ νικῶ ὑπὸ τοῦ κακοῦ, ἀλλὰ νίκα ἐν τῷ ἀγαθῷ τὸ κακόν	1	Paul describes evil as if it were a person who could conquer someone or be conquered by someone. He is referring to someone doing evil in response to someone doing evil to that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Do not let evil cause you to do evil, but use good to prevent evil from influencing you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
2266	12:21	p7fd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τοῦ κακοῦ & τῷ ἀγαθῷ & τὸ κακόν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of evil and good, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “evil things … evil things … good things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2267	12:21	k8et		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μὴ νικῶ ὑπὸ τοῦ κακοῦ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Do not let evil overcome you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2268	13:intro	l4q7				0	Romans 13 General Notes Structure and Formatting Instructions for living as Christians (12:1–15:13) How to act toward God (12:1–2) How to serve the church (12:3–8) How to act toward other Christians (12:9–13) How to act toward unbelievers (12:14–21) How to act toward government (13:1–7) How to act toward other people (13:8–10) Act as if the end is near (13:11–14) Special Concepts in this chapter Submission to rulers In 13:1–7 Paul commands his readers to obey rulers and pay taxes. Some readers will find this difficult to accept, especially if they live in places where wicked rulers persecute the church. It is important to recognize that the Holy Spirit led Paul to write these words while the Roman government was persecuting Christians. Christians must obey their rulers as well as obey God. The only time a Christian should disobey governing authorities is when those rulers do not allow Christians to do something God explicitly commands them to do (for an example of such a situation, see Acts 5:28–29). “The night advanced, and the day has come near” In 13:11–14 Paul tells his readers that they should behave like Jesus because Jesus is coming back soon. He calls the current time in which people do what is evil the “night,” and he calls the time when Jesus returns the “day.”
2269	13:1	i1kf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πᾶσα ψυχὴ ἐξουσίαις ὑπερεχούσαις ὑποτασσέσθω	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Let every soul subject itself to governing authorities” or “Let everyone subject themselves to governing authorities” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2270	13:1	b8nf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	πᾶσα ψυχὴ	1	Paul uses soul here to refer to the whole life of a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “every human being” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2271	13:1	gkmd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐξουσίαις & ἐξουσία & οὖσαι	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of authorities and authority, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “to those who are authorized to govern … authorized person … existing ones who are authorized” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2272	13:1	wii2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐ & ἔστιν ἐξουσία, εἰ μὴ ὑπὸ Θεοῦ	1	If your readers would misunderstand this double negative, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “all authority comes from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
2273	13:1	j3lr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	αἱ δὲ οὖσαι ὑπὸ Θεοῦ τεταγμέναι εἰσίν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and God appointed the existing authorities” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2274	13:2	ezg5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε	1	So then indicates that what follows in this verse summarizes ideas that were previously expressed. So then here introduces the result of what Paul said in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “Since this is true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2275	13:2	ui8y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ἐξουσίᾳ, τῇ τοῦ Θεοῦ διαταγῇ & ἑαυτοῖς κρίμα λήμψονται	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of authority, command, and judgment, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “those who are authorized … what God has commanded … will cause themselves to be judged” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2276	13:2	vc3u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οἱ δὲ ἀνθεστηκότες	1	Here, it refers to that authority stated earlier in the verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and the ones who have opposed that authority” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2277	13:2	dsa3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἑαυτοῖς κρίμα λήμψονται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “will cause God to bring judgment on them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2278	13:2	y21s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἑαυτοῖς κρίμα λήμψονται	1	Here Paul speaks of judgment as if it were an object that one could bring and put on someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will cause God to judge them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2279	13:3	m3yf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2280	13:3	c2xa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	φόβος & τὴν ἐξουσίαν & τὸ ἀγαθὸν & ἕξεις ἔπαινον	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of terror, authority, good, and praise, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “terrifying … whom God has authorized … good things … you will be praised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2281	13:3	jt2z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῷ ἀγαθῷ ἔργῳ, & τῷ κακῷ	1	Here, the good deed and the evil deed refer to the people who do those deeds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to those who do the good deed … to those who do the evil deed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2282	13:3	z4sq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	θέλεις δὲ μὴ φοβεῖσθαι τὴν ἐξουσίαν?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Now this is how you can not fear the authority:” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2283	13:3	nohi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἕξεις ἔπαινον	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the authorities will praise you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2284	13:3	ahl9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐξ αὐτῆς	1	Here, from indicates the reason why you will have praise. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “because of it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2285	13:4	w4s0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	The word for indicates that what follows explains what came before this word. Here, for indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul said in the previous clause is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2286	13:4	j4kb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐστιν & οὐ & φορεῖ & ἐστιν	1	In this verse the pronoun he refers to a person who rules. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the ruler is … the ruler does not carry … the ruler is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2287	13:4	zgz2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	Θεοῦ & διάκονός & τὸ ἀγαθόν & τὸ κακὸν & Θεοῦ & διάκονός & ὀργὴν & τὸ κακὸν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of servant, good, evil, and wrath, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “one who serves God … doing good … evil things … one who serves God … what is wrathful … evil things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2288	13:4	quy4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	2	The word for indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, for introduces the reason why what Paul said in the previous clause is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2289	13:4	ink8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	οὐ & εἰκῇ τὴν μάχαιραν φορεῖ	1	Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that means the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be helpful in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “he carries the sword for a very good reason” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2290	13:4	s3vz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	οὐ & τὴν μάχαιραν φορεῖ	1	Here, the sword refers to a ruler’s authority to punish wicked people, which could include killing them with a sword. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he does not have the authority to punish” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2291	13:4	vx6b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	3	The word for indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, for indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous clause. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “in fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2292	13:4	d61t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς ὀργὴν	1	Here, for indicates that what follows is the purpose of an avenger. Use the most natural way in your language to indicate a purpose. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of wrath” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
2293	13:4	au7j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὀργὴν	1	See how you translated wrath in 1:18. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2294	13:4	cq0x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὀργὴν τῷ τὸ κακὸν πράσσοντι	1	Paul speaks of wrath as if it were an object that could be put on a person. He means that every evil person will experience wrathful punishment. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “wrath that will be experienced by the one who practices the evil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2295	13:5	jqz7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ	1	See how you translated this word in 1:24. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2296	13:5	sxq1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὑποτάσσεσθαι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to subject yourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2297	13:5	aq7p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὑποτάσσεσθαι	1	Paul implies that his readers should be subjected to the rulers described in 13:1–4. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to be subjected to rulers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2298	13:5	q81v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	διὰ τὴν ὀργὴν, ἀλλὰ καὶ διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “because of the wrathful deeds they can do to you, but also because your conscience knows that you should do submit to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2299	13:5	ykg9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ὀργὴν & τὴν συνείδησιν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of wrath and conscience, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what is wrathful … what you know is right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2300	13:5	bs1u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὴν ὀργὴν	1	See how you translated this word in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2301	13:6	x5i2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2302	13:6	r1jy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	διὰ τοῦτο	1	Here, this could refer to: (1) “the wrath” and “the conscience” mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “because of the wrath and your conscience” (2) “the wrath” and “the conscience” mentioned in the previous verse, and the fact that rulers are servants of God. Alternate translation: “because of the wrath and your conscience, and because rulers are servants of God”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2303	13:6	hy4f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	2	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, for indicates that what follows is another reason why Christians should pay taxes. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2304	13:6	ib5x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	εἰσιν	1	Here, they refers to the rulers described in 13:1–4. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the rulers are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2305	13:6	gh12		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	λειτουργοὶ & Θεοῦ	1	See how you translated the similar phrase in 13:4. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2306	13:6	e8ey		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	εἰς αὐτὸ τοῦτο προσκαρτεροῦντες	1	This clause gives additional information about the rulers, who are called servants of God in the previous clause. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make the connection between these clauses more explicit. Alternate translation: “and these rulers are the ones persisting in this very thing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
2307	13:6	xmsa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	αὐτὸ τοῦτο	1	Here, this very thing refers to serving God by ruling over people, as is indicated by Paul calling them servants of God in the previous clause. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this service” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2308	13:7	z9cn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὰς ὀφειλάς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of obligations, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what you are obligated to pay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2309	13:7	wg2l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	τῷ τὸν φόρον, τὸν φόρον; τῷ τὸ τέλος, τὸ τέλος; τῷ τὸν φόβον, τὸν φόβον; τῷ τὴν τιμὴν, τὴν τιμήν	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “pay tax to whom tax is due, pay toll to whom toll is due, show fear to whom fear is due, show honor to him to whom honor is due” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2310	13:7	jg3u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	τῷ τὸν φόρον, τὸν φόρον; τῷ τὸ τέλος, τὸ τέλος	1	Paul is speaking of taxes and tolls in general, not of one particular tax and toll. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “taxes to whom taxes, tolls to whom tolls” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
2311	13:7	s2nf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τῷ τὸ τέλος, τὸ τέλος	1	The word toll refers to a specific kind of tax that must be paid in addition to regular taxes. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of tax, you could use a general expression for additional taxes. Alternate translation: “government fees to whom government fees” or “revenues to whom revenues” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2312	13:7	ao8q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῷ τὸν φόβον, τὸν φόβον; τῷ τὴν τιμὴν, τὴν τιμήν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of fear and honor, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “fear to whomever should be feared, honor to whomever should be honored” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2313	13:7	nwi2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῷ τὸν φόβον, τὸν φόβον; τῷ τὴν τιμὴν, τὴν τιμήν	1	Here Paul refers to fearing and honoring those who deserve to be feared and honored as if someone is paying them fear and honor. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “fear those who should be feared, honor those who should be honored” or “respect those whom you ought to respect, honor those whom you ought to honor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2314	13:8	a69g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	μηδενὶ μηδὲν ὀφείλετε	1	If your readers would misunderstand this double negative, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “Do not owe anyone anything” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
2315	13:8	ay3n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μηδενὶ μηδὲν ὀφείλετε, εἰ μὴ τὸ ἀλλήλους ἀγαπᾶν	1	Here Paul speaks of loving other believers as if it were a debt owed to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “Owe nothing to anyone, but love one another as if it were a debt that you owed them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2316	13:8	dptn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ ἀλλήλους	1	Here, one another refers to other Christians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “other believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2317	13:8	auu3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	νόμον	1	See how you translated the law in 2:12. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
2318	13:9	qcri		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows is the reason why loving others fulfills the law, as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is true since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2319	13:9	r7kd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	τὸ	1	Here Paul uses this to indicate a quotation from the law that is written in the Old Testament (Exodus 20:13–15, 17). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “God had said in the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
2320	13:9	t0os		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	οὐ μοιχεύσεις, οὐ φονεύσεις, οὐ κλέψεις, οὐκ ἐπιθυμήσεις	1	These clauses are a quotation from Exodus 20:13–15, 17. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
2321	13:9	ng84		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἴ τις ἑτέρα ἐντολή	1	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “if there is any other commandment, and there is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
2322	13:9	mgc9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τις ἑτέρα ἐντολή	1	Here, any other commandment refers to any of the commandments that God gave the Israelites other than those that Paul has just mentioned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “there is any other commandment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2323	13:9	jva8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐντολή	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of commandment, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “thing God has commanded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2324	13:9	x8i1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ, ἀνακεφαλαιοῦται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this word summed it up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2325	13:9	ytof		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ	1	Here Paul uses word to refer to a commandment that is made up of words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in this commandment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2326	13:9	ylb1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ	1	Here Paul uses this word to indicate a quotation from the law that is written in the Old Testament (Leviticus 19:18). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “in this commandment in the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
2327	13:9	so4u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ἀγαπήσεις τὸν πλησίον σου ὡς σεαυτόν	1	This sentence is a quotation from Leviticus 19:18. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
2328	13:10	vy62		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἡ ἀγάπη τῷ πλησίον κακὸν οὐκ ἐργάζεται	1	Here Paul speaks of love as if it were a person who could do some kind of work. He means that people who love other people do not do evil things to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “People who love do not work evil to a neighbor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
2329	13:10	xa4n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἀγάπη τῷ πλησίον & κακὸν & πλήρωμα & νόμου & ἡ ἀγάπη	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of love, evil, and fulfillment, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “Loving a neighbor … what is evil … loving others fulfills the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2330	13:10	l92e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	νόμου	1	See how you translated the law in 2:12. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
2331	13:11	okty		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	καὶ τοῦτο	1	Paul is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “And do this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2332	13:11	dxm0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τοῦτο	1	Here, this refers back to all the commands Paul stated in 12:1–13:10. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these commands that I have given you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2333	13:11	cdwh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰδότες τὸν καιρόν	1	This clause indicates one reason for Paul’s readers to obey the commands he gave in 12:1–13:10. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “since you know the time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2334	13:11	vd49		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	τὸν καιρόν, ὅτι ὥρα ἤδη	1	Here, that indicates that what follows in this clause is a description of the time stated in the previous clause. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the connection between these clauses more explicit. Alternate translation: “that it is already the time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
2335	13:11	gvlw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὥρα	1	Here, hour refers to a point in time when something happens. It has the same meaning as time in the previous clause. It does not refer to a 60-minute length of time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the point in time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2336	13:11	b6l3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὑμᾶς ἐξ ὕπνου ἐγερθῆναι	1	Paul speaks of the need for the Roman believers to be spiritually vigilant as if they needed to wake up from being asleep. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “for you to be spiritually vigilant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2337	13:11	acg2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates a reason why Paul’s readers should awake from sleep. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “Do this since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2338	13:11	s3p9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡμῶν ἡ σωτηρία	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of salvation, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “our being saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2339	13:11	jgib		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἡμῶν ἡ σωτηρία	1	Here Paul uses salvation to refer to the future event when Christ returns and Christians receive the full blessings of their salvation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the completion of our salvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2340	13:11	sj56		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐγγύτερον	1	Here Paul speaks of our salvation as if it were an object that could become nearer to a person. He means that our salvation will occur soon. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is going to happen sooner” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2341	13:11	ra5t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὅτε ἐπιστεύσαμεν	1	This phrase indicates the time at which Paul’s Christian readers first started believing in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “when we first believed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2342	13:11	rhdr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἐπιστεύσαμεν	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “we believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2343	13:12	ahn4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἡ νὺξ	1	The night here refers the time period when people do evil deeds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “This time when people act sinfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2344	13:12	dioj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	προέκοψεν	1	Here, advanced refers to the night being almost over. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will soon be over” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2345	13:12	p7xp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἡ δὲ ἡμέρα	1	Paul speaks of the time when Jesus will return to earth as the day. This event is referred to as “the day of the Lord” elsewhere in the Bible and is related to Paul’s reference to a future “salvation” in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and the time when Jesus returns” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2346	13:12	v3m1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἤγγικεν	1	Here Paul speaks of the day as if it were an object that could come near a person. He means that the time when Jesus returns will be soon. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is going to happen soon” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2347	13:12	b4ed		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἀποθώμεθα & ἐνδυσώμεθα	1	In this verse us refers to Paul and his Christian readers, so us would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2348	13:12	bb8t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀποθώμεθα οὖν τὰ ἔργα τοῦ σκότους	1	Here, put off means to completely stop doing something, and the works of the darkness refers to evil deeds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Let us therefore stop doing evil things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2349	13:12	o888		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὰ ἔργα τοῦ σκότους	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe works that are characteristic of the darkness. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the works that are characteristic of the darkness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2350	13:12	y5n4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐνδυσώμεθα	1	Here, put on means to start doing something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “let us therefore start using” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2351	13:12	rjz0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὰ ὅπλα τοῦ φωτός	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe weapons that are characteristic of the light. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the weapons that are characteristic of the light” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2352	13:12	dw5m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὰ ὅπλα τοῦ φωτός	1	Here, weapons refers to what Christians do to oppose evil, and the light refers to good deeds, which is in contrast to the darkness in the previous clause. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “the good deeds used for opposing evil” or “the good deeds that are like weapons for fighting evil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2353	13:13	gv4q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	περιπατήσωμεν	1	Here, us refers to Paul and his Christian readers, so us would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2354	13:13	ketz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εὐσχημόνως περιπατήσωμεν	1	Here Paul uses walk to refer to how people behave or lives their lives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Let us behave decently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2355	13:13	e6ij		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὡς ἐν ἡμέρᾳ	1	Here Paul refers to the unashamed way that Christians are supposed to behave as if they were walking during the day, when people can see what they do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “as if everyone can see what we are doing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2356	13:13	svuf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	μὴ κώμοις καὶ μέθαις, μὴ κοίταις καὶ ἀσελγείαις, μὴ ἔριδι καὶ ζήλῳ	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that clauses would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “not walking in drunken celebrations or drunkenness; not walking in sexual immorality and uncontrolled lust, not walking in strife and jealousy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2357	13:13	wd5c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	κώμοις & μέθαις & κοίταις & ἀσελγείαις & ἔριδι & ζήλῳ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of celebrations, drunkenness, immorality, lust, strife, and jealousy, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in being drunk while celebrating … being drunk … in acting sexually immorally … lusting uncontrollably … in quarreling with others … being jealous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2358	13:13	qes3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	κοίταις καὶ ἀσελγείαις	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize all kinds of sexual sins. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “in every kind of sexually immoral act” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2359	13:14	emp4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	But here indicates that what follows is in strong contrast to what was said in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a strong contrast. Alternate translation: “Instead of doing those things,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
2360	13:14	sir6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐνδύσασθε τὸν Κύριον Ἰησοῦν Χριστόν	1	Paul speaks of Christ as if he were clothing that someone could put on. He means that people should behave like Jesus behaves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “act like the Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2361	13:14	j795		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς σαρκὸς πρόνοιαν μὴ ποιεῖσθε, εἰς ἐπιθυμίας	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of forethought or desires, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “do not think ahead with regard to what the flesh desires” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2362	13:14	xre7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῆς σαρκὸς	1	Here Paul uses flesh figuratively to refer to sinful human nature. See how you translated a similar use of flesh in 7:18. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2363	14:intro	kt8c				0	Romans 14 General Notes Structure and Formatting Instructions for living as Christians (12:1–15:13) How to act toward God (12:1–2) How to serve the church (12:3–8) How to act toward other Christians (12:9–13) How to act toward unbelievers (12:14–21) How to act toward government (13:1–7) How to act toward other people (13:8–10) Act as if the end is near (13:11–14) Do not judge other Christians (14:1–12) Do not tempt other Christians to sin (14:13–23) Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with 14:11 of this chapter, which Paul quotes from the Old Testament. Special Concepts in this Chapter Weak in faith Paul teaches that Christians can have real faith, and yet at the same time be “weak in faith” regarding some situations. This describes Christians whose faith is immature and who feel guilty about doing certain things that God did not forbid. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]]) Dietary restrictions In the law of Moses, God forbade the Jews from eating the meat of some animals which God said were unclean. However, since Christians have been “made dead to the law” (7:4), they are free to eat what they want. The Roman church to which Paul wrote this letter was made up of both Jews and Gentiles. Some of the Jewish believers were offended by the non-Jewish believers eating foods that God had previously forbidden in the law of Moses. The non-Jewish believers were also judging the Jewish believers for not eating those foods. Paul uses this situation to teach that Christians must use their freedom in a way that honors the Lord and shows love to other believers. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]]) Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter Inclusive language In this chapter the pronouns “we” and “us” refer inclusively to all believers in Christ. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2364	14:1	jf8v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀσθενοῦντα τῇ πίστει	1	Here, weak in the faith refers to someone who does not have a mature faith, but feels guilty about doing certain things that God did not forbid. The word weak here does not refer to physical weakness. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “whose faith is not mature” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2365	14:1	bdy7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ πίστει & διακρίσεις	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of faith and judgments, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in what he believes … judging” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2366	14:1	p697		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	μὴ εἰς διακρίσεις διαλογισμῶν	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “not accepting that one for passing judgments on opinions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2367	14:1	i45s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	μὴ εἰς διακρίσεις διαλογισμῶν	1	Here, for indicates that this clause is a purpose clause. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “not for the purpose of passing judgments on opinions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
2368	14:2	tuf5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	ὃς	1	One person here does not refer to one particular person. It refers to any person who believes he can eat any food without sinning against God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “One type of person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
2369	14:2	ii8g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὃς μὲν πιστεύει φαγεῖν πάντα	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “One person believes that God has permitted people to eat any type of food” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2370	14:2	n2n6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὁ & ἀσθενῶν	1	See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2371	14:2	yhhy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	λάχανα ἐσθίει	1	Here Paul implies that this person eats only vegetables. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2372	14:3	n0xd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ ἐσθίων, τὸν μὴ ἐσθίοντα μὴ ἐξουθενείτω; ὁ δὲ μὴ ἐσθίων, τὸν ἐσθίοντα μὴ κρινέτω	1	Here, the one eating refers to the person mentioned in the previous verse who believes that he can eat any kind of food, and the one not eating refers to the person called “the one being weak” in the previous two verses. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Let the one who eats any type of food not despise the one who does not eat every type of food, and let the one who does not eat every type of food not judge the one who eats every type of food” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2373	14:3	pqrp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὁ Θεὸς & αὐτὸν προσελάβετο	1	Although the pronoun him is singular, here it refers to both the one eating and the one not eating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God has accepted them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2374	14:4	q9bx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	σὺ τίς εἶ, ὁ κρίνων ἀλλότριον οἰκέτην?	1	Paul is using a question to emphasize that Christians should not judge each other. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You have no right to judge a household slave belonging to another!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2375	14:4	xq7r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd	σὺ	1	Even though Paul is writing to a group of people, you here is singular. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural form of you in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
2376	14:4	vaym		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀλλότριον οἰκέτην	1	Paul speaks of any Christian as if he were a household slave who belongs to another. He means that all Christians belong to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “someone who belongs to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2377	14:4	ba38		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῷ ἰδίῳ κυρίῳ	1	Paul speaks of God as if he were a master who owns slaves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “To God, who is his master,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2378	14:4	cp9y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῷ ἰδίῳ κυρίῳ στήκει ἢ πίπτει. σταθήσεται δέ, δυνατεῖ γὰρ ὁ Κύριος στῆσαι αὐτόν	1	This could mean: (1) stands and stand refer to pleasing God, and falls refers to not pleasing God. Alternate translation: “He pleases or does not please his own master. But he will be made to please God, for the Lord is able to make him be pleasing” (2) stands and stand refer to being accepted by God at the final judgment, and falls refers to being condemned by God at the final judgment. Alternate translation: “He will either be approved or condemned by his own master. But he will be approved by God, for the Lord is able to approve him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2379	14:4	togo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σταθήσεται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will make him stand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2380	14:4	ucto		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σταθήσεται δέ, δυνατεῖ γὰρ ὁ Κύριος στῆσαι αὐτόν	1	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “But the Lord will accept him because he is able to make the servant acceptable” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2381	14:5	x7j2			κρίνει ἡμέραν παρ’ ἡμέραν	1	Alternate translation: “considers one day to be different from another day” or “considers one day to be more important than another day”
2382	14:5	vm8j			κρίνει πᾶσαν ἡμέραν	1	Alternate translation: “considers all days to be the same” or “considers no day to be more important than another day”
2383	14:5	m511		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἕκαστος ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ νοῒ, πληροφορείσθω	1	Paul implies that each person should be convinced about what he thinks honors the Lord. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Let each one be fully convinced in his own mind that what he does honors the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2384	14:5	y5ea		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἕκαστος & πληροφορείσθω	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Let each one be completely certain” or “Let each one fully convince himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2385	14:6	pfn6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ φρονῶν τὴν ἡμέραν	1	The one regarding refers to the person in the previous verse who “judges day from day”. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The one who regards one day as more important than another day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2386	14:6	esu5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὁ ἐσθίων	1	Here, the one who eats refers to the person in 14:3 who eats all kinds of food. Paul is leaving out a word that this phrase would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this word from 14:3. Alternate translation: “the one eating every kind of food” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2387	14:6	f9tm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	Κυρίῳ & Κυρίῳ & Κυρίῳ	1	In this verse the phrase for the Lord indicates the purpose for which these people act in these ways. They do so in order to benefit or honor the Lord. Use the most natural way in your language to express a purpose. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of honoring the Lord … for the purpose of honoring the Lord … for the purpose of honoring the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
2388	14:6	ad27		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εὐχαριστεῖ & τῷ Θεῷ & καὶ εὐχαριστεῖ τῷ Θεῷ	1	Here Paul speaks of expressing thanks as if words of gratitude were something that could be given to a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he thanks God … he also thanks God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2389	14:6	jh8j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	καὶ ὁ μὴ ἐσθίων	1	Here, the one who not eating refers to the person in 14:3 who only eats vegetables. Paul is leaving out a word that this phrase would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this word from 14:3. Alternate translation: “the one who eats does not eat every kind of food” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2390	14:7	t6q7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul said in the previous clause is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2391	14:7	u9ar		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	Here, us refers to Paul and his Christian readers, so us would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2392	14:7	txm3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἑαυτῷ & ἑαυτῷ	1	Here, for himself means to do something only to benefit oneself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the benefit of himself … for the benefit of himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2393	14:7	c9ls		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	οὐδεὶς	2	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2394	14:8	gbxd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2395	14:8	s3lb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ζῶμεν & ζῶμεν & ἀποθνῄσκωμεν & ἀποθνῄσκομεν & ζῶμεν & ἀποθνῄσκωμεν & ἐσμέν	1	In this verse we refers to Paul and his Christian readers, so we would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2396	14:8	xf7x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῷ Κυρίῳ	-1	Here, for the Lord means to do something only to benefit the Lord. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the benefit of the Lord … for the benefit of the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2397	14:8	r1hh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	The word Therefore indicates that what follows is a logical conclusion. Therefore here indicates that what follows is the logical conclusion to what Paul has stated in 14:14–20. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “As a result” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2398	14:9	pbyn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2399	14:10	xciu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd	σὺ & κρίνεις & σου & σὺ & ἐξουθενεῖς & σου	1	Even though Paul is writing to a group of people, you and your here are singular. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural form of you in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
2400	14:10	db9a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί κρίνεις τὸν ἀδελφόν σου? ἢ καὶ σὺ τί ἐξουθενεῖς τὸν ἀδελφόν σου?	1	Paul is using two questions here to emphasize that Christians should not judge each other. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you have no right to judge your brother! And you also have no right to despise your brother!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2401	14:10	al55		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τὸν ἀδελφόν	-1	Here, brother refers to a fellow Christian. See how you translated “brothers” in 1:13. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2402	14:10	b497		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows is the reason why Christians should not judge each other. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “Do not judge others due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2403	14:10	jq85		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πάντες & παραστησόμεθα τῷ βήματι τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here, present ourselves before refers to standing in front of a judge in order to be judged, and the judgment seat of God refers to the place where God judges. Paul means that all believers will be judged by God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we will all be judged by God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2404	14:11	pldr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γάρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2405	14:11	mr7r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	γέγραπται	1	See how you translated the similar phrase in 1:17. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
2406	14:11	fel6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γέγραπται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Since Paul is referring to something Isaiah wrote (Isaiah 49:18 and 45:23), you could indicate Isaiah as the subject. Alternate translation: “Isaiah wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2407	14:11	lvwr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ζῶ ἐγώ, λέγει Κύριος, ὅτι ἐμοὶ κάμψει πᾶν γόνυ, καὶ πᾶσα γλῶσσα ἐξομολογήσεται τῷ Θεῷ	1	This sentence contains quotations from Isaiah 49:18 and 45:23. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
2408	14:11	yeb5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ζῶ ἐγώ & ἐμοὶ	1	In this sentence I and me refer to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “As I, God, live … to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2409	14:11	dxdt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ζῶ ἐγώ, λέγει Κύριος	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “The Lord says, ‘As I live,’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2410	14:11	tf76		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ζῶ ἐγώ	1	This phrase is used to start an oath or solemn promise. Use the most natural way in your language to indicate an oath. Alternate translation: “You can be certain that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2411	14:11	sb6q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	κάμψει πᾶν γόνυ, καὶ πᾶσα γλῶσσα ἐξομολογήσεται τῷ Θεῷ	1	Paul uses the words knee and tongue to refer to the entire person who is doing these acts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “every person will bow down and every person will confess to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2412	14:11	fokd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	κάμψει πᾶν γόνυ	1	This action was an expression of worship in this culture. See how you translated a similar expression in 11:4. Alternate translation: “every person will worship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2413	14:11	glhx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἐξομολογήσεται	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “will confess that I am Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2414	14:11	vngp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	τῷ Θεῷ	1	The Lord uses the word God to refer to himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
2415	14:12	q0fv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἄρα οὖν	1	See how you translated this phrase in 5:18. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2416	14:12	nsy8			περὶ ἑαυτοῦ, λόγον δώσει τῷ Θεῷ	1	Alternate translation: “must explain our actions to God”
2417	14:12	zb6k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	περὶ ἑαυτοῦ	1	Although the term himself is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “concerning oneself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2418	14:13	epi0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	The word Therefore indicates that what follows is a logical conclusion. Therefore here indicates that what follows in this verse is the result of what Paul said in 14:10–12. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “Because of these things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2419	14:13	ia62		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	τὸ μὴ τιθέναι πρόσκομμα τῷ ἀδελφῷ ἢ σκάνδαλον	1	Here, stumbling block and trap mean basically the same thing. They both refer to tempting someone to sin. Paul uses them to emphasize what he is saying. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “not to do or say anything at all that might cause a brother to sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2420	14:13	fgg7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸ μὴ τιθέναι πρόσκομμα	1	See how you translated stumbling block in 11:9. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2421	14:13	cx4s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τῷ ἀδελφῷ	1	Here, brother refers to a fellow Christian. See how you translated this word in 14:10. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2422	14:14	t7gc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	οἶδα καὶ πέπεισμαι ἐν Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ	1	Here, know and am persuaded mean very similar things. Paul uses them to emphasize what he is saying. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I am completely certain” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2423	14:14	qm09		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ	1	Here, in could indicate: (1) the means by which Paul was persuaded. Alternate translation: “by means of the Lord Jesus” (2) Paul being united with Christ. Alternate translation: “in union with the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2424	14:14	erfx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐδὲν κοινὸν & κοινὸν & κοινόν	1	The next verse indicates that here Paul is specifically referring to unclean foods, which were foods that Jews were forbidden to eat according to the law of Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “no food is forbidden to be eaten … forbidden … it is forbidden food” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2425	14:14	fuk1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐδὲν κοινὸν δι’ ἑαυτοῦ	1	If your readers would misunderstand this double negative, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “everything by itself is clean” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
2426	14:14	mjc5			δι’ ἑαυτοῦ	1	Alternate translation: “by its nature” or “because of what it is”
2427	14:15	vd20		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰ γὰρ διὰ βρῶμα	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul’s readers should obey the command he gave in 14:13. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: ““Do not place a stumbling block before your brother because, if on account of food,”” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2428	14:15	iw7w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ βρῶμα	1	This phrase refers to a Christian eating food that another Christians thinks is unclean, as mentioned in the previous verse and 14:2–6. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “over the matter of food” or “because of what you eat” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2429	14:15	tfix		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd	σου & περιπατεῖς & σου	1
2430	14:15	ln42		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ὁ ἀδελφός	1	Here, brother refers to a fellow Christian. See how you translated this word in 14:10. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2431	14:15	a4kj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	λυπεῖται	1	Here, hurt refers to experiencing emotional or spiritual offense or suffering. It does not refer to being physically injured. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is offended” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2432	14:15	bj8v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὐκέτι κατὰ ἀγάπην περιπατεῖς	1	Here Paul uses walking to refer to how people behave or live their lives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See similar uses of “walk” in 6:4, 8:4, and 13:13. Alternate translation: “you are no longer behaving according to love” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2433	14:15	n099		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μὴ τῷ βρώματί σου ἐκεῖνον ἀπόλλυε, ὑπὲρ οὗ Χριστὸς ἀπέθανεν	1	Paul uses destroy here to refer to causing someone to stop trusting in Jesus, which will result in that person experiencing punishment forever in hell. See how you translated “destruction” in 9:22. Alternate translation: “Do not cause that one from whom Christ died to stop trusting in Jesus and experience eternal destruction” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2434	14:15	sn7w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῷ βρώματί σου	1	This phrase refers to a Christian eating food that another Christian thinks is unclean, as mentioned in the previous verse and 14:2–6. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “over the matter of food” or, between commas, “because of what you eat” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2435	14:16	zgzz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	The word So indicates that what follows is a logical conclusion. So here indicates that what follows in this verse is the logical conclusion to what Paul has stated in the previous verses. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “As a result,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2436	14:16	rvtd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὑμῶν τὸ ἀγαθόν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of good, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what is good for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2437	14:16	h3af		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ ἀγαθόν	1	Here, good could refer to: (1) the good things that God gives Christians. Alternate translation: “good things” (2) the freedom that Christians have to eat any food they want to eat. Alternate translation: “your freedom to eat anything” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2438	14:16	gl48		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μὴ βλασφημείσθω & ὑμῶν τὸ ἀγαθόν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “do not allow people to blaspheme your good” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2439	14:17	v6jq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. ddFor here indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul wants his readers to obey what he commanded in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2440	14:17	m0ya		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐ & ἐστιν	1	Here, is not indicates that what follows is what the kingdom of God does not consist of or is not concerned with. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “does not consist of” or “is not concerned with” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2441	14:17	tyyq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “but is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2442	14:17	j92k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δικαιοσύνη, καὶ εἰρήνη, καὶ χαρὰ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of righteousness, peace, and joy, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what is righteous and what is peaceful and what is joyful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2443	14:17	sdlj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ	1	Here, in the Holy Spirit could refer to: (1) the means by which Christians experience righteousness and peace and joy. Alternate translation: “by the Holy Spirit” (2) Christians being united with the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “in union with the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2444	14:18	i2za		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2445	14:18	iqg3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τούτῳ	1	Here, this way refers to the “righteousness and peace and joy” mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in this righteous, peaceful, and joyful way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2446	14:18	am8m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δόκιμος τοῖς ἀνθρώποις	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “men approve it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2447	14:18	gy7n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τοῖς ἀνθρώποις	1	Although the term men is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “by people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2448	14:19	q5fk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἄρα οὖν	1	See how you translated this phrase in 5:18. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2449	14:19	xxgm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	διώκωμεν	1	Here Paul refers to the things of peace and the things of the building up as if they were something that people could pursue. He is telling Christians to do these things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “let us commit to doing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2450	14:19	sfpg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης & καὶ τὰ τῆς οἰκοδομῆς	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe things that result in the peace and the building up of other Christians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the things that result in peace and the things that result in building up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2451	14:19	i3rv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὰ τῆς οἰκοδομῆς τῆς εἰς ἀλλήλους	1	Here, Paul speaks of helping other Christians become more spiritually mature as if one were building up a building. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the things that help one another grow spiritually mature” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2452	14:20	p65h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μὴ & κατάλυε τὸ ἔργον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here, tear down refers to undoing the work God has done. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Do not undo the work of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2453	14:20	zbd1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἕνεκεν βρώματος	1	This phrase refers to a Christian eating food that another Christian thinks is unclean, as mentioned in 14:2–6, 13–17. See how you translated the similar phrase in 14:15. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2454	14:20	r7u3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πάντα μὲν καθαρά	1	Here, things refers to food and clean refers to something that God has permitted. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “All foods are indeed permitted by God to be eaten” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2455	14:20	l75q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	κακὸν	1	Here, it refers to the act of eating a food that someone believes God has not permitted. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “eating those things is evil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2456	14:20	dk72		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ τῷ διὰ προσκόμματος ἐσθίοντι	1	Here, eats with a stumbling block refers to tempting another believer to sin by eating food that the other believer thinks is sinful to eat. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the man to eat what causes another believer to stumble” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2457	14:20	fz0m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	προσκόμματος	1	See how you translated stumbling block in 11:9. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2458	14:21	mrr4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	μηδὲ	2	Paul is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the word from the context. Alternate translation: “and it is good not” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2459	14:21	e1du		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd	σου	1	Even though Paul is writing to a group of people, your here is singular. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural form of you in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
2460	14:21	iq9g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ὁ ἀδελφός	1	Here, brother refers to a fellow Christian. See how you translated this word in 14:10. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2461	14:21	m5nb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	προσκόπτει	1	Here, stumbles refers to another believer succombing to the temptation to sin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2462	14:21	k1bn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	ἢ σκανδαλίζεται, ἢ ἀσθενεῖ	1	These words are found in some traditional versions of the Bible, but they are not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. ULT and UST indicate this by putting these words in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including this verse if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that this verse may not be original, such as by putting it in brackets or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
2463	14:21	o6kn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σκανδαλίζεται, ἢ ἀσθενεῖ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that offends him or makes him weak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2464	14:21	mnon		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀσθενεῖ	1	Here, weak refers to being spiritually immature. See how you translated “weak in the faith” in 14:1. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2465	14:22	u1cf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	σὺ πίστιν ἣν ἔχεις	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “The things that you yourself believe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2466	14:22	hjk9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	σὺ πίστιν ἣν ἔχεις	1	Here, faith refers to what Christians believe that God permits them to do, as mentioned in 14:1–6. If it might be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The beliefs that your yourself have about what God permits you do to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2467	14:22	b3hi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd	σὺ & ἔχεις & σεαυτὸν	1	Even though Paul is writing to a group of people, you and yourself here are singular. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural form of you in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
2468	14:22	tkse		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατὰ σεαυτὸν ἔχε ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	This clause refers to keeping one’s beliefs between oneself and God, rather than telling other people about them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “keep it between yourself and God” or “keep it between you and God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2469	14:22	bi7e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here Paul speaks of people keeping what they believe before God as if they were standing in front of God. Paul means that people should keep private their beliefs about what God permits them to do, as if God is the only one who knows about those beliefs. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2470	14:22	r53r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ μὴ κρίνων ἑαυτὸν	1	Here, judge refers to feeling guilty or condemning oneself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “is the one who does not feel guilty” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2471	14:22	odxh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἑαυτὸν ἐν ᾧ δοκιμάζει	1	Although the terms himself and he are masculine, Paul is using the words here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “oneself in what one approves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2472	14:22	r8a1			ἐν ᾧ δοκιμάζει	1	Alternate translation: “with respect to what he approves” or “in regard to what he approves”
2473	14:23	zexs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Here, the word But introduces a contrast. But here indicates that what follows is in strong contrast to what was said in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a strong contrast. Alternate translation: “On the contrary,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
2474	14:23	s1ph		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ & διακρινόμενος, ἐὰν φάγῃ, κατακέκριται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The person doing the action could be: (1) God. Alternate translation: “God condemns the one who passes judgment if he eats” (2) the person who eats. Alternate translation: “the one who passes judgment condemns himself if he eats” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2475	14:23	wa8s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὁ & διακρινόμενος	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of judgment, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the one who judges” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2476	14:23	dkcw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ & διακρινόμενος	1	This phrase refers to a person who has determined that eating certain foods is prohibited by God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the one who judges that it is not right to eat certain foods” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2477	14:23	b6t9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐὰν φάγῃ	1	Paul implies that the person eats what that person believes God has forbidden to be eaten. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “if he eats what he thinks God has forbidden him to eat” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2478	14:23	l9ga		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὐκ	1	Here, it refers to eating food that someone believes God has forbidden to eat. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “eating what one thinks is forbidden to eat is not” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2479	14:23	yr44		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκ πίστεως	-1	In this verse from refers to what a person bases their actions on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “based on faith … based on faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2480	14:23	z696		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πίστεως & πίστεως	1	See how you translated the abstract noun faith in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2481	14:23	u80o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πᾶν	1	Here, all refers to anything that a person does. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “all that a person does” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2482	14:23	u9p2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτία	1	See how you translated the abstract noun sin in 6:1. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2483	15:intro	ae9u				0	Romans 15 General Notes Structure and Formatting Instructions for living as Christians (12:1–15:13) How to act toward God (12:1–2) How to serve the church (12:3–8) How to act toward other Christians (12:9–13) How to act toward unbelievers (12:14–21) How to act toward government (13:1–7) How to act toward other people (13:8–10) Act as if the end is near (13:11–14) Do not judge other Christians (14:1–12) Do not tempt other Christians to sin (14:13–23) Be united with other Christians (15:1–13) Conclusion (15:14–16:27) Paul describes his mission (15:14–21) Paul’s travel plans (15:22–33) Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with 15:9–11 and 21 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament. Some translations set prose quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words in 15:12. Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter Able and unable In 15:1–6 Paul concludes his teaching from Chapter 14 about how Christians with different degrees of spiritual maturity should act toward each other. He refers to some Christians as those who are “weak in faith” (14:1) or “unable” (15:1). These phrases describe Christians who have immature faith and feel guilty about doing certain things that God did not forbid. By contrast, he refers to spiritually mature Christians as those who are “able” (15:1). Paul teaches that those who are strong in faith need to help those who are weak in faith and neither should judge the other. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]]) Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter Forms of ‘You’ In this chapter, with three exceptions, the words “you” and “your” are plural and refer to Paul’s Christian readers, whom he calls “brothers” in 15:14 and 15:30. Notes will discuss the use of singular forms of “you” and “your” in 15:3 and 15:9. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) Inclusive language In this chapter the pronouns “we,” “us,” “our,” and “ourselves” refer inclusively to Paul’s Christian readers. Paul calls these people “brothers” in 15:14 and 15:30. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2484	15:1	u19s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς & ἑαυτοῖς	1	Here and throughout this chapter the pronouns we and ourselves refer inclusively to all believers in Christ. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2485	15:1	u73x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἡμεῖς, οἱ δυνατοὶ	1	Here, we, being able refers to Paul and other people who have mature faith. See the discussion about this in the General Notes for this chapter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “we, having mature faith” or “we, being spiritually strong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2486	15:1	h18p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὰ ἀσθενήματα & βαστάζειν	1	Paul speaks of weaknesses as if they were objects that a person could bear. He means that mature Christians should patiently help spiritually weak Christians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “help overcome the weaknesses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2487	15:1	kuhe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὰ ἀσθενήματα	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of weaknesses, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the weak qualities” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2488	15:1	cv61		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῶν ἀδυνάτων	1	Here, the ones who are unable refers to Christians who are not spiritually mature. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the ones who have immature faith” or “of the ones who are spiritually weak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2489	15:2	bkon		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῷ πλησίον	1	Here, neighbor refers to other Christians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “his fellow Christians” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2490	15:2	kz0t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς & πρὸς	1	Here, for and toward indicate that what follows are purposes for pleasing one’s neighbor. Use the most natural way in your language for indicating a purpose. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of … and for the purpose of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
2491	15:2	z2k8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἰκοδομήν	1	See how you translated building up in 14:19 (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2492	15:3	jqul		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows in this verse is an example of pleasing others, as Paul mentioned in the previous verse. If it might be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “For example,” or “As an illustration,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2493	15:3	h571		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	See how you translated this phrase in 1:17. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
2494	15:3	y6fe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Since Paul is referring to something David wrote, you could indicate David as the subject. Alternate translation: “just as David wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2495	15:3	bcz1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	In the quotation that follows, Paul quotes Psalm 69:9 in which David records Christ (the Messiah) speaking to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “just as it is written that the Messiah said to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2496	15:3	nlu9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	οἱ ὀνειδισμοὶ τῶν ὀνειδιζόντων σε, ἐπέπεσαν ἐπ’ ἐμέ	1	This sentence is a quotation of Psalm 69:9. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
2497	15:3	ulis		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	οἱ ὀνειδισμοὶ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of insults, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “The insulting words” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2498	15:3	qni7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἱ ὀνειδισμοὶ τῶν ὀνειδιζόντων σε, ἐπέπεσαν ἐπ’ ἐμέ	1	Paul quotes David referring to insults against God also affecting Christ as if those insults were objects that fell on him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The insults of those who insult you are also insults against me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2499	15:4	h6qm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows emphasizes the importance of the scriptural quotation in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2500	15:4	txd4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὅσα & προεγράφη & ἐγράφη	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whatever the prophets wrote previously, they wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2501	15:4	pgdw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὅσα & προεγράφη	1	Paul is referring to what was previously written in the Scriptures. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “what was previously written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2502	15:4	q3jp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς & ἵνα	1	Here, for and in order that indicate that what follows are purposes for the Scriptures. Use the natural form in your language for indicating purpose clauses. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of … for the purpose that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
2503	15:4	dx6h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς τὴν ἡμετέραν διδασκαλίαν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of instruction, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “for instructing us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2504	15:4	wk5h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ἵνα διὰ τῆς ὑπομονῆς καὶ διὰ τῆς παρακλήσεως τῶν Γραφῶν, τὴν ἐλπίδα ἔχωμεν	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “in order that we would have the hope through the patience and through the encouragement of the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2505	15:4	i0z9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ὑπομονῆς & τῆς παρακλήσεως & τὴν ἐλπίδα	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of patience, encouragement, and hope, you could express the same ideas in another way. See how you translated patience in 2:4, encouragement in 12:8, and hope in 5:4. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2506	15:4	g6r1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	διὰ τῆς ὑπομονῆς καὶ διὰ τῆς παρακλήσεως τῶν Γραφῶν	1	Here Paul speaks about the Scriptures as if they were a person who could have patience and be encouraging. He means that God uses the Scriptures to show his patience and encouragement. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “through the patience and through the encouragement that God gives in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
2507	15:5	y97a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ὁ & Θεὸς τῆς ὑπομονῆς καὶ τῆς παρακλήσεως	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe God as being characterized by patience and encouragement. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the God who is characterized by patience and encouragement” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2508	15:5	u2zm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ὑπομονῆς & τῆς παρακλήσεως	1	See how you translated patience and encouragement in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2509	15:5	ip4l			τὸ αὐτὸ φρονεῖν ἐν ἀλλήλοις	1	Alternate translation: “to agree with each other”
2510	15:5	g5xm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατὰ Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν	1	This could refer to: (1) the example of Christ. Alternate translation: “according to the example of Christ Jesus” (2) the will of Christ. Alternate translation: “according to the will of Christ Jesus” (3) both the example and will of Christ. Alternate translation: “according to Christ Jesus’ will and example” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2511	15:6	lp5m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	Here, so that introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for the unity that he prayed for in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “for the purpose that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
2512	15:6	smvb			ὁμοθυμαδὸν	1	Alternate translation: “with the same purpose”
2513	15:6	uz1z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν ἑνὶ στόματι, δοξάζητε	1	Here, glorify with one mouth refers to being united while praising God aloud. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “you might be united while praising God” or “you might praise God together in unity as if only one mouth were speaking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2514	15:6	nvq8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατέρα	1	Father is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
2515	15:7	prx1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ	1	The word Therefore indicates that what follows is a logical conclusion. Therefore here introduces the conclusion of what Paul has said in 14:1–15:6. See how you translated this word in 1:24. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2516	15:7	z941		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς δόξαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here, to introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which Christians should accept each other as Christ accepted Christians. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “for the purpose of glorifying God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
2517	15:8	ae6k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that what follows explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2518	15:8	gbh8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	λέγω	1	The pronoun I refers to Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2519	15:8	refk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	διάκονον & ἀληθείας & τὰς ἐπαγγελίας	1	See how you translated the abstract nouns servant in 13:4, truth in 2:8, and “promises” in 4:13. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2520	15:8	k4my		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	περιτομῆς	1	Here, the circumcision refers to the people who have been circumcised: the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2521	15:8	rtbo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς τὸ βεβαιῶσαι	1	Here, to introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating a purpose for which Christ became a servant of the circumcision. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “for the purpose of confirming” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
2522	15:8	prp8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὰς ἐπαγγελίας τῶν πατέρων	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the promises that God made to the fathers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the promises given to the fathers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2523	15:8	gu7z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῶν πατέρων	1	See how you translated this phrase in 9:5. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2524	15:8	dxz1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὰς ἐπαγγελίας τῶν πατέρων	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the promises that God gave to the ancestors of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2525	15:9	k5q7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	τὰ δὲ ἔθνη	1	Here, and indicates that what follows is a second reason why Christ became a “servant of the circumcision.” Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “and also for the purpose of the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
2526	15:9	el62		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐλέους	1	See how you translated mercy in 9:23. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2527	15:9	kebq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	See how you translated this phrase in 1:17. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
2528	15:9	xgc4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Since Paul is referring to something David wrote (Psalm 18:49), you could indicate David as the subject. Alternate translation: “just as David wrote” or “just as God said through David” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2529	15:9	tfh8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	διὰ τοῦτο ἐξομολογήσομαί σοι ἐν ἔθνεσι, καὶ τῷ ὀνόματί σου ψαλῶ	1	This sentence is a quotation of Psalm 18:49. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
2530	15:9	em5q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῷ ὀνόματί σου	1	Here, your name refers to God himself. If it might be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2531	15:10	az24		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ πάλιν	1	Here, again indicates that what follows is another quotation from Scripture that expresses the same idea of the quotation in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “And also” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2532	15:10	iprn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	λέγει	1	This phrase indicates that what follows is a quotation of something Moses said in an Old Testament book (Deuteronomy 32:43). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “it says in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
2533	15:10	qt5h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	εὐφράνθητε, ἔθνη, μετὰ τοῦ λαοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	This sentence is a quotation from Deuteronomy 32:43. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
2534	15:10	x4kg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	μετὰ τοῦ λαοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	Here, his refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “with the people of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2535	15:11	xw7t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	καὶ πάλιν	1	This phrase indicates that what follows is another quotation from Scripture (Psalm 117:1). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “And also in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
2536	15:11	gk0i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	αἰνεῖτε πάντα τὰ ἔθνη τὸν Κύριον; καὶ ἐπαινεσάτωσαν αὐτὸν πάντες οἱ λαοί	1	This sentence is a quotation from Psalm 117:1. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
2537	15:12	inaw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	καὶ πάλιν Ἠσαΐας λέγει	1	This phrase indicates that what follows is a quotation of something Isaiah said in an Old Testament book (Isaiah 11:10). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “And also in the Scriptures, Isaiah says” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
2538	15:12	u5kr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture	Ἠσαΐας λέγει	1	Here Paul uses the present tense verb says to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “Isaiah said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
2539	15:12	lpf6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἡ ῥίζα τοῦ Ἰεσσαί & ὁ ἀνιστάμενος & αὐτῷ	1	These three expressions all refer to the same person, the Messiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The descendant of Jesse, the Messiah … Messiah is the one who rises … the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2540	15:12	fta5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἡ ῥίζα τοῦ Ἰεσσαί	1	Paul quotes Isaiah referring to a descendant of Jesse as if that person were a root or shoot that had grown out of a plant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The descendant of Jesse” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2541	15:12	lgr5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὁ ἀνιστάμενος	1	Paul quotes Isaiah using rising to refer to someone becoming a king. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who becomes king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2542	15:13	t3dd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ὁ & Θεὸς τῆς ἐλπίδος	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe God as the source of hope. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the God who gives hope” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2543	15:13	u77u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ἐλπίδος & χαρᾶς καὶ εἰρήνης & ἐλπίδι & δυνάμει	1	See how you translated the abstract nouns hope in the previous verse, joy and peace in 14:17, and power in 1:16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2544	15:13	w7wn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὁ & Θεὸς τῆς ἐλπίδος πληρώσαι ὑμᾶς πάσης χαρᾶς καὶ εἰρήνης	1	Paul refers to people experiencing joy and peace as if they were things that could fill someone. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “may the God of hope allow you to experience all joy and peace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2545	15:13	zmno		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ πιστεύειν	1	Here, in indicates that believing is the means by which people will experience all joy and peace. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of believing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2546	15:13	aee3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	τῷ πιστεύειν	1	Paul is leaving out some words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “in believing God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2547	15:13	a6rk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς τὸ περισσεύειν ὑμᾶς	1	Here, so that indicates that what follows is a purpose clause. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose that you might abound” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
2548	15:13	k3y1			εἰς τὸ περισσεύειν ὑμᾶς	1	Alternative translation: “so that you will have this hope with abundance”
2549	15:14	h98x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πέπεισμαι & καὶ αὐτὸς ἐγὼ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has also persuaded me myself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2550	15:14	g16z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς ἐγὼ & αὐτοὶ & ἐστε	1	Paul uses the words myself and yourselves to emphasize how certain he is that his readers are good and knowledgeable Christians. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I indeed … you are indeed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2551	15:14	d878		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	See how you translated this word in 1:13. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2552	15:14	jne2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	αὐτοὶ μεστοί ἐστε ἀγαθωσύνης	1	Paul refers to people experiencing goodness as if it were something that could make someone full. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “you yourselves fully experience goodness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2553	15:14	ext0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀγαθωσύνης & γνώσεως	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of goodness and knowledge, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “of what is good … that is knowable” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2554	15:14	wit1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πεπληρωμένοι πάσης γνώσεως	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God having filled you with all knowledge” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2555	15:14	fkec		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πεπληρωμένοι πάσης γνώσεως	1	Here Paul refers to people having knowledge as if it were something that someone could befilled with. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “having all knowledge” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2556	15:14	qhv3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάσης γνώσεως	1	Here, all is an exaggeration that Paul uses to emphasize how much knowledge these people have. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows emphasis. Alternate translation: “abundant knowledge” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2557	15:15	j9yk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀπὸ μέρους	1	Here, in part refers to some parts of this letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in some parts of this letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2558	15:15	fuw3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ὡς ἐπαναμιμνῄσκων ὑμᾶς	1	This is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which Paul wrote certain things in this letter. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of reminding you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
2559	15:15	n2gr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὴν χάριν τὴν δοθεῖσάν μοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the grace that God gave me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2560	15:15	nln5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὴν χάριν	1	Here, grace refers to God graciously choosing Paul to be an apostle. See how you translated the similar phrase in 12:3. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2561	15:16	coxw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς τὸ εἶναί με	1	Here, in order for indicates that what follows is the purpose for which God graciously gave Paul authority, as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose that I would be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
2562	15:16	zgo0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	λειτουργὸν	1	See how you translated servant in 13:4. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2563	15:16	wiw1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἱερουργοῦντα τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἵνα & ἡ προσφορὰ τῶν ἐθνῶν	1	Paul speaks of his preaching the gospel to the Gentiles as if he is a priest who serves the gospel by making an offering to God. He speaks of the Gentiles who become Christians as a result of his preaching as if they were the offering that he makes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “preaching the gospel so that the Gentiles who believe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2564	15:16	hert		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	Here, so that indicates that what follows is the purpose for which Paul preaches the gospel to the Gentiles. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
2565	15:16	veeq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἡ προσφορὰ τῶν ἐθνῶν	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the offering that consists of the Gentiles. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the offering, that is, the Gentiles,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2566	15:16	ah87		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ προσφορὰ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of offering, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what is offered” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2567	15:16	lztb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἡγιασμένη ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom the Holy Spirit sanctified” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2568	15:17	s7ns		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1
2569	15:17	mtjb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	See how you translated this phrase in 6:23. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2570	15:17	lpc0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἔχω & καύχησιν	1	Here, Paul speaks of a boast as if it were an object someone can have. He means that he is rightfully able to boast. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I can boast” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2571	15:18	b3q2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2572	15:18	lu97		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐ & τολμήσω τι λαλεῖν, ὧν οὐ κατειργάσατο Χριστὸς δι’ ἐμοῦ	1	If your readers would misunderstand this double negative, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “I will only dare to speak what Christ produced through me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
2573	15:18	by9s			εἰς ὑπακοὴν ἐθνῶν	1	Here, for indicates the result of what Christ produced through Paul. Use the natural way in your language to express a result. Alternate translation: “that resulted in the obedience of the Gentiles”
2574	15:18	zdk4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὑπακοὴν ἐθνῶν & ἔργῳ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of obedience and deed, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how the Gentiles obey … what is done” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2575	15:18	yua7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὑπακοὴν ἐθνῶν	1	Here, obedience refers to the Gentiles obeying the command to repent and believe the gospel, which is part of the gospel message. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles to obey what God commanded in the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2576	15:18	xds3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	λόγῳ καὶ ἔργῳ	1	Here, word and deed could refer to: (1) what Paul had said and done that resulted in the Gentiles trusting in Christ. Alternate translation: “by my words and actions” (2) how the Gentiles displayed their obedience. Alternate translation: “by their words and actions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2577	15:18	pqtq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	λόγῳ	1	Here Paul uses the term word to describe what he had said by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by my words” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2578	15:19	oxsn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν δυνάμει σημείων καὶ τεράτων	1	This clause indicates an additional means by which Christ produced through Paul “the obedience of the Gentiles” that is referred to in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and by means of the power of signs and wonders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2579	15:19	g8bk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	σημείων καὶ τεράτων	1	This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with and. The word wonders describes the character of the miraculous signs that the Spirit enabled Paul to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “of wonderful miraculous signs” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
2580	15:19	wxml		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν δυνάμει Πνεύματος Θεοῦ	1	This clause indicates that the Spirit of God empowered Paul’s “word and deed” and signs and wonders to result in non-Jews trusting in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “empowered by the Spirit of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2581	15:19	c8ff		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τοῦ Ἰλλυρικοῦ	1	The word Illyricum is the name of a Roman province that was close to Italy. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2582	15:19	f60i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	πεπληρωκέναι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Paul speaks of preaching the gospel throughout an entire area as if he had fulfilled the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I have thoroughly proclaimed the gospel of Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2583	15:20	x9xm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	φιλοτιμούμενον εὐαγγελίζεσθαι	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “I am counting it an honor to proclaim the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2584	15:20	n5fm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	φιλοτιμούμενον	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of honor, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “counting it honorable” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2585	15:20	r9t1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εὐαγγελίζεσθαι, οὐχ ὅπου ὠνομάσθη Χριστός	1	The clause not where Christ has been named indicates the kind of places where Paul would not proclaim the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this more explicit. Alternate translation: “to proclaim the gospel in places other than where Christ has been named” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2586	15:20	gpcl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὠνομάσθη Χριστός	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people have named Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2587	15:20	i4sx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὠνομάσθη Χριστός	1	Here, has been named refers to speaking someone’s name. It does not refer to giving someone a name. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Christ’s name has been spoken” or “Christ’s name has been heard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2588	15:20	kt3r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μὴ ἐπ’ ἀλλότριον θεμέλιον οἰκοδομῶ	1	Paul speaks of his work of preaching the gospel and making disciples as if he were building a house on a foundation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “I might not continue doing the work that another man has already begun” or “I might not be like someone who builds upon another man’s foundation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2589	15:21	dcs1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	The word But introduces a contrast**. Here, But** indicates that what follows is the opposite of what Paul said in the last clause of the previous verse. Use the best way in your language to indicate a strong contrast. Alternate translation: “On the contrary,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
2590	15:21	zyps		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀλλὰ καθὼς γέγραπται	1	In this verse Paul quotes Scripture to state that he preaches the gospel to those who have never heard it, which he also stated in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Instead of doing that, I aspire to preach the gospel where it has not been preached before. Doing so is just as it is written” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2591	15:21	rb5r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	See how you translated this phrase in 1:17. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
2592	15:21	wy8k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Since Paul is referring to something Isaiah wrote, you could indicate Isaiah as the subject. Alternate translation: “just as Isaiah wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2593	15:21	ocug		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	οἷς οὐκ ἀνηγγέλη περὶ αὐτοῦ, ὄψονται, καὶ οἳ οὐκ ἀκηκόασιν, συνήσουσιν	1	This sentence is a quotation from Isaiah 52:15. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
2594	15:21	zbeu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	οἷς οὐκ ἀνηγγέλη περὶ αὐτοῦ, ὄψονται, καὶ οἳ οὐκ ἀκηκόασιν, συνήσουσιν	1	These two clauses mean the same thing. Isaiah says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that non-Jewish people will hear about the Messiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “Those who have not heard about him will certainly understand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
2595	15:21	u8d6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οἷς οὐκ ἀνηγγέλη περὶ αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Those to whom no one had reported concerning him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2596	15:21	m1f0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὄψονται & συνήσουσιν	1	Isaiah implies that the non-Jewish people who never heard about the Messiah will understand who the Messiah is and what he has done. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternative translation: “will see who the Messiah is … will understand who he is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2597	15:21	eihc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὄψονται	1	Paul quotes Isaiah using see to refer to perceiving something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “will perceive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2598	15:22	f1fq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ	1	The word Therefore indicates that what follows is a logical conclusion. Here, Therefore indicates that what follows is the result of Paul’s desire to preach the gospel in places where people have never heard it before. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation (without a comma following): “For this reason” or “This is the reason why” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2599	15:22	ex5j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καὶ ἐνεκοπτόμην	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “those things also prevented me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2600	15:22	uf9y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ὑμᾶς	1	Here, you is plural and refers to the believers in Rome to whom Paul was writing this letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you believers who are in Rome” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
2601	15:23	hgiv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	μηκέτι τόπον ἔχων ἐν τοῖς κλίμασι τούτοις, ἐπιποθείαν δὲ ἔχων τοῦ ἐλθεῖν πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἀπὸ ἱκανῶν ἐτῶν	1	These clauses are two reasons why Paul hopes to see the Roman believers, as stated in the next verse. If you keep this verse and the next verse as one sentence in your translation, then you could use the most natural way in your language to indicate reasons. However, if you translate this verse and the next verse as separate sentences, then you could show that these clauses are reasons by indicating result in the next verse, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “because I no longer have a place in these regions, and because I have a longing from a considerable number of years to come to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2602	15:23	b6kl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μηκέτι τόπον ἔχων ἐν τοῖς κλίμασι τούτοις	1	Paul uses this clause to imply that there were no more places in his area where people had not heard about Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “there are no more places in these regions where people have not heard about Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2603	15:23	slf1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ὑμᾶς	1	See how you translated you in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
2604	15:24	si59		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τὴν Σπανίαν	1	At that time, Spain was a Roman province west of Rome. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2605	15:24	c6wq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	διαπορευόμενος	1	This clause indicates something that would happen at the same time as the next clause. You can make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “while passing through” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
2606	15:24	ww2v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διαπορευόμενος	1	Paul implies that he would be passing through Rome on his way to Spain. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “passing through Rome” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2607	15:24	rzie		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὑφ’ ὑμῶν προπεμφθῆναι ἐκεῖ, ἐὰν ὑμῶν πρῶτον ἀπὸ μέρους ἐμπλησθῶ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for you to send me ahead to there, if you might first satisfy me for a while” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2608	15:24	hlc3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	ὑφ’ ὑμῶν προπεμφθῆναι ἐκεῖ	1	Here, sent ahead refers to receiving supplies needed for a journey. This is a polite way of asking for food or money. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “to be given some provisions for my journey to there by you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
2609	15:24	wg6d			ἐὰν ὑμῶν πρῶτον ἀπὸ μέρους ἐμπλησθῶ	1	Alternate translation: “if I might first enjoy being with you for a while”
2610	15:25	z3e5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	διακονῶν τοῖς ἁγίοις	1	This clause is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for him traveling to Jerusalem. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “for the purpose of ministering to the saints” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
2611	15:26	mjvr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul is going to minister to the saints in Jerusalem, as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation (without a comma following): “I am going to Jerusalem because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2612	15:26	vn1r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	εὐδόκησαν & Μακεδονία καὶ Ἀχαΐα	1	Paul uses Macedonia and Achaia here to refer to the Christians who lived in those areas. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers in Macedonia and Achaia were well-pleased” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2613	15:26	n0fb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	κοινωνίαν τινὰ ποιήσασθαι	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of contribution, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to contribute a certain amount” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2614	15:27	w5ap		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γάρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2615	15:27	px7a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	εὐδόκησαν & ὀφειλέται εἰσὶν	1	The two occurrences of they in this verse refer to the Christians in Macedonia and Achaia, whom Paul mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the believers in Macedonia and Achaia were pleased … those people are obligated to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2616	15:27	tfz1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτῶν & αὐτῶν & αὐτοῖς	1	In this verse, them and their refer to the Christians in Jerusalem. If it might be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish believers … their … those Jewish believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2617	15:27	ipij		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows is the reason the believers in Macedonia and Achaia are obligated to help the believers in Jerusalem. Use the most natural form in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “The reason for this is that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2618	15:27	en7l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	Paul uses if as if the rest of the verse were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because it is true that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
2619	15:28	jj6t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τοῦτο	1	Here, this refers to Paul traveling to Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this trip to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2620	15:28	zz8u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σφραγισάμενος αὐτοῖς τὸν καρπὸν τοῦτον	1	Paul speaks of the money he is taking to Jerusalem as if it werefruit, and he speaks of his delivery of the money as if he were sealing it for the poor believers in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having safely delivered this offering to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2621	15:28	gz16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	δι’ ὑμῶν	1	Paul uses you here to refer to the place where those people lived, which is Rome. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “through the area where you live” or “through where you are in Rome” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2622	15:28	ywlm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Σπανίαν	1	See how you translated Spain in 15:24. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2623	15:29	wod6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν πληρώματι εὐλογίας Χριστοῦ, ἐλεύσομαι	1	This could mean: (1) Paul and the believers in Rome will experience Christ’s blessing. Alternate translation: “I will come and we will experience the fullness of the blessing of Christ” (2) Paul will bring Christ’s blessing to the believers in Rome. Alternate translation: “I will bring the fullness of the blessing of Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2624	15:29	ylq8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν πληρώματι εὐλογίας Χριστοῦ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of fullness and blessing, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in the full experience of how Christ blesses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2625	15:29	st5e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν πληρώματι εὐλογίας Χριστοῦ	1	Here Paul speaks of abundantly experiencing the blessing of Christ as if it were something that a person could receive in a full amount. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in the abundant experience of the blessing of Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2626	15:30	v9iy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	See how you translated this word in 1:13. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2627	15:30	scg1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ διὰ τῆς ἀγάπης τοῦ Πνεύματος	1	The two occurrences of by in this verse indicate that what follows each one are the bases for Paul to urge his readers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the basis of our Lord Jesus Christ and on the basis of the love of the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2628	15:30	wq9l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῆς ἀγάπης τοῦ Πνεύματος	1	This could refer to: (1) the love that the Spirit gives to Christians. Alternate translation: “the love from the Spirit” (2) the love that belongs to the Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Spirit’s love” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2629	15:30	a5g4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ἀγάπης τοῦ Πνεύματος & ταῖς προσευχαῖς	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of love and prayers, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how you love from the Spirit … what you pray” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2630	15:30	fy1v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	συναγωνίσασθαί μοι	1	Paul speaks of praying fervently as if it were a struggle. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “to pray intensely together with me” or “to pray intensely with me as if striving together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2631	15:31	q3v8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἵνα & καὶ	1	Both occurrences of so that in this verse could indicate: (1) the contents of what they should pray. Alternate translation: “that … and that” (2) the purposes for praying. Alternate translation: “in order that … and in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2632	15:31	u7st		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ῥυσθῶ ἀπὸ τῶν ἀπειθούντων	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God might deliver me from the disobedient ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2633	15:31	gq4x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῶν ἀπειθούντων	1	Here, the disobedient ones refers to the Jews in Judea who disobeyed God by refusing to believe in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the unbelieving Jews” or “those Jews who do not trust in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2634	15:31	nw5h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	διακονία μου	1	Here, my service refers to the money that Paul was going to bring to the poor believers in Jerusalem from the believers in Macedonia and Achaia. This is a polite way of referring to bringing money. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “the money I bring” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
2635	15:31	li3i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ	1	Here, for Jerusalem means “for the poor of the saints in Jerusalem,” as mentioned in 15:26. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the poor saints in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2636	15:32	fe4d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἵνα	1	See how you translated so that in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2637	15:32	erby		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν χαρᾷ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of joy, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “while being joyful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2638	15:32	ekou		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	θελήματος Θεοῦ	1	See how you translated this phrase in 1:10. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2639	15:32	sgcl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	συναναπαύσωμαι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and might refresh myself together with” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2640	15:33	s947		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ὁ & Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe God who gives peace. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the God who gives peace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2641	15:33	ubtx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς εἰρήνης	1	See how you translated peace in 1:7. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2642	16:intro	qy96				0	Romans 16 General Notes Structure and Formatting Conclusion (15:14–16:27) Paul describes his mission (15:14–21) Paul’s travel plans (15:22–33) Paul commends Phoebe (16:1–2) Paul greets Christians in Rome (16:3–16) Paul warns against false teachers (16:17–20) Paul greets more Christians in Rome (16:21–24) Doxology (16:25–27) Special Concepts in this Chapter Letter writing and sending In this culture, someone who wanted to send a letter often spoke what they wanted to say, and a scribe would write it down for them. Then, they would send the letter with a messenger, who would read the letter to the person or people to whom it was addressed. In this chapter, Tertius mentions that he is the scribe writing the letter for Paul (16:22). Paul begins this chapter by recommending Phoebe to the believers in Rome who receive this letter. This could indicate that Phoebe was the messenger who delivered the letter to them. Greetings In this culture, it was common for those who sent letters to include greetings to and from others in their letters. In this way, many people could greet each other but only send one letter. In 16:3–16 and 21–23 Paul includes greetings to and from people whom he and the Romans knew. Express these greetings in a natural form in your language.
2643	16:1	sg6a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	συνίστημι	1	The pronoun I here and throughout this chapter refers to Paul, except for 16:22. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, commend” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2644	16:1	sry4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Φοίβην	1	The word Phoebe is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2645	16:1	q86q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	In this verse and throughout this chapter our refers to Paul and his Christian readers, so our would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2646	16:1	b81z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὴν ἀδελφὴν	1	Paul speaks of Phoebe as if she were the physical sister of him and his Christian readers. He means she has a brother-sister relationship with all Christians because she trusts in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our spiritual sister” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2647	16:1	mbn3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	διάκονον	1	See how you translated the abstract noun servant in 13:4. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2648	16:1	q669		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Κενχρεαῖς	1	The word Cenchrea was the name of a city in Greece. See how Cenchrea is translated in Acts 18:18. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2649	16:2	cwx1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	Here, in the Lord refers to Phoebe being a fellow believer in the Lord Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as someone who believes in the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2650	16:2	yic3			ἀξίως τῶν ἁγίων	1	Alternate translation: “in the way that believers should welcome other believers”
2651	16:2	g7of		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	καὶ	1	Here, and indicates that what follows is a second purpose for Paul to commend Phoebe to the believers in Rome. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and in order that you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
2652	16:2	qp4w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	παραστῆτε αὐτῇ	1	Here, stand by refers to helping someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “might assist her” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2653	16:2	i0fm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul wants the Roman believers to help Phoebe. Use the most natural form in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “The reason I want you to do this is that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2654	16:2	inh1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	καὶ γὰρ αὐτὴ προστάτις πολλῶν ἐγενήθη καὶ ἐμοῦ αὐτοῦ	2	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of benefactor, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “For she has also benefited many, and myself as well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2655	16:3-16	na1k				0	General Information: As was customary in his culture, in 16:3–16 Paul begins to conclude the letter by extending greetings to the people to whom he is writing. Your language may have a particular way of sharing greetings in a letter. If so, you could use that form here. Alternate translation: “I enthusiastically ask to be remembered to” or “I send regards to”
2656	16:3	xigr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	ἀσπάσασθε	1	Greet here and throughout 16:3–16 is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. Alternate translation: “Please give my greetings to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
2657	16:3	c5lg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Πρίσκαν καὶ Ἀκύλαν	1	The word Prisca is the name of a woman who is also called “Priscilla” in Acts 18:2. Aquila is the name of her husband. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2658	16:3	fsk1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοὺς συνεργούς μου	1	Here, fellow workers refers to people who work together with Paul to tell other people about Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “who worked with me to preach the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2659	16:3	uo3a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	Here, in Christ Jesus could refer to: (1) the kind of work that Prisca and Aquila did with Paul. Alternate translation: “in the service of Christ Jesus” (2) being united with Christ, as this phrase is used in 3:24; 6:11, 23; 8:1–2, 39; and 15:17. Alternate translation: “who are united to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2660	16:4	ilnn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	οἵτινες ὑπὲρ τῆς ψυχῆς μου, τὸν ἑαυτῶν τράχηλον ὑπέθηκαν, οἷς οὐκ ἐγὼ μόνος εὐχαριστῶ, ἀλλὰ καὶ πᾶσαι αἱ ἐκκλησίαι τῶν ἐθνῶν	1	This verse interrupts the main part of the sentence in 16:3–5 in order to give further information about Prisca and Aquila. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this verse as its own sentence and repeat the main verb of the previous verse in the next verse, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
2661	16:4	fye8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τὸν ἑαυτῶν τράχηλον ὑπέθηκαν	1	This phrase refers to doing something that would put someone in danger of being executed. Romans often executed people by chopping their heads off at the neck with an axe. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “risked having their heads chopped off by the Roman authorities” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2662	16:4	xmf8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐγὼ & εὐχαριστῶ	1	Here Paul speaks of expressing thanks as if they were something that he could give to someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am thankful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2663	16:5	i32d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	καὶ τὴν κατ’ οἶκον αὐτῶν ἐκκλησίαν	1	This clause continues the sentence that Paul began in 16:3 and interrupted in the previous verse. If you made the previous verse into its own sentence, then here you will need to add the main verb from 16:3. Alternate translation: “and greet the church based in their house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2664	16:5	d6i0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οἶκον αὐτῶν	1	The pronoun their here refers to Prisca and Aquila. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the house of Prisca and Aquila” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2665	16:5	qqdg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	ἀσπάσασθε	1	See how you translated Greet in 16:3. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
2666	16:5	bn9z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἐπαίνετον	1	The word Epaenetus is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2667	16:5	d1f1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀπαρχὴ τῆς Ἀσίας εἰς Χριστόν	1	Paul speaks of Epaenetus as if he were fruit that he had harvested. He means that Epaenetus was the first person in Asia who believed in Christ as a result of Paul’s preaching. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the first person in Asia to believe in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2668	16:6	ew2z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Μαρίαν	1	The word Mary is the name of a woman. Several women in the Bible are named Mary because it was a common Jewish name. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2669	16:7	tzk4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἀνδρόνικον	1	The word Andronicus is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2670	16:7	z9uk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰουνίαν	1	Junias could refer to: (1) a woman named Junia, in which case Andronicus and Junias might be a married couple like Prisca and Aquila. See the UST. (2) the shortened form of Junianus, a man’s name, which is less likely. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2671	16:7	ycr0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοὺς συγγενεῖς μου	1	Here, kinsmen could refer to: (1) Jewish Christians. Alternate translation: “my Jewish Christian kinsmen” (2) Christian relatives of Paul. Alternate translation: “my Christian relatives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2672	16:7	gce3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οἵτινές εἰσιν ἐπίσημοι ἐν τοῖς ἀποστόλοις	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom the apostles know very well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2673	16:7	nvw5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	οἳ	1	Here, who indicates that what follows is further information about Andronicus and Junias. It is not information about the apostles. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation (as a new sentence): “These two people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
2674	16:7	ylvm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ	1	Here, in Christ refers to being united with Christ. See how you translated the same use of this phrase in 3:24. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2675	16:8	h976		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἀμπλιᾶτον	1	The word Ampliatus is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2676	16:8	alh2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	See how you translated the same use of this phrase in 16:2. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2677	16:9	bd5l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Οὐρβανὸν & Στάχυν	1	The words Urbanus and Stachys are names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2678	16:9	if0q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν συνεργὸν ἡμῶν ἐν Χριστῷ	1	See how you translated a similar phrase in 16:3. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2679	16:10	k55t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἀπελλῆν & Ἀριστοβούλου	1	The words Apelles and Aristobulus are names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2680	16:10	q96n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸν δόκιμον ἐν Χριστῷ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom Christ has approved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2681	16:11	gt6r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἡρῳδίωνα & Ναρκίσσου	1	The words Herodion and Narcissus are names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2682	16:11	iifk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν συγγενῆ	1	See how you translated “kinsmen” in 16:7. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2683	16:11	ket9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	Here, in the Lord refers to being united to Christ and has the same meaning as “in Christ” in 16:7 and 3:24. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “united to the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2684	16:12	sq9n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Τρύφαιναν & Τρυφῶσαν & Περσίδα	1	The words Tryphaena, Tryphosa, and Persis are names of women. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2685	16:12	vkh4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν Κυρίῳ	-1	See how you translated a similar use of in the Lord in 16:3. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2686	16:13	zmf4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ῥοῦφον	1	The word Rufus is the name of a man. See how this name is translated in Mark 15:21. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2687	16:13	zy3x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸν ἐκλεκτὸν ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one whom God has elected” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2688	16:13	hqf6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὴν μητέρα αὐτοῦ καὶ ἐμοῦ	1	Paul speaks of the mother of Rufus as if she were his own mother. He means that she treated him as if he were her own child. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his mother, whom I also think of as my mother” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2689	16:14	dwh9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἀσύγκριτον, Φλέγοντα, Ἑρμῆν, Πατροβᾶν, Ἑρμᾶν	1	These are names of five men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2690	16:14	ck2w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφούς	1	See how you translated this word in 1:13. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2691	16:14	il54		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοὺς σὺν αὐτοῖς ἀδελφούς	1	Here, with them implies that these people meet together as a church. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the brothers who meet with them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2692	16:15	ye9j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Φιλόλογον & Νηρέα & Ὀλυμπᾶν	1	The words Philologus, Nereus, and Olympas are names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2693	16:15	n2rx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰουλίαν	1	The word Julia is the name of a woman. She was probably the wife of Philologus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2694	16:15	j4uu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοὺς σὺν αὐτοῖς πάντας ἁγίους	1	See how you translated with them in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2695	16:16	nxka		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	ἀσπάσασθε	1	See how you translated Greet in 16:3. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
2696	16:16	g2z1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	φιλήματι ἁγίῳ	1	Here, a holy kiss describes a kiss that believers would give to other believers (that is why it is holy). In Paul’s culture, this was an appropriate way to greet someone with whom one was very close, such as a family member or a good friend. You could use a greeting that is used by close friends or family members and clarify that here it is used in a holy or Christian way. Alternate translation: “with a Christian hug” or “in warm way that is appropriate for fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2697	16:16	t1q4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἀσπάζονται ὑμᾶς αἱ ἐκκλησίαι πᾶσαι τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	All here could refer to: (1) all the churches that were in the area where Paul was working when he wrote this letter. Alternate translation: “All the churches of Christ in this region” (2) all the churches that Paul had authority over or represented. Alternate translation: “All the churches of Christ that I represent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2698	16:17	wx6r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	See how you translated this word in 1:13. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2699	16:17	ztv5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὰς διχοστασίας & τὰ σκάνδαλα & τὴν διδαχὴν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of divisions, obstacles, and teaching, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what divides … what obstructs … what is taught” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2700	16:17	n59l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοὺς τὰς διχοστασίας καὶ τὰ σκάνδαλα & ποιοῦντας	1	This phrase refers to causing believers to argue with each other. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2701	16:17	atil		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὰ σκάνδαλα	1	See how you translated “trap” in 11:9 and 14:13. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2702	16:17	j9x7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	παρὰ τὴν διδαχὴν ἣν ὑμεῖς ἐμάθετε	1	This clause could refer to: (1) the traps. Alternate translation: “which are contrary to the teaching that you have learned” (2) the means by which these people are causing divisions and traps. Alternate translation: “by doing what is contrary to the teaching that you have learned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2703	16:17	b318		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐκκλίνετε ἀπ’ αὐτῶν	1	Here, turn away refers to avoiding someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “avoid them completely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2704	16:18	yij5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2705	16:18	fpvs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τοιοῦτοι	1	Here, these refers to “those who are causing division and traps,” who are mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “such as those causing such divisions and traps” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2706	16:18	azob		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῷ Κυρίῳ ἡμῶν Χριστῷ οὐ δουλεύουσιν	1	Here, enslaved to our Lord Christ refers to living under the control of our Lord Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “are not living in submission to our Lord Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2707	16:18	ea6h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ τῇ ἑαυτῶν κοιλίᾳ	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “but they are enslaved to their own stomach” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2708	16:18	nxn4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῇ ἑαυτῶν κοιλίᾳ	1	Here, stomach could refer to: (1) physical desires, especially the desires to eat or drink. Alternate translation: “to their own physical desires” (2) pleasing oneself. Alternate translation: “to their own pleasure” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2709	16:18	gddw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	διὰ τῆς χρηστολογίας καὶ εὐλογίας	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of speech and flattery, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “through speaking smoothly and flatteringly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2710	16:18	c2je		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὰς καρδίας	1	See how you translated “heart” in 1:21. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2711	16:19	vqml		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that was follows is one reason why Paul’s readers should obey the command to “watch out for” and “turn away from” false teachers. Use the most natural form in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “Watch out for and turn away from these people since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2712	16:19	imc7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἡ & ὑμῶν ὑπακοὴ, εἰς πάντας ἀφίκετο	1	Here Paul speaks of the Roman believers’ obedience as if it were a person who could go to people. He means that many people had heard about their obedience. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “your obedience has been heard about by everyone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
2713	16:19	o1b9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ & ὑμῶν ὑπακοὴ & τὸ ἀγαθόν & τὸ κακόν	1	See how you translated obedience in 5:19 and good and evil in 7:19. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2714	16:19	gj2r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντας	1	Here, everyone is an exaggeration that Paul uses to show that many believers had heard about the obedience of the Roman believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “very many people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2715	16:20	bnni		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ὁ & Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης	1	See how you translated this phrase in 15:33. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2716	16:20	s3cq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	συντρίψει τὸν Σατανᾶν ὑπὸ τοὺς πόδας ὑμῶν	1	Here Paul speaks of the Roman believers having victory over Satan as if they would crush him under their feet. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will cause you to have complete victory over Satan” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2717	16:20	qpr7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τάχει. ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, μεθ’ ὑμῶν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of haste and grace, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “hastily. May the Lord Jesus Christ act graciously toward you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2718	16:20	btor			ἐν τάχει	1	The phrase translated as with haste can also refer to something happening after a short time period. Alternate translation: “in a short time” or “soon”
2719	16:20	oo2r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing	ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, μεθ’ ὑμῶν	1	As was customary in his culture, Paul closes his letter with a blessing for the Roman believers. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “May you experience kindness from our Lord Jesus Christ” or “I pray that you will have grace from our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
2720	16:21	z4g3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ συνεργός μου	1	See how you translated the similar phrase in 16:3. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2721	16:21	ku15		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Λούκιος & Ἰάσων & Σωσίπατρος	1	The words Lucius, Jason, and Sosipater are names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2722	16:21	km7u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ συγγενεῖς μου	1	See how you translated this phrase in 16:7. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2723	16:21	wvzj			ἀσπάζεται ὑμᾶς	1	As was customary in this culture, Paul concludes the letter by extending greetings from people who are with him and who know the people to whom he is writing. Your language may have a particular way of sharing greetings in a letter. If so, you can use that form here. Alternate translation: “send you their greetings” or “ask to be remembered to you”
2724	16:22	pijj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐγὼ, Τέρτιος, ὁ γράψας τὴν ἐπιστολὴν	1	This clause means that Tertius wrote down the words that Paul told him to write in this letter. In ancient times it was common for people to use scribes to physically write dictated letters for them. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “I, Tertius, am the person who wrote down what Paul told me to write in this epistle” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2725	16:22	g8li		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	ἀσπάζομαι ὑμᾶς ἐγὼ, Τέρτιος, ὁ γράψας τὴν ἐπιστολὴν, ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	I here refers to Tertius, who writes this verse. Unlike elsewhere in this letter, it does not refer to Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the third person in this verse. Alternate translation: “Tertius, who wrote this epistle, greets you in the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
2726	16:22	xu3q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Τέρτιος	1	The word Tertius is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2727	16:22	nx4g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	See how you translated the similar use of in the Lord in 16:2. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2728	16:23	sw7r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Γάϊος & Ἔραστος & Κούαρτος	1	The words Gaius, Erastus, and Quartus are names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2729	16:23	j9u7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ ξένος μου, καὶ ὅλης τῆς ἐκκλησίας	1	This phrase indicates that the home of Gaius was where Paul and his fellow believers gathered to worship. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “who hosts me and the whole church in his house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2730	16:23	m5hg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ οἰκονόμος	1	Here, steward refers to the person who takes care of the money for the city in which Paul is staying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the treasurer” or “the one who administrates the finances” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2731	16:23	fnet		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφός	1	Here, brother refers to a fellow Christian. See how you translated brother in 14:10. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2732	16:24	ct9t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	Ἡ χάρις τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ χριστοῦ μετὰ πάντων ὑμῶν. Ἀμήν	1	This verse is not in the best earliest manuscripts. It seems to be an accidental repetition of the last part of 16:20. It has been included in the ULT, but it is marked off with square brackets (\[ \]) at the beginning and end. If possible, do not include this addition in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
2733	16:25	xma1				0	16:25–27 are one long sentence. If you divide this sentence into shorter sentences, then you will need to repeat part of 16:27 in 16:25, as the UST does.
2734	16:25	v71l			δὲ	1	Now here marks the closing section of the letter. If you have a way of doing this in your language, you could use it here.
2735	16:25	xgkv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῷ & δυναμένῳ ὑμᾶς στηρίξαι	1	Here, the one refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to God, who is able to establish you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2736	16:25	pp5k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὑμᾶς στηρίξαι	1	Here Paul speaks of God strengthening a person’s faith as if God were establishing that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to make your faith strong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2737	16:25	kmw1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ εὐαγγέλιόν μου	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the gospel message that he preached. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the gospel that I preach” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2738	16:25	yprj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ κήρυγμα Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the preaching that is about Jesus Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the preaching about Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2739	16:25	wyyl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ κήρυγμα & ἀποκάλυψιν μυστηρίου	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of preaching, revelation, and mystery, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what is preached … what is revealed of what is mysterious” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2740	16:25	vyj4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν μυστηρίου	1	Here, according to indicates that what follows is what Paul’s preaching is based on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the basis of the revelation of the mystery” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2741	16:25	s5ky		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	μυστηρίου	1	Here Paul uses the word mystery to refer to God’s plan to save people, which was revealed in the gospel. This does not mean that the idea is hard to understand, but rather, that God had not yet revealed it to people. If your language would not use mystery to refer to something that was concealed but has now been revealed, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “of this concealed message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2742	16:25	n6c1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν μυστηρίου χρόνοις αἰωνίοις σεσιγημένου	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “according to the mystery that God has now revealed, yet had kept secret for long ages” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2743	16:25	bgqm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	χρόνοις αἰωνίοις σεσιγημένου	1	This clause gives further information about the mystery, which is also the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to make this connection clear. Alternate translation: “which is what was kept secret for long ages” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
2744	16:26	d7r5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	φανερωθέντος δὲ νῦν	1	This clause gives further information about “the mystery,” which is also the “gospel” mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to make this connection clear. Alternate translation: “but now that mystery has been revealed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
2745	16:26	kgs8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	φανερωθέντος δὲ νῦν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “but now God has revealed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2746	16:26	vrul		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	διά τε Γραφῶν προφητικῶν, κατ’ ἐπιταγὴν τοῦ αἰωνίου Θεοῦ εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως, εἰς πάντα τὰ ἔθνη γνωρισθέντος	1	The word translated as and here indicates that the following four phrases are connected to the fifth phrase. If it would be helpful in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “and having been made known through the prophetic writings, according to the command of the eternal God, to the obedience of faith, to all the nations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2747	16:26	efyy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	Γραφῶν προφητικῶν & ἐπιταγὴν τοῦ αἰωνίου Θεοῦ εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of writings, command, obedience, and faith, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what was written by the prophets … what the eternal God commanded, that we should obey as an act of faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2748	16:26	fbr6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως	1	Here, to indicates that this is a purpose clause. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of the obedience of faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
2749	16:26	lc6d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ὑπακοὴν πίστεως	1	See how you translated this phrase in 1:5. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2750	16:26	cvi3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γνωρισθέντος	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God having made known” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2751	16:27	kuyu			μόνῳ σοφῷ Θεῷ	1	Alternate translation: “to God who alone is wise”
2752	16:27	ua9d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ᾧ ἡ δόξα	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word glory, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “may people glorify him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])